Home

MFG/PRO eB User Guide: European Accounting

1. When all receipts and issues by period lot have been determined costs need to be rolled up using IES Routing Cost Roll Up 30 18 3 5 and IES Structure Co
2. bvienian Aooounieeg Dema g ddh Ua Mew Edt Queues Opies Hein E Malin Menu hs Financials ot 30 Cost Management te ite econ cra hla Lea ame pao Bi ae a JES Finir Copy te Cot Sal IES Fuchse Copp bo Coi Set JEG Powdery Cos Aol Up IES Simus Coat Aol Up rT bab el 20 18 3 Cost Rollup Menu The first option shown on this menu is a standard MFG PRO function that is normally located in the Cost Management Menu For convenience it can also be activated here The second two functions are optional ones in the I E S process but the final two are mandatory ones Indeed IES Structure Cost Roll Up 30 18 3 6 is one of the key I E S functions as it is the one that performs the actual LIFO or FIFO evaluation itself Performing Cost Rollups In order to complete an Inventory Evaluation you must now calculate the costs of manufactured items This is achieved by running the two IES Cost Roll Up functions firstly I E S Routing Cost Roll Up 30 18 3 5 followed by Structure Cost Roll Up 30 18 3 6 These two steps are mandatory They must be performed for all manufactured items Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 398 European Accounting User Guide LE S Routing Cost Roll up 30 18 3 5 This function is based on the standard MFG PRO function Simulation Cost Rollup 30 13 18 The main difference is that you are prompted to enter an I E S simulation set and a range of periods w
3. INVOICE Invoice 1ai00022 Revision 0 Invoi Date 19 0 Page 1 Print Date 19 03 01 Bill To imhus1l Sold To imhusl imh test us address imh test us address United States of America United States of America Your VAT Reg GB 123456789 Sales Order 10197 Ship Date 15 03 01 Order Date 01 03 01 Purchase Order Salesperson s Ship To imhusl Ship Via Credit Terms BOL FOB Point Resale Remarks Item Number UM Shipped Backorder Tax Price Net Price 10 15000 EA 10 0 0 0 yes 500 00 5 000 00 Customer Item P313767 NOMAD TM COOLING SYSTEM AUTOMOTIVE UNIT Non Taxable 0 00 Currency USD Line Total 5 000 00 Taxable 5 000 00 0 00 Discount 0 00 Tax Date 19 03 01 Service 10 0 00 Freight 20 2 0 00 Special 30 0 00 Total Tax 500 00 Total 5 500 00 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 270 VAT Register Reports European Accounting User Guide You can run a report showing details of all VAT registers using VAT Register Report 2 13 7 3 An example of such a report is given below VAT Register Report 2 13 7 3 euvtrgrp p c7la Page 1 VAT Register Site Active EC VAT Register Header For Purchase VAT Register Next Page Number Header For Sales VAT Register Next Page Number Invoice Sequence ID Credit Note Sequence ID Voucher Sequence ID Correction Invoice Sequence ID euvtrgrp p c7la Page 2 VAT Register Site Active EC VAT
4. Product Lines In MFG PRO all inventory activity occurs at a primary site entity that is the site at which the order is processed However it is possible to ship receive or issue the inventory from a different site This other site may have different costs from the primary site When this happens a variance occurs since the original site may have expected to pay more or less for the item In standard MFG PRO this variance is posted to the Transfer Variance account determined by the site European Accounting changes this in the sense that the account sub account are determined by the product line instead of by site A new field Discrepancy Tfr Acc has been added to Product Line Maintenance 1 2 1 to allow this to be done Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 28 European Accounting User Guide Product Line Maintenance added Discrepancy Tfr account Credit Terms European Accounting adds an additional option to MFG PRO s standard Credit Terms functionality enabling you to force due dates or discount dates on specific days in a month Two new fields are added to Credit Terms Maintenance 2 19 1 to allow you to do this Both these fields have the label 30 Days When the 30 Days flag is activated the Date From field is always assumed to be 2 in the calculation of due dates and discount days even when Date From has a different setting Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 2 S
5. Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 9 Journals 327 WO Journal By Account W02 previously 25 9 4 5 Report Content List Account Code Sub Account Cost Center GL Reference GL Description Effective Date Daybook Code List DB 16 JL Journal By Reference JL1 previously 25 9 5 1 Report Content List GL Reference Account Code Sub Account Cost Center GL Description Effective Date Daybook Code List DB 14 JL Journal By Account JL2 previously 25 9 5 2 Report Content List Account Code Sub Account Cost Center GL Reference GL Description Effective Date Daybook Code List DB 14 RV Journal By Reference RV1 previously 25 9 5 4 Report Content List GL Reference Account Code Sub Account Cost Center GL Description Effective Date Daybook Code List DB 15 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 328 European Accounting User Guide RV Journal By Account RV2 previously 25 9 5 5 Report Content List Account Code Sub Account Cost Center GL Reference GL Description Effective Date Daybook Code List DB 15 GL Book G01 previously 25 9 7 Report Content List Account Code Account Description Cost Center Effective Date GL Reference Document Type Document GL Description Address Begin Balance Cum Balance Daybook Code List Sort Order Database Field Sub Total By Account code o GL reference A
6. Automatic Selection Use Payment Selection Automatic 28 9 4 1 if you want to create payment selections automatically Automatic selection of open vouchers Fagen Spleriisn Asainn ali The top of the window shows the payment selection By default the first available payment selection that has not yet been processed is suggested In this example this is bank AA and payment method PC The lower part of the screen shows the selection rules you can enter for the selection of vouchers to include in this payment selection Note The selection of vouchers is limited to the entity of the selected bank Bank The bank of the active payment selection you are about to create or change Payment Method The method of payment of the active payment selection you are about to create or change Currency The currency of the payment selection Check Date The check date used to determine the discount amounts Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 237 Overwrite Old Selection Enter Yes or No to specify if you want the old selection to be over written This means that the planned payments that are already available are not deleted When the selection of Dr Cr memos leads to already available planned payments then the amount of the planned payment is set to the result of this selection Delete Old Selection Enter Yes or No to specify if you want to delete all the already available pla
7. For example after running IES Structure Cost Roll Up 30 18 3 6 you might realize that you made mistakes in entering some of the component costs Running IES Data Resynchronization 30 18 1 5 will effectively undo the structure cost rollup and restore the data to its previous state You would then be able to correct this data before performing the structure cost rollup again You would not need to retrieve the original source data edit that and rerun the entire I E S process Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 401 Reporting After the cost rollups are completed you are then ready to report the results You do this using functions found on the Inventory Evaluation Report Menu 30 18 5 Inventory Evaluation Report Menu 30 18 5 istan Fed r Haon Pereka o One generic report is available the IES Inventory Eval Report 30 18 5 13 This reports all the results of a simulation for both calculation methods An Italian specific report Italian LIFO Report 30 18 1 5 is also available Refer to Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues for details on this report and the other Italian specific features accessed from this menu Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 402 European Accounting User Guide Inventory Evaluation Report The generic IES Inventory Eval Report 30 18 5 13 allows you to run a report for a specific simulation range of periods
8. If the separate submission and discounting of drafts has been enabled setting both the Submit and Discount flags in Single Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 9 to Yes will combine the submission and discounting operations into one However while this is may appear to be effectively the same operation as is carried out by default when the Separate Submission Discounting flag in the Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 98 European Accounting User Guide European Accounting Control File 25 23 is set to No this is not actually the case Different GL entries will be created from those that are generated when this flag is set to No and the resulting status of the draft will also be different Submit and Discount Together In this situation you can enter the appropriate e Cash Account and amount e Discount Charges Account and amount e Bank Clearing Account and amount For example for a draft of 117 50 choosing to submit and discount together would generate the GL entries shown in the table below You should note that as the creation of a proposed draft does not have any GL effect a proposed draft must effectively be approved at the same time it is submitted in order to ensure the correct GL entries are created Thus submitting and discounting a proposed draft generates more GL entries than submitting and discounting an approved draft Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Recei
9. Automatic Selection Use AR Payment Selection Automatic 27 6 4 1 if you want to create AR payment selections using the automatic method Automatic selection of open AR memos The top of the window shows the payment selection We have chosen bank AA and payment method AC You can see that in this payment selection the amount of 100 00 is already selected The lower part of the screen shows the selection rules you can enter for the selection of Dr Cr memos to include in this payment selection Bank The bank of the active payment selection you are about to create or change Payment Method The method of payment of the active payment selection you are about to create or change Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 220 European Accounting User Guide Overwrite Old Selection Enter Yes or No to determine if you want the old selection to be over written This means that the planned payments that are already available are not deleted When the selection of Dr Cr memos leads to already available planned payments then the amount of the planned payment is set to the result of this selection Delete Old Selection Enter Yes or No to specify if you want to delete all planned payments already available Check Date The check date for the planned payments This date is used to determine the discount amount Max Amount A maximum amount to select for payment by this payment selection When you leave this amount empty no ma
10. Counter booking the Waiting Expenses Account Diti ibti Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 148 European Accounting User Guide Manual Payments Accounts Payable payments are enhanced in European Accounting e Payment method a new powerful feature that allows many different payment methods to be used against the same bank has been introduced by European Accounting You must to enter a payment method Refer to Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods e When you leave the check number blank a new check number is assigned according to the payment method e You can create unapplied distribution lines Refer to Chapter 6 Cash Management The modifications are marked in the check header window shown below Manual Check Maintenance header window Paym Meth The payment method This has to be a valid payment method for module AP for the bank of the check The default payment method is determined by the European Accounting Control File Check The check number If you leave the check number blank European Accounting will assign a new check number based on the payment method just entered Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 5 Accounts Payable 149 In the distribution lines the change is that when you leave the voucher blank you are allowed to choose between creating a non AP line or an unapplied line Manual Payments Distribution lines Proprietary information Property
11. European Accounting User Guide Out of sub operation numbers for period item operation Cannot create next mean routing part During mean data generation an item may be found that appears on two different work orders that both contain an operation that is numbered the same on both The work orders might be associated with two different work centers and so involve different costs To preserve work center information in mean routings parallel sub operations have to be created when operation numbers are duplicated across work orders and cost centers These sub operations are numbered from 0 to 10000000 In the unlikely event that you receive this message it indicates that the numbering of these sub operations exceeds the permitted range No item master for item is defined Mean Data Generation has tried to copy a structure or a routing for an item that is not defined in the Item Master As MDG only processes items directly from the range of items shown in the Item Master table this message will only appear if the Item Master record has been deleted during processing There is no standard BOM for item and period The product structure record could not be copied from standard MFG PRO as no standard product structure for the specified item exists in the specified period IES product structure for period parent component reference and start date already exists Overlap protection should ensure that only one record exists for
12. Tet H Prnchace Dude Credit Tems bint a o Remarks Fleptien me Entered Dy inh Orsginal irwaice FicHalp F2 Go ESC End Fi Delete Cuk Lu Copr Pain Browses are available allowing you to select VAT registers and operation codes other than the default ones if you so wish The ones you enter must be valid for that particular combination of customer and site The system checks to ensure the VAT register selected is active and that numbers remain available within its numbering sequence range This VAT register is then assigned to the sales order When entering order lines the system checks the consistency of the VAT registers and will display an error message if you attempt to record an order line with a tax code linked to a different VAT register This is determined based upon the Tax Types defined within the tax environment Tax Usage and Tax Class for each order line If the total value of a sales order is positive the system will generate an invoice If the total value of a sales order is negative the system will generate a credit note The system will automatically transfer the operation code and VAT register shown on the sales order to the invoice or credit note The system will also generate an invoice or credit note number automatically based on the selected VAT register Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 269 Invoice with Automatically Generated Invoice Number
13. To be able to report flows between two physical locations you have to know the address of the MFG PRO location as well European Accounting adds a frame at the foot of the Location Maintenance 1 1 18 window to allow you to do this Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 12 Shipping Documents 421 Location Maintenance 1 1 18 extra address window Loran Mamnlenanoe Ure Mena Fol gusu Options Help Cb Ce ee A Sate T0000 San Diego Han Plant Location 100 Qeeciption Flaw MaberislsyAccemblesa Invenbery Salus Progen Blan Dabs Crested Orfiz ise Pomarent Yer Tape Single bemc Me Single Lowel Me Cape i UHE Fiscal Acktbesa TOUT Physical Adds OO Fi Help Fe G0 ESC End Pi ielete Colt tet CopyPaste Fiscal Addr The MFG PRO address code for the fiscal address of this location that is the address of the company that pays taxes for this location Physical Addr The MFG PRO address code for the physical address of this location Both these fields are mandatory and the addresses you enter must be valid ones Creating Shippers Whenever any issue of goods is performed between two different physical locations the enhanced functionality calls standard MFG PRO Global Shipping functions to determine if a shipping document is needed for any particular movement of goods Refer to Stock Transfer Functions for further information on when shippers are needed If a shipper is needed and t
14. A data file can be transferred to the bank to have the payment executed A separate function is available to create duplicate media in case the original media are lost printer failure etc This separate function should be password protected The objective of the payment selection logic is to create media that can be processed by the bank Therefore a number of validations have been added to European Accounting to check e Format of customer supplier s bank account e Payment methods e Currency e Payment or demand for payment is not made for more than the relevant balance Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 190 European Accounting User Guide Refer to the following sections for details Validation of Customer Supplier s Bank Account Many payment methods require certain formats of bank accounts Therefore at the level of the customer or supplier a bank account validation is added by European Accounting Available validations are e 11 The 11 check as standard for bank accounts in the Netherlands e 12 The 12 check as used in Belgium e IT Italian A third party bank has to be available e DE German Bank account and Bankleitzahl have to be available e FR France French bank account validation e ES Spain Spanish bank account validation Customer bank account validation fank Accounts Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 191
15. AR Payment Selection Register 27 6 4 4 v Execute payments and creation of drafts or AR payments and payment media AR Payment Autom Checks Drafts 27 6 4 6 v When media are lost create duplicate Creation of Duplicate Media 27 6 4 9 In the European Accounting Control File defaults can be specified for the bank and payment method of the customer These defaults are copied to the customer when a customer record is created Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 217 The default bank and method of payment can be specified at customer level When AR memos are created bank and payment method are automatically assigned based on the customer in the following functions e Invoice Post 7 13 4 e CR DR Memo Maintenance 27 1 The bank of payment method can be changed on the created AR memo When AR Payments AR Drafts or AP Checks are created also the payment method is requested Based on the payment method the payment or draft reference number is created In case of manual payments or drafts the bank and payment method are derived from Document Data Default Bank Default Payment Method Customer 2 1 1 European Accounting Control File European Accounting Control File 25 23 25 23 Supplier 2 3 1 Accounts Payable Control File Accounts Payable Control File 28 24 28 24 AR Memo Invoice 27 1 Customer 2 1 1 Customer 2 1 1 AR Payment Manual Check Cu
16. Contents EUROPEAN ACCOUNTING USER GUIDE Chapter 1 INtrodUCtON wiiccccissscavdissscsitscdvarassesusediancuavasasdvandusncuaeausvdsavduandnaecuawerens 1 What Is European ACCOUNTING ee eee eesecsecssecesecsseceseceseeeseeeeneeeneseneeeseecaaecsaecsaecaeseaeeesaees 2 Financial Enhancements areen a a a TE E tutesenvovsdicgsaneurtnesme A SA E 2 EDE Ee S CAL EEEE E EA SE E E A E ERE 4 B nk Format Drivers eoe a eE E E E TOA E E TREE ETNE 4 Base Cuitrency Conversion 5s20sc asce see eeri esep Ee TETES EE SE rE E r EE TEETE TE E Eseo r E ESES E Es 4 European Accounting Restrictions cs ceecssecesecssecssecesecesseceseceseceseceseeeseeesneeeaeeeneeesaeenaeenaees 5 Customi atiO isses in seiret EEEE EEEE eae Wes Wd EE E ET E E EEEn 5 Chapter 2 Setup and Basic Data eeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeennees 7 European Accounting Control File ee enient e i Ee eA E a ade iee 8 Operation Lype Shetsin ii eeen einer ENEE E E ACE a EE AEE OEA E E EEEE REE 11 County Table ssar te 2 eet E EA E a aE a E O EE Aa aa Wack ies ite E be teeth 13 CUStOM ETS 6 ae R S TN E Ee E A E dade SE ETE aeases 14 e18 DI ELS KOSSA E E E E E A T T A T A 18 Changed Address Information enesenn i a a i 23 CUENCIES hennir eeen e E AE R ER E E e O tush a E EREE 24 Purchase Gain Loss Account by Product Line sseeeeeeeseesseeeeesseesresreerrsresressresresreeresressesees 25 Product Lines enn oraa ce ates daca cast cao NEAKEN so AAEE
17. For each algorithm European Accounting searches through all un matched transactions for the defined entity account sub account address cost center and project up to and including the specified effective date It then matches those un matched transactions to transactions in the General Ledger according to the rules given below for the appropriate algorithm Algorithm 2 Sorts transactions on customer of supplier address and matches all transactions where the appropriate accounts are in balance Algorithm 3 Searches for the voucher its associated receiver inventory transaction history record and finally the receiver s GL transaction Vouchers and receivers that belong to the same account are matched Algorithm 4 AP Searches the check lines and then their associated vouchers Provided the GL transactions for the voucher belong to the same account the checks and vouchers are matched with each other Algorithm 5 AP Matches the GL entries for Check Cancellation with the associated entries in Check Creation Algorithm 6 AR P ayments or Searches for the associated GL transactions for the Drafts invoices or memos and matches them against each other provided they are both for the same account Algorithm 7 AR Draft Matches the GL entries for Draft Submission with the associated entries in Draft Creation or matches the GL entries for Draft Reconciliation with the associated entries in Draft Submission Algorithm 8 RV Searches for all re
18. Note If you have already run Mean Data Generation and the Cost Roll Ups running IES Auto Period Generation will delete all cost and quantity data In this situation you would need to repeat the I E S process from Mean Data Generation onwards Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 383 Excluding Parts and Locations At setup time you can exclude parts and locations from the inventory evaluation using IES Excluded Part Maintenance 30 18 1 18 and IES Excluded Location Maint 30 18 1 21 Use IES Excluded Part Maintenance 30 18 1 18 to enter items that are not needed in the evaluation Any items not entered are assumed to be part of the evaluation For example local legal restrictions may not permit prototype items to be included in inventory evaluations If you choose to exclude prototypes from the evaluation should any prototype product exists as part of a finished item the receipt cost for that item will be calculated without the cost of the prototype component If you leave the Simulation field blank you can exclude an item from all IES simulation sets at the same time IES Excluded Part Maintenance 30 18 1 18 HES Esclided Part Mainlenance Mia Ui Memu Edt Quas Oplere Hein ttm eer Simula FAO AN FIF Walia Simulaten Year 2000 Nem 44 7001 Drsiiipiios Ere P i Linii FisHeip Fe Ge ESCeEnd F5sDelse Orhi Cut Copp Paste a Use IES Excluded L
19. Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 164 European Accounting User Guide Cash Book Maintenance European Accounting has added a large amount of new functionality to Cash Book Maintenance 31 13 e The balance of a statement can be calculated from the ending balance of the previous statement e You can delete cash book lines e You now see the references related to cash book lines e For Accounts Receivable you can reconcile payments both single and ranges and drafts e It is now possible to enter petty cash transactions in the Cash Book together with the associated tax entries e Several Account Payable and Accounts Receivable reports have been enhanced to show the bank slip numbers of the relevant AP and AR payments The terminology used within the cash book is also different from that used within standard MFG PRO In European Accounting the term beginning balance is used instead of book balance Much of this chapter looks in detail at the enhancements added to Cash Book Maintenance 31 13 by European Accounting by looking at the flow and describing the differences between European Accounting and standard MFG PRO Calculating the Beginning Balance from the Previous Statement Standard MFG PRO calculates the beginning balance of a bank statement automatically This beginning balance is calculated based on the account balance in the General Ledger for the bank This standard MFG PRO approach has two disadvantages e You might ente
20. Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 3 General Ledger 53 The following tables show the steps that would be followed to create consuming transactions for two historical GL transactions and then to finally match those transactions against the consuming balance Step 1 Historical GL Transactions Exist Amount Reference Reversing Line Matching Consume GL Reference to GL Amount line Number Balance which this line is Reference still to booked in case Line to consume booked against a which this Consume balance line booked entry 3 750 JL97230190093 1 INo 4 250 JL98 121200392 3 No Step 2 The Initialization Function is Run Amount Reference Reversing Line Matching Consume GL Reference to GL Amount Line Number which this line is Reference still to Balance booked in case Line to consume booked against a which this Consume balance line booked entry 3 750 JL97230190093 1 1 No 4 250 JL98 121200392 3 1 No 8 000 JL99180800003 1 1 No 8 000 JL99 180800003 2 Yes 8 000 Step 3 Manual GL Matching is used to book 3 750 to the Consume Balance Amount Reference Reversing Line Matching Consume GL Reference to GL Amount Line Number which this line is Reference still to Balance A booked in case Line to consume booked against a which this Consume balance line booked entry 3 750
21. Sales Journal By Account S03 previously 25 9 3 7 Report Content List Account Code Sub Account Cost Center GL Reference Document Number Sales Order Address Effective Date Daybook Code List DB 11 DB 12 Memo Journal By Reference M01 previously 25 9 3 9 Center Sales Order Address Effective Date Daybook Code List DB 8 Memo Journal By Document M02 previously 25 9 3 10 Report Content List Document Number GL Reference Account Code Sub Account Cost Center Sales Order Address Effective Date Daybook Code List DB 8 Sort Order Database Field Sub Total By es GL reference No No Line number C Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 326 European Accounting User Guide Memo Journal By Account M03 previously 25 9 3 11 Number Sales Order Address Effective Date Daybook Code List DB 8 IC Journal By Reference IC1 previously 25 9 4 1 Report Content List GL Reference Account Code Sub Account Cost Center GL Description Effective Date Daybook Code List DB 13 IC Journal By Account IC2 previously 25 9 4 2 Report Content List Account Code Sub Account Cost Center GL Reference GL Description Effective Date Daybook Code List DB 13 WO Journal By Reference W01 previously 25 9 4 4 Report Content List GL Reference Account Code Sub Account Cost Center GL Description Effective Date Daybook Code List DB 16
22. Set to Yes to show details of unprinted shippers only No to show details of all shippers Confirmed Enter Yes or No to specify if details of only confirmed shippers should be shown in the report Set to Yes to show details of confirmed shippers only No to show details of unconfirmed shippers only Sort Option Enter 1 2 or 3 Specifies the sorting sequence to be used for ordering the information contained within the report 1 Indicates the information is to be sorted by inventory movement code 2 Indicates the information is to be sorted by shipment date 3 The default Indicates the information is to be sorted by shipper number Once you have made your entries into these fields you can print your report An example of the output that could be generated using the Shipper Report is shown below Shipper Report Output eusoshrl p c7la 7 9 18 Shipper Report Date 20 03 01 Page 1 gad inc Time 17 12 22 Shipper Ship Date Ship To Inv Mov Invoice Number Part Description Quantity UM t Weight UM WT 0000103 01 12 00 imhusl imhl pbi99016 10 15000 NOMAD TM COOLING SYSTEM A0000108 26 01 01 imhusl imh3 10 15000 NOMAD TM COOLING SYSTEM 0000109 26 01 01 imhusl imh 10 15000 NOMAD TM COOLING SYSTEM 0000110 26 01 01 imhusl imh3 packing material Polystyrene End_of Report Stock Journals It is a requirement in many countries that businesses must be able to validate the movement of inventory over a range of dates This is in orde
23. Tax Typ VAT Tas Code 9 licm Tax Clai H Diii High Rate VAT Tan Utepe Ta Flabe far Dira Eftective o1 0 fen Tax Hy Line per Tax Base Min T saabbe ja ao Max saable EELS ee 999 995 5 Percent Fiecovmable 100 00 Expiration Date 7 F Tas Heat I Accue Tas at Receipt no Update Tax Allowed pes Discount Tax at Invoice no i Allow Tax Included yee Dicmu Tact al Papmant no EC Sales List no Comments na EC Proven Work no Taw Feasa Sales Ten Account 7400 EE Sales Tax Abseebed 2410 ra AP Taa Account 1 ano AP Tax Fintained 1410 L nn Suspended VAT Account AEA WARHIHG Tax cocks eniste in bax chetail When Suspended VAT is set to Yes in the European Accounting Control File then you are able to define individual customers as requiring the use of Suspended VAT The setting of the Suspended VAT flag against a customer determines the default value to be used during Sales Quote Sales Order and Pending Invoice processing When an invoice is processed for a sales order which is marked for Suspended VAT then the tax record is marked as being suspended i e the tax date is unknown In such cases the tax amount is posted to the Suspended VAT account defined for the appropriate tax code rather than the Sales Tax Account On the first full or partial payment of an invoice that invoice is no longer marked for Suspended VAT The tax date on the invoice is then set to the effective date of the last payme
24. The code defaults to the Transaction code entered in the Automatic Payment Control file Swift Code The supplier Swift code given by your supplier Name The bank s name Address The bank s address City State The City and State of the bank Accounts Receivable The payment selection logic for Accounts Receivable is located on Automatic Payment Menu 27 6 4 Accounts Receivable Menu for automatic payments E ipta Attang Dama gaiki You can create checks and drafts automatically and you can also perform direct debits where you send an order to the bank to transfer an amount of money from your customer s bank account customer directly to your bank account Legally your customer has to allow you to do that first Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 216 European Accounting User Guide Flow of Automatic AR Payments The following figure shows the flow of automatic AR payments Flow Automatic AR Payments Add bank and payment method to customer Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 v Create AR memos manually or by posting invoices Invoice Post 7 16 DR CR Memo Maintenance 27 1 v Create payment selection and add AR memo to it AR Payment Selection Automatic 27 6 4 1 AR Payment Selection Manual 27 6 4 2 v Modify payment selection when needed Payment Selection Manual 27 6 4 2 AR AR Payment Selection Mass Update 27 6 4 3 v List payment selection and obtain approval
25. The default is Yes because the purpose of this report is to enable reconciliation with the General Ledger and unconfirmed vouchers do not update the General Ledger Unvouchered PO receipts can be retrieved from either the product line or by the supplier if the relevant account has been set up for that supplier using Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 Refer to PO Receipts by Supplier The resulting report will be sorted by supplier You can also create a summarized version of the report giving the total figures accumulated by cost center and account for the appropriate date Supplier Activity Inquiry In standard MFG PRO Version 8 5 a browse was added to display all supplier activity In European Accounting this browse has been replaced by an inquiry Supplier Activity Inquiry 28 13 offering additional functionality Note This inquiry is also available in standard MFG PRO although it is not actually listed on the relevant menu The enhanced functionality offered by this inquiry is e Added option to display supplier activity in Ascending or Descending date order e The balance is calculated when a currency is entered that is different from the base currency e Display of additional status information such as voided checks e An option to include or exclude unpaid drafts from the inquiry Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 5 Accounts Payable 159 Supplier Activity Inquiry 28 13 uppi Allie lea S
26. VAT Tax Ami EA Tae Dabe 25s iii Tax Class H Recoverable Tact SD i Tew Aabe 17 Sore Tan leage Moerttenower Ta B bt Ta Code 9 High Fiata WAT Abzorh Rintain CE These VAT only vouchers will now appear on tax reports The taxable base must be entered if this information is required for VAT only vouchers on tax reports Note You can only edit the tax details if the Updateable field has been set to Yes for this tax rate using Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 Waiting Expenses Vouchers European Accounting adds an important feature to Voucher Maintenance 28 1 1 allowing you to mark vouchers as Waiting Expenses Normally under standard MFG PRO you can mark vouchers as not confirmed which allows the voucher to be entered without GL distribution However this has two disadvantages e The Accounts Payable balance is not up to date e You cannot collect the VAT due on the voucher Marking a voucher as Waiting Expenses allows you to enter a confirmed voucher You have to activate the Waiting Expenses voucher logic in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 The amount VAT excluded is booked on the Waiting Expenses Account which can also be entered in the European Accounting Control file Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 5 Accounts Payable 139 Waiting Expenses Account European Accounting Control File You are obliged to enter an employee who has to approve the voucher and make the final
27. When you define the next year s simulation you can link this frozen simulation to the new simulation Thus the starting inventory balance for the new fiscal year is the remaining unallocated receipts from the previous year s simulation Use IES Beginning Balance Copy 30 18 1 3 to copy any unconsumed inventory from the previous year s simulation to the active one Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 405 IES Beginning Balance Copy 30 18 1 3 IES Eequrng Balance Copy User Menu Edi Queue Qptions Help Cunent Simulation FIFOS00 FIFO Valuation Calculation Method FIFO Financial Tea zeep Simulation Pend dirii td Toc 32 12 0 Take Beginning Balance From lz thes Simulation Frozen mn Evaluation Date Date of heezinge Previous Simulation TIMES gt F0 Valuation 1999 Catculation Method FIFO Fmanceal Yeo 1999 Simulation Peod OL oases Toc airizjss Take Begeming Palance Frome I this Simulation Finzen pes Evatustion Date Date of freezing FisHeip F2 Go ESC End MeetPrev Cuit Cut CoppP aste F While you cannot change any of the figures in the frozen simulation this function does give you access to the inventory information and its mean value is still available for allocation You can only use this function when the evaluation method to be used in the new financial year is the same as that used in the previous one For example if F
28. allowing you to create and print shipping documents or shippers to accompany transfers of stock performed using any of these functions In addition you can specify if you want to show the relevant shipper numbers on invoices Two new reports have also been added by European Accounting A Shipper Report displays information relating to selected shippers such as shipper number shipment date quantity shipped destination address etc while the Stock Journals Report allows you to track inventory movements in order to prove no fraud has taken place This chapter details the new functionality The following topics are covered Stock Transfer Functions Set up of Data Creating Shippers Invoices Shipper Reports Stock Journals Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 416 European Accounting User Guide Stock Transfer Functions Shipping documents were originally introduced to support Italy s Documento di Trasporto Formerly known in Italy as the Bolle d Accompagnamento or Bolla this shipping or transport document is designed to accompany any movement of goods Refer to Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues for information on the Documento di Trasporto MFG PRO s standard Global Shipping functionality Issue Transaction Processing already allows the creation of shipping documents to accompany movements of goods initiated from the following functions e All transfer functions for example Transfer Si
29. data from the sales order trailer ship via etc can be used in the calculation of statistical values The Terms of Delivery are copied first four positions from the FOB of the trailer Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 344 European Accounting User Guide Update of Intrastat data moved after the trailer Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 10 Intrastat 345 When you choose to view the details the following window is shown Intrastat detail window aa Dider Mainlenance This window has been enhanced to allow you to see the countries between which the goods flow This window is identical for all transactions Transactions are first stored in a temporary table This table can be reviewed using Order Intrastat Data Maintenance 2 22 11 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 346 European Accounting User Guide Order Intrastat Data Maintenance 2 22 11 When for example sales orders are posted or purchase order receivers are created the actual data is copied to the Intrastat History File This file can be reviewed using MFG PRO s standard Intrastat Maintenance 2 22 13 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 10 Intrastat 347 Intrastat Maintenance 2 22 13 jakarta Hantenance irsal Fi tjel ele alala loju slalele ojula wx Intrastat in IC DO and VO In standard MFG PRO the automatic creation of Intras
30. from that entered in Company Address Maintenance 2 12 Company Address Maintenance 2 12 Address Entity code as defined in the System Account Control File 36 1 Use Withholding Tax Report 2 13 15 4 8 to create a generic report showing the selected supplier s withholding tax vouchers Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 302 European Accounting User Guide Withholding Tax Report 2 13 15 4 8 Show Expected Tax Amount Enter Yes or No Determines if withholding tax amounts expected against voucher lines and amounts where payment has not yet been made to the supplier should be included in the report Exclude Settled Enter Yes or No Determines if amounts already settled to the tax authorities should be included in the report If set to Yes only items for which a withholding tax liability currently exists will be shown on the report Reporting Currency Withholding tax amounts are stored in base currency but this option allows the reporting of withholding tax amounts in a currency other than your database s base currency The resulting output from this report lists the appropriate withholding tax vouchers together with their fees and associated reason codes expenses the withholding tax rate the withholding tax amounts and the total amounts paid to the supplier It also shows the taxable IRPEF Imposte Reddito Persona Fisica or income tax that is the taxable amount of IRPEF which is subject to withh
31. if the media is a file Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 232 European Accounting User Guide Deleting and Archiving Payment Selections A function has been added that allows the deleting and archiving of payment selections The function has similar functionality to all MFG PRO s standard delete and archive functions Payment Selection Delete Archive 6 Pipiri Sebastian DelebefAnchive Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 233 Accounts Payable The payment selection logic for Accounts Payable is located on Automatic Payment Menu 28 9 4 Accounts Payable Menu for automatic payments Antti Dein gaiki 2 J d Be Be 13 18 17 18 aa Al Using the payment selection logic available here you can create checks automatically Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 234 European Accounting User Guide Flow of Automatic AP Payments The following figure shows the flow of automatic AP payments Flow of Automatic AP Payments Add bank and payment method to suppliers Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 v Create vouchers Voucher Maintenance 28 1 1 v Create payment selection and select vouchers for payment Payment Selection Automatic 28 9 4 1 Payment Selection Manual 28 9 4 2 v Modify payment selection when needed Payment Selection Manual 28 9 4 2 Payment Selection Mass Update 28 9 4
32. 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 004 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Total 500 00 0 00 5 000 00 2 500 00 2 500 00 CLOSING BALANCE IES Inv Value GL Value Correction Qty excluded 1 500 00 16 250 00 Net Quantity 1 500 00 16 250 00 13 750 00 2 500 00 Simulation Year Method Part Description UM ies2000 2000 lifo newi es new part for use with EA OPENI NG BALANCE LES Inv Value GL Value Net Quantity 0 00 1 650 00 1 650 00 Qty excluded 0 00 1 650 00 isrep03 p c7la 30 18 5 13 IES Inventory Eval Report Date 15 03 01 Page 2 EA to eB TEST ENVI RONMENT Time 11 30 25 Mean Mean Recei pt Consumption Corrective Period Ret Qty Price Cons Qty Price Inventory Value GL Cost GL Booking 001 20 00 32 50 0 00 0 00 650 00 800 00 150 00 002 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 003 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 004 20 00 42 50 0 00 0 00 850 00 800 00 50 00 Total 40 00 0 00 1 500 00 1 600 00 100 00 CLOSING BALANCE LES Inv Value GL Value Correction Qty excluded 90 00 3 150 00 Net Quantity 90 00 3 150 00 3 250 00 100 00 REPORT TOTALS OPENING BALANCE IES Inv Value GL Value Net Quantity 14 000 00 14 000 00 Qty excluded 14 000 00 CLOSING BALANCE TES Inv Value GL Value Correction Qty excluded 21 200 00 Net Quantity 21 200 00 18 100 00 3 100 00 End of Report isrep03 p c7la 30 18 5 13 IES Inventory Eval Report Date 15 03 01 Page 3 EA to eB TEST ENVI RONMENT Time 11 30 25 REPORT CRITERIA Report submitted by USER Simulatio
33. 1 Center Purchase Order Effective Date Daybook Code List DB 2 DB 3 Purchase Journal By Document P02 previously 25 9 2 2 Report Content List Document Number GL Reference Account Code Sub Account Cost Center Purchase Order Effective Date Daybook Code List DB 2 DB 3 Sort Order Database Field Sub Total By Yes GL reference No o Purchase Journal By Account P03 previously 25 9 2 3 Number Purchase Order Effective Date Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 324 European Accounting User Guide Invoice Journal By Reference 101 previously 25 9 3 1 Center Sales Order Address Effective Date Invoice Journal By Document 102 previously 25 9 3 2 Report Content List Document Number GL Reference Account Code Sub Account Cost Center Sales Order Address Effective Date Invoice Journal By Account 103 previously 25 9 3 3 Number Sales Order Address Effective Date Cost Center Sales Journal By Reference S01 previously 25 9 3 5 Report Content List GL Reference Document Number Account Code Sub Account Cost Center Sales Order Address Effective Date Sort Order Database Field Sub Total By Line number Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 9 Journals 325 Sales Journal By Document S02 previously 25 9 3 6 Center Sales Order Address Effective Date No Yes GL reference No o
34. 2 IES Reiling Copy be Cost S Lise Herm Edt Quam Dpions Help SS H 2 Ree Site 10000 To 10000 Simulation FIFOSOD0 FIFO Valuation Year zooo Cost Se SIM 20 Simulation Costs 2001 Peaad bii Te i AN 400 31 0140 OO AA een Numis EJ Ta Prod Lins Taj liem Tapit Tae Wok Cond To Machine Pot Change Allowed us FleHelp FeeGo ESC End Mext Prey DRUC Ca Copy Paste se Using this function you can copy LE S simulation routing data to cost management simulation data The program logic is nearly identical to the logic of the standard MFG PRO function Item Routing to Simulation Copy 30 13 23 except that in this instance you are copying inventory evaluation simulation routings Next you can copy all costs for purchased and other items to the relevant cost categories in the new Simulation Cost Set Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 409 IES Purchase Copy to Cost Set 30 18 3 3 Using this function you can copy the costs of purchased and other items of the inventory evaluation simulation to the material and other cost categories in a cost set simulation First enter the range of site codes and the IES Simulation Set from which you wish to copy cost information Next you must enter a valid Cost Simulation Cost Set which must have been previously defined using Cost Set Maintenance and mus
35. 2 eo 2 7 QUALITY PRODUCTS COHP AHY GL Mamanis Type EMective Parisi Cunremoy Control Tota Daptonk Enip Humber Corect GL Estended Descript Petty Cash Transiter Fl Help F2 Go ESC End Med Prey DRUC Cal Copp Pashe Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 3 General Ledger 33 For standard GL transactions that are created automatically in the background from the sub ledgers for shipments for example the second GL description line can be linked to MFG PRO s menu system When you post for example an invoice in Invoice Post 7 13 4 you can assign the GL description for this action by linking the extended GL description to Invoice Post using Menu System Maintenance 36 4 4 GL Description linked to Menu entry in Menu System Maintenance 36 4 4 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 34 European Accounting User Guide Improved GL Descriptions In versions of European Accounting pre dating MFG PRO Version 8 6E the value of the primary General Ledger description was modified by some transactions when the relevant unposted GL transaction was created to include additional information on the source of that transaction European Accounting has been updated so that many reports now automatically include all the necessary information such as address codes and document numbers However the Unposted Transaction Inquiry 25 13 13 and the Transaction by Reference Inqui
36. 27 6 6 6 Draft Print Print the draft 27 6 6 9 Single Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 10 Multiple Draft Bank Submission Submit and or discount draft s to bank 27 6 6 12 Approved Draft Reversal Reverse and void a draft 27 6 6 17 Draft Bank Reconciliation 31 13 Cash Book Maintenance Reconcile D Reconcile the received money for draft query if you want to close the draft 27 6 6 22 Draft Closing Close the draft 27 6 6 23 Draft ReOpen Reopen a closed draft Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 72 European Accounting User Guide The following table shows the effects of European Accounting s standard draft flow on the Account Debit Account Credit General Ledger Function Proposed Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 1 Draft Approval 27 6 6 7 Approved Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 8 Normal Distribution Line Draft Approval 27 6 6 7 Approved Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 8 Unapplied or non AR distribution line Single Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 9 Multiple Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 10 Draft Bank Reconciliation 27 6 6 17 Proposal No GL transactions Approval Drafts Receivable Account of Bank 26 13 can be changed for specific draft in 27 6 6 8 Drafts Receivable Account of Bank 26 13 can be changed for specific draft in 27 6 6 8 Payment in Process account of payment method 26 13 or if blank the Payment in Process account of the bank 26 13 Can be c
37. AR memos to report Taxable only Enter Yes or No Specifies if only taxable entries should be shown Currency The currency of the transactions that should be reported Base stands for base currency When Base is entered all currencies are reported when total in base exceeds the amount entered When another currency is requested only that currency is reported Display amounts gt The amount above which transactions should be reported The report shows for each VAT id the total base and tax amounts regardless of tax class AP Transaction gt given amount 28 20 10 Reference The range of references to report Batch The range of batches to report Supplier The range of suppliers to report Entity The range of entities to report Date The range of voucher dates to report Effective The range of effective dates to report Taxable Only Enter Yes or No Indicates if only the taxable entries will be shown or if all entries will be shown Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 474 European Accounting User Guide Curr The currency of the transactions that should be reported Base stands for base currency When Base is entered all currencies are reported when total in base exceeds the amount entered When another currency is requested only that currency is reported Display amounts gt The amount above which transactions should be reported For each tax id the total amount VAT included is displayed AP VA
38. Accounting User Guide Waiting Expenses Voucher Inquiry Waiting Exp Voucher Inq 28 1 4 provides a more detailed inquiry of Waiting Expenses vouchers Waiting Expenses Voucher Inquiry tihng Lap Yourke mig UrerMerne Fel guma Ciptinne Help IEZ Inyrira ISJOPR PL Credit Term I5ok ti crrunt id Eniitp Fin ee Bi Himmler i pas Contiveed Ey Hold zt Dist iteutenes Peogect Enty Ieecription 1hhh WRITING EXPENSES idii BF TA BECOVEERELE You can enter the selection criteria of the inquiry in the upper window of this screen Voucher The voucher reference Supplier The supplier whose Waiting Expenses Vouchers you wish to see PO Number The purchase order assigned to the voucher Invoice The invoice number of your supplier of the vouchers Type The voucher type Employee The employee to whom you want to assign the Waiting Expenses vouchers based on the voucher s Approved by field Currency The currency of the inquiry Base equals the base currency of your system Reporting Currency The currency in which the amount should be displayed in the report Details of the voucher are shown in the middle window The voucher s distribution lines are shown in the lower window Only waiting expenses vouchers with hold amounts greater than zero are shown Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 5 Accounts Payable 145 Waiting Expenses Voucher Report The Waiting Exp Voucher Re
39. Ah Pmt Hath MO Account 1300 Talal ol hence 9 00 Discount Acci F910 Due Date aijaa Remark Eupen Pap Cate Daphook DB 5 Uneferenoed Amaan 9 00 Amount F 2 50 Sub Acct Fictielp Fso E CsEnd Neria Colley eCul Cope Paste T The type Enter U to indicate Unapplied or N for Non AR Unapplied The unapplied reference You should always enter this reference Account The account number Sub Acct The sub account number CC The cost center Entity The entity When you have entered the unapplied data you can enter the amount and discount amount You are only allowed to create one unapplied or non AR distribution line per draft Enhanced European Accounting Draft Flow In the standard European Accounting draft flow described in the previous sections and also in standard MFG PRO drafts can only be submitted to the bank or discounted after they have been approved However under European Accounting s enhanced draft flow the submission and discounting of unapproved drafts directly to the bank is also supported This is common business practice in France This functionality is enabled by setting the Submit Discount Proposed Drafts flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 to Yes Note Only the initial stages in European Accounting s enhanced draft flow are different from those in European Accounting s standard draft flow Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 81 Enablin
40. Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 277 Tax Lines In this case the system has automatically calculated that the amount of VAT at 17 5 included within the gross expense of 100 is 14 89 and has created two new lines to the journal These tax lines are marked with an asterisk The first line adjusts the gross expense down to the net amount and the second line is the VAT These lines cannot be modified Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 278 European Accounting User Guide Completing the journal The balancing entry to the journal is entered as a non taxable line and is coded to the Petty Cash or other appropriate GL account Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 279 GTM Records Tas Daliad by Trarncechon Inq ikiii Gee Tik ya Lad OL Gee FUE yea The tax records created by this new function can be viewed on various GTM inquiries and Tax reports You should be aware that the GL reference is split between the Reference and the Number fields VAT on Petty Cash transactions can be seen on the following reports e AR Tax by Transaction Report 2 13 15 13 e AR Tax by Tax Rate Report 2 13 15 14 e AP Tax by Transaction Report 2 13 15 16 e AP Tax by Tax Rate Report 2 13 15 17 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 280 European Accounting User Guide AP and AR VAT List Since the introduction of Global
41. Chapter 9 Journals Chapter 10 Intrastat Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation Chapter 12 Shipping Documents Chapter 13 Correction Invoices Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues Appendix A Web Enabled Functions Appendix B Mean Data Generation Messages Addendum Glossary Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc About this Manual xi Graphical and Character User Interfaces While European Accounting has both a Graphical User Interface GUI and a Character User Interface CUD the screen examples shown in this manual are taken from the graphical version However both versions are identical in functionality The functional layout of the screens in both versions is also identical except that in the GUI version GUI elements like buttons are used This is illustrated in the figure below Graphical User Interface Lunopean Accounting Demo gaddb Lia hers Ee Queue pise Hap ei Sign On Exit Enter dete or pere ESC be emd Conventions The majority of users of European Accounting are expected to be located in the European community For this reason both the European date format and European numbering conventions are used American Format European Format January 1 2001 1 January 2001 10 000 00 10 000 00 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc xii European Accounting User Guide Customization A number of empty Word files are supplied with European Accounting One
42. Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 121 AR Payment Manual Checks 27 6 5 1 When you have entered the Bill To information you are allowed to enter new fields Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 122 European Accounting User Guide AR Payment Manual Checks 27 6 5 1 The payment method has been added to this window You can also use automatic application from the distribution line window too instead of only at the start when you answer Yes to the Auto Appl Question This allows you to apply the payment method to several ranges of memos and also to update the result of the automatic selection directly When you have entered the information based on the entered payment method the final check number is assigned if you have left the check number blank Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 123 AR Payment Manual Checks 27 6 5 1 In the distribution line window a new message has been added showing that you can do automatic application the key combination used for that depends on your specific computer environment Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 124 European Accounting User Guide Application of manual checks When you press the keyboard combination used for automatic application in your specific environment you can enter a range of memos or invoices to which the payment should be applied Proprietary information Pr
43. Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 393 Simulation Costs Maintenance Following the steps given in the previous sections you have now calculated or entered simulated product structures and simulated routings Next you need to determine or maintain the cost of the items Using IES Cost and Qty s Maintenance 30 18 1 13 you can now manually enter simulated costs You can also use this function to manually amend the mean cost receipt and issue quantity data created automatically by MFG PRO should there be any problems with this data For many items within a simulation this function is not needed However if the only transactions within a given period for a particular item were unplanned ones such as Receipts Unplanned or Cycle Counts then I E S will not have any cost information from which to determine a mean receipt cost for that item for the period concerned In this situation you can use IES Cost and Qty s Maintenance 30 18 1 13 to enter the necessary cost information to allow inventories to be valued correctly according to LIFO or FIFO rules IES Cost and Qty s Maintenance 30 18 1 13 Otp s Maintenance Weer Edi Queue Qpbors Help imulaien FIFDZ0G AFO Walsation Simulation Yeas 2000 Pasil i DADON 31010 Hem ramban 10 1500 NOMAD TM COLNE S WO Rci Oty EDD il WO Ise Oty oo PO Ret Qty 100 aA Comp Gay fea Unp Fict Gay e o Other Cons Qty o a Mot alloc Qiy 19
44. JL97230190093 1 1 No 4 250 JL98121200392 3 1 No 8 000 JL99 180800003 1 1 No 8 000 JL99 180800003 2 Yes 4 250 3 750 JL99270800007 4 2 JL99 180800003 2 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 54 European Accounting User Guide Step 4 Final entry is booked to the Consume Balance entry Amount Reference Reversing Line Matching Consume GL Reference to GL Amount Line Balance which this line is Reference _ still to booked only shown Line to consume in case booked which this against a Consume line booked balance entry 3 750 JL97230190093 1 1 No 4 250 JL98121200392 3 1 No 8 000 JL99 180800003 1 1 No 8 000 JL99 180800003 2 No 0 3 750 JL99270800007 4 2 JL99 180800003 2 4 250 JL99010900012 6 JL99 180800003 p GL Control File European Accounting adds an additional screen to MFG PRO s standard GL Control File 25 24 This additional functionality allows you to define various company control variables relating to year end functionality You can also re open any calendar period previously closed provided the fiscal year has not yet been closed using Transaction Year End Close 25 13 12 and enable the creation of audit records for the modification or deletion of un posted GL records GL Control File 25 24 European Accounting screen Genial Ledge Canlial Filet User Meru Edt Queus Opos Heip E ca E i Euro account Compa
45. Leave blank to include all shippers regardless of their Ship To Dock value Number The shippers number Only shippers with a number falling within the range specified here are included in the report Leave blank to include all shippers regardless of their number Inventory Movement Code The range of inventory movement codes to be included in the report Only those shippers whose inventory movement codes fall within the range specified here will be included in the report Leave blank to include all shippers regardless of their inventory movement code Ship Date The shipment dates to be covered by the report Only those shippers whose shipment date fall within the range specified here will be included in the report Leave blank to show all shippers regardless of their shipment date Include Invoiced Shippers Enter Yes or No to specify if details of shippers relating to invoices that have already been raised should be included in the report Set to Yes to include details of invoiced shippers No to exclude them Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 12 Shipping Documents 431 Include Uninvoiced Shippers Enter Yes or No to specify if details of shippers relating to invoices that have not yet been raised should be included in the report Set to Yes to include details of uninvoiced shippers No to exclude them Unprinted only Enter Yes or No to specify if details of only unprinted shippers should be shown in the report
46. Not Allocated Receipts 600 Mean Receipt Price Mean Price for consumption E 10 y 600 10 In 1997 500 items are purchased and 600 consumed Since the FIFO calculation is used the 600 consumed pieces are taken out of the lot from 1995 The total inventory value of the 600 items left at the end of 1997 is 1 000 1995 6 000 1997 7 000 Purchesesnema 1005 wo 17 o O C I I E T CO CT Not Allocated Receipts 100 200 Mean Receipt Price Mean Price for consumption 10 200 12 300 11 33 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 373 In 1998 a total of 800 items is received and 300 items are consumed This consumption is taken from the 100 items left in lot 1995 and the 500 items produced in 1997 Total inventory value of the stock left at the end of 1998 equals 3 600 1997 10 400 1998 14 000 Purcheseanema 1095 woos 1o07 woos f TOOT C So a a a Not Allocated Receipts 300 800 Mean Receipt Price Mean Price for consumption 4 Ss a2 800 13 1 100 27 2 During the last year 100 items are received and 1 100 are consumed Total stock left is 100 with a value of 1 500 LIFO Example The following example takes the same purchased item with the same receipts and consumed quantities as in the previous example but evaluates it using LIFO methodology Purchased Item A Receipts
47. PRO s standard Global Shipping functions Refer to Set up of Data for details on the shipping and inventory groups that must be defined for each of the above functions Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 12 Shipping Documents 417 It is also possible to create shipper documents when moving inventory between two locations on the same site The Location Transfer functions have been enhanced to allow you to do this provided addresses have been pre defined for the two locations Refer to Address Codes below A valid shipping group with the locations defined as the source and destination addresses must also have been set up with an inventory movement code representing the ISS TR transaction Unplanned Issues and Receipts European Accounting adds a new frame to MFG PRO s standard Inventory Movement Code Maint 1 1 9 allowing you to enter the default GL account sub account and cost center to be used when processing any unplanned issues or unplanned receipts If you enter an inventory movement code which has a transaction type of either RCT UNP indicating unplanned receipts or ISS UNP unplanned issues then this new frame displays Entering the account details neni Hesement Code Mae For unplanned receipts enter the relevant GL credit account sub account and cost center combination for unplanned issues enter the appropriate GL debit account sub account and cost center combination Proprietary in
48. Print Shipper on Invoices has been added to the European Accounting Control File 25 23 that allows you to specify if you want shipper numbers recorded on invoices or not Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 428 European Accounting User Guide European Accounting Control File If you set this flag to Yes then when you print an invoice using the standard MFG PRO Invoice Print 7 13 3 function the shipper number will be shown on the resulting invoice An example is shown below Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 12 Shipping Documents Invoice with Shipper Number Quality Products Inc Manufacturing Division One Wor d Way Consolidated Business Plaza San Diego 92130 Bel gi um Bi QAD Ful Ple To 01000013 Netherlands BV onbaan 20 tenberg West Ni euwegei n Net erlands Our VAT Reg nl 123456789812 Sales Order 010316 Order Date 15 01 01 Salesperson s Credit Terms 10E0M 10 DAYS EOM2 Resale Remarks Shi pped CORD POWER USA lt Shipper No 00000131 Dat Non Taxable 3 391 50 Taxable 0 00 Tax Date 31 01 01 33 Shipper Reports Shipper Report 7 9 18 is added by European Accounting allowing you to create a report detailing various information from shipper documents You specify which shippers you want included on the report You can include shippers 0 000 91 50 0 00 For which invoices have be
49. Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 103 Draft Bank Reconciliation 27 6 6 17 Bank The bank of the submission Batch Control Control total for the batch Should be equal to the total when exiting this function Multi Entry Enter Yes or No to determine if you are reconciling more than one draft If you enter Yes then a list of drafts to be reconciled can be selected If multi entry is set to No then only one draft can be selected to be reconciled Effective The effective date for the reconciliation Total Total of all selected drafts to be reconciled minus the charge amount Should be equal to the batch control when exiting this function Chrg Acct Overall charge account sub account and cost center for this batch Chrg Amt Overall charge amount for this batch Close Draft Enter Yes or No When set to Yes the cash account for each draft shown currently as the payment in process account is set to the cash account of the bank and the draft is then closed If set to No the payment in process account is used for each draft Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 104 European Accounting User Guide Single Draft Bank Reconciliation If the Multi Entry field in Draft Bank Reconciliation 27 6 6 17 is set to No the single draft reconciliation update screen appears Entering single drafts for reconciliation When you select a draft its details are then displayed Proprietary infor
50. QAD Inc QAD Inc 304 European Accounting User Guide Global Tax Management Ctrl File Taxable Field Default Taxable Enter Yes or No Specifies the default setting of the Taxable field for address data added to your database When set to Yes any shipping addresses added to the system are taxable by default and their tax details must be entered into the system If you set this flag to Yes the Taxable flags in all the following functions are automatically set to Yes too e Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 e Ship to Maintenance 2 1 13 e End User Maintenance 11 9 1 e Company Address Maintenance 2 12 e Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 e Remit to Maintenance 2 3 13 In addition any temporary shipping addresses added using Sales Order Maintenance are also taxable by default meaning that you will need to enter their tax details too Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 305 Project Realization The Project Realization Module PRM was available as an additional option in earlier releases of MFG PRO up to and including Version 9 0 However from Version eB of MFG PRO this module has been incorporated into standard MFG PRO This has an impact on several areas of existing European Accounting functionality that relate to invoicing PRM s invoicing functionality has thus been enhanced to add support for European Accounting s bank and payment methods suspend
51. Register Header For Purchase VAT Register Next Page Number Header For Sales VAT Register Next Page Number Invoice Sequence ID Credit Note Sequence ID Voucher Sequence ID Correction Invoice Sequence ID euvtrgrp p c7la Page 3 VAT Register Site Active EC VAT Register Header For Purchase VAT Register Next Page Number Header For Sales VAT Register Next Invoice Credit Note Voucher Correction Invoice euvtrgrp p c7la Page 4 Page Number 2 13 7 3 VAT Register Report EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Sequence Sequence Sequence Sequence ID TD ID ID VAT Register Site Active EC VAT Register Header For Purchase VAT Register Next Page Number Header For Sales VAT Register Next Page Number Invoice Sequence ID Credit Note Voucher Correction Invoice Sequence Sequence Sequence ID ID ID euvtrgrp p c7la Page 5 VAT Register Site Active EC VAT Register Header For Purchase VAT Register Next Page Number Header For Sales VAT Register Next Page Number Invoice Sequence ID Credit Note Sequence ID Voucher Sequence ID Correction Invoice Sequence ID 01 10000 yes yes 00000001 00000001 inv01 Next Seq Number IV00008 crol Next Seq Number CR00002 vo02 Next Seq Number V000002 co0l Next Seq Number CO00002 2 13 7 3 VAT Register Report EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT 02 1000 no no 00000000 00000000 Next Seq Number Next Seq Number Ne
52. Register reports to provide a clear description of transactions reported on VAT Reports Site The default site code for use with this supplier This is used in conjunction with VAT Registers to determine the range of Voucher Numbers to use for this supplier In the next window the credit terms must be entered As credit terms are mandatory in European Accounting for vouchers this field must also be filled in for the supplier European Accounting adds the ability to define the Purchase Order Receipts account and sub account and Expensed Items Receipts account and sub account by supplier In the next frame you are prompted to enter details on these two accounts and their associated sub accounts Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 2 Setup and Basic Data 21 PO Receipts Accounts You can leave these two accounts blank or set them to a valid combination of Account Sub Account and Cost Center Any accounts specified here will supersede the PO Receipts Account defined in the Product Line for inventory items and the Expensed Item Receipts Account defined in the System Account Control File for non inventory items Refer to Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes When withholding tax has been enabled by setting the Withholding Tax flag in the European Accounting Control File you can also enter the data needed for withholding tax transactions Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 22
53. Sort criteria is determined by the order in which they are selected in the Reports Contents frame shown above The exception to this is the credit debit and total values fields that are always printed as the final columns for all types of report These three fields are included automatically in your report you cannot select them Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 9 Journals 319 Sort and Sub total Criteria wil Aap M dol cree The following fields are available Sort by Defines the fields on which the journal report can be sorted Select up to a maximum of 10 fields from the following Account Code Bank Code Bank Slip Cost Center Daybook Code Daybook Number Document No Effective Date Entity GL Reference Journal Line Number Period Project Sub Account Refer to Sort and Sub total Criteria for more details Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 320 European Accounting User Guide Subtotal on Enter Yes or No to determine if sub totals are to be calculated for the specified data category New page for each Account Enter Yes or No to specify if each account code should be printed on a new page in the report This option is only available for the Account report type Include Statistical Accounts Enter Yes or No to include or exclude statistical accounts for the report This option is only effective for the account report type Include Memo Accounts Enter Yes or No
54. Supplier s bank account validation For bank account validations DE and IT special pop up windows are shown When choosing the DE validation two separate bank accounts are requested a so called Bankleitzahl number representing the bank and a Kontonummer the actual account number at the bank Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 192 European Accounting User Guide Bank account validation DE For Italian bank accounts the actual bank account is divided in three parts e The code representing the bank known as ABI e The code representing the subsidiary of the bank known as CAB e The account number at the subsidiary of the bank Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 193 Bank account validation IT For each subsidiary of a bank address information needs to be available Therefore the system will prompt you for the so called Third Party Bank when the unique combination of ABI and CAB is not yet available Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 194 European Accounting User Guide Additional Address information Italian bank accounts Cuslomer 4 ainlenance The additional address information can also be reviewed and modified using Third Party Bank Maintenance 2 21 5 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 195 Third Party Bank Maintenance Appropriate Bank Accoun
55. Tax Management GTM in MFG PRO a VAT class is no longer identified solely by a single code instead it is identified by a combination of tax type tax class tax usage and effective date However for reporting purposes many European countries for example Belgium still have a legal requirement to report per VAT class where the class reported is a single unique code that uniquely identifies that particular VAT class Following the introduction of GTM European Accounting has added the following reports to ensure the reporting requirements of countries that expect a VAT class to be identified by a single code can still be satisfied e AP VAT List Report 28 20 13 e AR VAT List Report 27 22 1 Both these reports print tax details based on the unique tax code assigned to a tax rate in Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 Tax Code field in Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 law Hae Baanlenances Both reports have a Tax Code field as a selection criterion as shown below for AR VAT List Report Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 281 Selection Screen AR VAT List 27 22 1 Aoo LEF Tax Code The unique tax code identifying a specific VAT class The outputs from both reports show this tax code in the individual transaction lines The tax totals per tax code are also calculated by both reports as shown in the following sample output from the AR VAT List Rep
56. When left blank all entities are taken into account Bank Code The code for the bank for which the journal is to be printed If a bank code is entered all GL entries created using Cash Book Maintenance are reported When left blank details for all banks are printed Starting Page Number The number the report should take as the number to print on its first page This defaults to 1 Summary Detail Enter Summary or Detail to specify if only the specified sub totals and totals are shown on the report or if details of individual GL entries are included too This field is only available for account type journals Display Currency Value Enter Yes or No to determine if the currency and currency amount should be shown in parentheses below the total value of each individual GL entry when the currency of a transaction differs from the database s base currency Note The fields available for selection here vary slightly depending on the type of the report Once you complete your entries in this initial window another frame is displayed where you can scroll through a list of available daybooks to select those you want including in your report You can insert additional daybooks into the list by using the F3 key or Insert provided you do not attempt to enter a duplicate daybook in the same report Note Daybooks you want to include must already exist Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 316 European Accounting User Guide Da
57. XVT7 Dutch Address Spanish RDE by Invoice A specific report Spanish RDE by Invoice 27 22 14 has been added to European Accounting to report RDE amounts per invoice Spanish RDE by Invoice ne lisait RDE Tax Type The tax type which is used for RDE Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 476 European Accounting User Guide Spanish RDE by Invoice euspvtar p c7la 27 22 14 Spanish RDE by Invoice Date 16 03 01 Page 1 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Time 16 18 02 Name Tax ID State Address Reference Country Eff Date Inv Amt Taxable VAT Tax Amount RDE amp RDE 1000013 Gateway Reliable 26 10 00 119 00 100 00 H 17 5 17 50 Gateway Center 100 00 1 5 1 50 709 Bridge Street San Francisco 92838 United States of America 119 00 17 50 1 50 euspvtar p 27 22 14 Spanish RDE by Invoice Date 16 03 01 Page 2 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Time 16 18 02 Tax Tax Tax Type Class Usage Effective Tax Code Tax Rate Tax Account Taxable Amount Tax Amount Tax Total RDE 08 09 00 14 1 50 2400 100 00 1 50 USD Tax Usage 1 50 USD Tax Class 1 50 USD Tax Type 1 50 VAT H 08 09 00 11 17 50 2400 100 00 17 50 USD Tax Usage 17 50 USD Tax Class 17 50 USD Tax Type 17 50 USD Total 200 00 19 00 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 477 Belgium Several features have been incorporated into European Accounting which are particularly important for Belgium e Journ
58. added this number is initially equal to the From number Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 211 Prg The program name of the bank format driver If this field is left blank then this is a manual payment method File Enter Yes or No to specify if the bank format driver is to create a file When these fields are entered and a bank format driver is stated then a window is shown with information about that specific driver This is also a check whether the driver is actually available on your system and has the correct version Information about bank drivers Finally a small window is shown with the bank account validations regarding this payment method Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 212 European Accounting User Guide Additional validations payment method Bank Martenatre lolz UserMens Eo Queue Options Help Mo Ao Men Dr Boe Trou Te Fast Prg File AL yer yer no 1 DOIG G11377777 Dal aagereli p yar A nco yer no 1 DD DOOS S955 Diha no AR ne yes ne l OOLDDDED 60199999 poroms ne p AR no yer yer l1 DODDO 6GSd999 oko no AP yer no no l DOTOS G07939999 DOTODOD a pabhl p yar AF ver TiC Tie 1 DOOD G04477777 ieai i aE Currency or muliple expersted by k o MukiCurremes Uza supplier payment cpecitication nn Bank Account needed pec Hian mami of pemittance delal fines e Sailt peotocot pct Comma tepa
59. added to European Accounting to tailor the Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable functionality to country specific electronic formats or pre printed forms A number of these Bank format drivers are provided as standard These modules are all described briefly in the following sections Financial Enhancements This section of European Accounting offers numerous enhancements to MFG PRO s standard Financial modules including Added functionality for creditor payments draft management and direct debit for Europe This is set up in a flexible way with bank format drivers that perform the translation from the common AR and AP payment logic to specific bank formats A new report writer function to add enhanced support for Journals or Daybooks as they are also known These are reports in which GL transactions are grouped by document type and transaction type with debit credit columns and document references Improved GL descriptions with reference to the documents that originated the transaction Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 1 Introduction 3 e Addition of GL Transaction Matching functionality to allow you to match debit transactions in the General Ledger to their corresponding credit transactions on an account by account basis e Additional logic that links the MFG PRO country code to the Intrastat country code and the VAT prefix e Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable VAT lists for specifi
60. an AR Memo might have an improved GL description of 2172 M 1999499 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 3 General Ledger 35 The following screen shows a normal GL description as it might appear in the Unposted Transaction Inquiry 25 13 13 Unposted Transaction Inquiry 25 13 13 Standard Description Unpwabed Tranzachesn laiii The following screen shows an improved GL description for the same transaction shown above Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 36 European Accounting User Guide Unposted Transaction Inquiry 25 13 13 Improved Description Unposted Transaction lequiry blem seler 1000 RE DR CE Hamn aktigt Miedo e 2 108 1000 Hier Falam 15 24 E A0GFO00 H toannos fon 1000 SALES TAX FRY 2 67 EWE 1087000 N Logeoo7 Presa apace bar to continuae Fa Year End Close Standard MFG PRO functionality does not support the formal closing of accounts at year end which is a legal requirement in Italy European Accounting enhances MFG PRO s standard Transaction Year End Close 25 13 12 function to allow you to create General Ledger transactions to formally close GL accounts at year end Any differences are posted to the Retained Earnings Account in the balance sheet Optionally the balance sheet accounts can be closed and the opening balance on the balance sheet accounts for the new year can be set to the closing balance at the end of the prior
61. and range of items Inventory Evaluation Report 30 18 5 13 An example of the output from this report follows Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 403 Example of Inventory Evaluation Report isrep03 p c7la 30 18 5 13 IES Inventory Eval Report Date 15 03 01 Page 1 EA to eB TEST ENVI RONMENT Time 11 30 25 Simulation Year Method Part Description UM ies2000 2000 lifo iespart EA OPENING BALANCE IES Inv Value GL Value Net Quantity 100 00 1 100 00 1 100 00 Qty excluded 100 00 1 100 00 Mean Mean Recei pt Consumption Corrective Period Ret Qty Price Cons Qty Price Inventory Value GL Cost GL Booking 001 20 00 12 50 0 00 0 00 250 00 0 00 250 00 002 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 003 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 004 20 00 22 50 0 00 0 00 450 00 0 00 450 00 Total 40 00 0 00 700 00 0 00 700 00 CLOSING BALANCE LES Inv Value GL Value Correction Qty excluded 120 00 1 800 00 Net Quantity 120 00 1 800 00 1 100 00 700 00 Simulation Year Method Part Description UM ies2000 2000 lifo iestest for use with the lifo EA OPENING BALANCE LES Inv Value GL Value Net Quantity 40 00 11 250 00 11 250 00 Qty excluded 40 00 11 250 00 Mean Mean Recei pt Consumption Corrective Period Ret Qty Price Cons Qty Price Inventory Value GL Cost GL Booking 001 500 00 10 00 0 00 0 00 5 000 00 2 500 00 2 500 00 002 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 003 0 00 0 00 0
62. are only prompted to answer this question when the payment method is marked for the creation of Drafts When you enter Yes approved drafts are created When you enter No proposed drafts are created Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 228 European Accounting User Guide Start Check The starting check number of the payment or draft The next available number according to the numbering range of the payment method is suggested Check Date The check date to be used for the creation of new payments or drafts Effective The effective date to be used for the creation of new payments or drafts Value Date The value date to be used for the creation of new payments or drafts Amount For display purposes only The amount of the payment selection in base currency File Name The file name in case payment media is a file When the selection is activated additional windows can appear determined by the bank format driver In the example below with a Swedish driver additional information is required in order to correctly generate the electronic file for the bank Additional output determined by the bank format driver Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 229 An audit trail report listing the created payments is always printed Printing of audit trail report AR Point Aru ia hecks D Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 230 European Accounting Us
63. be corrected with this sales order Org Order Sales order number related to the original invoice for which this correction is made Correction Reason A reason code indicating the reason for this correction Correction invoices must have a reason type of Corrinv Reason codes can be maintained in Reason Codes Maintenance 36 2 17 You can make corrections to the invoice details and the trailer amounts To correct data in the invoice details you have to select the original line in the sales order detail frame After this the original line will be displayed and the correction line can be updated Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 438 European Accounting User Guide Correction of an Invoice Line CORRECTED SALES OADER LIME The values of quantity list price discount lot serial number site and location can be corrected by entering the correct values in the corresponding fields In the background the system will calculate the differences between the original invoice and the corrections In the trailer of the sales order the original values of the posted invoice are displayed as well You must enter the difference between the original amounts and the corrected amounts For example if the freight charges in the original invoice were 150 and they should have been 155 then you would enter a value of 5 here After the correction sales order has been entered it should be processed like a normal sales order except t
64. been defined then the amount entered will be debited directly from the bank s cash account In the screen above the bank is AA payment method is MD module is AR and the PIP account is 2110 Discount Charges Acct Account to be used for any discount charges This defaults to the Bank Master Record for this transaction Bank Clearing Acct The draft s account This defaults to the Drafts Receivable Account set for the Bank Master Record for this particular transaction Two additional flags display if you set the Separate Submission Discounting flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 to Yes allowing you to control the separate submission and discounting of the drafts Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 91 Choosing Submission Discounting Options Refer to Separate Submission and Discounting for further details When you have entered the necessary information for the operation s you wish to perform a list of the GL transactions that will be raised are shown as in the example below Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 92 European Accounting User Guide Display of created GL lines Single Diall Bank Subiti lebens Ed Queue Options Hep ha a Baich 1035 Control 357 500 Tota t iid Aefesenoe 400008 Bato EUAOCRST Eunpean Accounting Custer Elective Dake Fe fob fia Besciplion Dires of Dh 400004 Berk AA Pmt Meth HD Cue Dae Gasfao fod E
65. can be any mixture of letters and digits provided they are no longer than a total of eight characters in length By default sequence numbers consist of two elements The first two characters are the fixed part of the number and the following defaults have been set up e IV Invoices e CR Correction Invoices e VO Vouchers e CN Credit Notes The remaining characters up to a maximum of six by default make up the integer element of the sequence number which is incremented by one automatically each time a number from the sequence range is allocated You can omit the fixed element of the number if you wish in which case the integer element alone can be up to eight characters long You can use any numbering sequence you want provided no combination of the integer and fixed elements together exceeds eight characters Note Number Range Management will allow you to enter more than eight characters but if you do so the resulting sequence number will not be valid as the number of an invoice credit note voucher or correction invoice You would receive an error message when attempting to create one of these documents if you were to define a sequence that exceeded eight characters The next frame allows you to specify the actual range of numbers to be covered by a particular numbering sequence Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 259 Integer Segment Editor Frame New Seg Nbr
66. can however make a partial payment by paying less than the total due In this case the amount of withholding tax due will be prorated accordingly and split between the various reason codes on the voucher and their associated GL accounts The following GL entries all in US dollars would be created for the voucher shown above Debit Credit Withholding Tax 10 00 Accounts Payable 235 00 Payment in Process Cash 225 00 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 295 Calculating Withholding Tax Manually If you choose to calculate withholding tax manually you must enter all the accounts to be affected by the transaction together with their associated amounts with the exception of the Payment in Process or Cash Accounts which will be credited with the total of these entries In the example below the full value of the voucher created in earlier sections 235 00 dollars is cleared from Accounts Payable Amount to be debited from Accounts Payable Next enter the amount of withholding tax as a negative amount in the example below 10 00 The total of these two lines 225 00 in this example is the total amount payable for that voucher in this payment Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 296 European Accounting User Guide Withholding Tax Amount Papnent Kaul Checie The system recognizes the account above as a Withholding Tax liability account because it
67. can occur Setting this flag to No deactivates the calculation of the account balance If it is deactivated European Accounting Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 2 Setup and Basic Data 9 searches for the previous bank statement If this is found the end balance of this statement is proposed Use Suspended VAT Enter Yes or No The tax date of sales orders can be set according to the payment date of those invoices You can activate this logic with this flag Refer to Chapter amp Value Added Tax and Other Taxes Manual Draft Method of Paym The method of payment normally used for manual creation of AR Drafts This payment method is proposed when Drafts are manually made AR Default Bank The default AR bank that is taken when new customers are added AR Default Method of Payment The default AR payment method to be used when new customers are added Use Secondary GL Description Enter Yes or No Allows you to enter a second GL description line for manually entered transactions which can be used in certain reports Print Shipper on Invoices Enter Yes or No Determines if shipper numbers are printed on the relevant invoices or not When set to Yes the shipper numbers are shown on invoices when set to No they are not Withholding Tax Type The tax type to be used in determining the tax rates to be applied to withholding tax calculations Refer to Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes Use GL Transactio
68. certain circumstances you are obliged to withhold a certain percentage of the tax due on payments to various suppliers typically sole traders who supply services rather than goods You are then responsible for settling the withheld tax on your supplier s behalf The actual rate at which withholding tax is calculated is determined by the type of service given by your supplier A reason code is allocated to each type of service This determines the withholding tax liability for a particular type of service Refer to Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes The ability to handle withholding tax obligations has been added to standard MFG PRO However two reports remain Italian specific Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 467 e Compensation to Third Parties Report Compensi a terzi RPT Lists the vouchers that are subject to withholding tax on a per supplier basis e Withholding Tax Certificate Report Certificazione RDA A year end declaration of the amount of tax you have withheld per supplier Both reports are used in the preparation of the official 770 report that must be submitted to the tax authority This report is pre printed and is filled in by hand Both the Compensation to Third Party Report and the Withholding Tax Certificate Report are created using data held in the relevant supplier s withholding tax file This file is updated automatically using information entered i
69. cost is calculated by applying LIFO FIFO rules to the inventory to calculate the actual consumption which allows a weighted average issue cost to be calculated this actually takes place during the IES Structure Cost Roll Up The results per manufactured item are stored as product structure data If no work orders are accounting closed during the period covered by the simulation but receipts have been made MFG PRO s standard product structure data for the item is copied to allow a weighted average issue cost to be calculated Receipts Cost Data If you chose to generate product receipts cost data automatically from the transaction history by setting the Calculate Purchase Cost to Yes all available simulated receipts costs records are first deleted Next all inventory transactions responsible for receipts of inventory type RCT PO during the period of the simulation are processed All necessary quantities and associated cost data required for evaluation are retrieved and stored The total mean cost of receipts is calculated by adding together the cost of all the RCT PO receipts for a given item during the given simulation period and then dividing that total by the total quantity received All other types of receipts including all unplanned transactions negative sales order issues purchase order returns and DRP transactions have no effect upon the mean cost of an item Such receipts are processed but are all assigned the already established
70. cost management simulation data e IES Purchase Copy to Cost Set 30 18 3 3 Copies I E S purchase cost data to standard MFG PRO cost management simulation data e TES BOM Copy gt Std 30 18 1 24 2 Copies simulated product structures to standard MFG PRO product structures e IES Routing Copy gt Standard 30 18 1 24 5 Copies simulated routings to standard MFG PRO routings e JES Delete Sets of Period Data 13 18 1 24 7 Deletes specified periods and the data associated with those periods e IES Delete Archive 30 18 1 24 24 Deletes or archives simulated data Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 408 European Accounting User Guide Copying Simulation Data to Standard Cost Sets Having concluded the evaluation process you can if you wish copy the results of the simulation into standard MFG PRO simulation cost sets To do so you must first create a new cost set for this purpose using either Cost Set Maintenance 30 1 or Cost Set Copy to Cost Set 30 3 or 30 18 3 1 In each case the cost set you create must be defined as a Simulation Cost Set that is its Cost Set Type must be SIM Having defined the cost set you can then copy LE S simulation data to the routing simulation of cost management using IES Routing Copy to Cost Set 30 18 3 2 and the purchase costs to the purchase cost in the cost management simulation using IES Purchase Copy to Cost Set 30 18 3 3 IES Routing Copy to Cost Set 30 18 3
71. distribution The hold amount of the voucher is set to the whole amount but you can change that Separate inquiries and a report are available to obtain information about the status of Waiting Expenses vouchers You can enter a VAT code at the distribution line This results in the creation of a Tax distribution line that you can collect in the normal way With separate functions you can make the final distribution counter booking the Waiting Expenses account Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 140 European Accounting User Guide Creating a Waiting Expenses Voucher You can create a Waiting Expenses voucher in Voucher Maintenance 28 1 1 by setting the flag Waiting Exp to Yes Setting a voucher as Waiting Expenses Waiting Exp Enter Yes or No to indicate if the voucher should be booked as Waiting Expenses or as a normal voucher The default is No which gives a normal voucher The field can only be updated when a new voucher is entered When the Waiting Exp flag is set to Yes the first GL distribution line is booked on the Waiting Expenses Account Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 5 Accounts Payable 141 GL entry for Waiting Expenses Account You can enter a VAT code and create Tax distribution lines Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 142 European Accounting User Guide GL entry for Waiting Expenses Account Hold Amt The hold amount is upda
72. due dates you also want to reconcile with credits those that are outside this range Selection Logic To explain these rules consider the following example for accounts payable Supplier X has a supplier balance of USD 200 The details of this balance are given below Voucher et Bue dato Amount Stas V096001 May 1 2001 Usp 100 sd V096002 May 15 2001 Usp 20 vosos May 25 2001 usp 280 Fvossoos Maya 2001 usp 50 F_ Totatbatenes uso 200 Supposing you want to select payments for vouchers up to the due date of 20 May 2001 what would you need to do Note The relevant payments are marked in bold in the table above First you would not want to pay the supplier so much that afterwards you need to get money back from the supplier In this example two vouchers for a total of USD 300 could be paid but as the balance is only USD 200 initially you would not want to pay more than USD 200 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 198 European Accounting User Guide The next issue to consider is that the amount due on 12 J une 2001 is set on hold This means that you do not want to pay this voucher for some reason You might contest it or there could be other reasons why you do not accept the claim of the supplier You should never include amounts put on hold in the supplier s balance In this example you should not pay more than USD 100 the balance of USD 200 minus the hold amount of USD 100 No
73. e T Adds transactions that include their Global Tax Management GTM tax entries too The appropriate GL maintenance program will be run depending on your selection here Cash Statement of Account This function is modified to support additional information e Bank account numbers of 26 positions are supported e The logic also supports bank statements after the year 2000 e The ending balance is calculated e The detail lines are displayed as well G Lines The related GL entries P Lines The check details R Lines The payment details Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 6 Cash Management 183 Output Example of Cash Statement of Account Print embkrp p 99 31 14 Cash Statement of Account Print Date 26 03 01 Page 1 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Time 11 23 27 Bank aa US Bank Account 8293 01 Bank Acct 1 8293 01 Currency USD Statement 0005 Year 2001 Date 31 01 01 User ID epm Total 300 00 Ending Balance 5 300 00 Batch Control 300 00 Line T Address Description Exchange Rate Debit Credit Reference XARS Test custom 300 00 Reference T Account Sub Acct CC Project Enty Description 1000130 M 1200 Complete Statement of Account End of Report Cash Book ReOpen Cash Book ReOpen 31 16 is a very useful utility added by European Accounting As its name implies this function allows you to re open a closed cash book statement Cash Book ReOpen 31 16 You just have to ente
74. empty file is provided for each chapter appendix in the manual Each file follows the naming convention customnn doc where nn is the actual number of the chapter or appendix to which that file relates For example the file custom01 doc is associated with Chapter 1 Introduction while custom14 doc relates to Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues and customal relates to Appendix A Web Enabled Functions All these files are linked to the on line version of this manual via a link in the Customization section found at the end of each chapter appendix If you have customized any of the features described in any of the chapters simply add text describing your changed functionality into the appropriate empty file The customized information contained in your new version of these files can then be accessed from the on line version of the manual via the link already provided in the Customization section in the relevant chapter appendix A further file Addendum doc is also provided This is linked into the Addendum section found towards the end of this manual immediately before the Glossary Enter details of any completely new functionality you may have introduced into European Accounting into this file Again you can then access this information from the on line version of this manual Note In order for the links to work correctly you must not alter the names of the blank documents supplied with European Accounting if you add your own information into an
75. enter historical transactions made using a previous software application as unplanned receipts A great deal of thought must be given to how the existing historical data is to be loaded into MFG PRO before this special step is taken Typically the take on of inventory data from a previous software application will be recorded using unplanned receipts cycle counts or by a full physical stock take You could use IES Mean Data Generation 30 18 1 4 to record these receipts Although the data generation process would record these receipt quantities correctly unfortunately such receipts would have no effect upon the mean receipt price for the period in which such receipts are recorded as they are entered as unplanned receipts Therefore if entering historical data using IES Mean Data Generation you would also need to manually enter appropriate cost data for all the items in the system using IES Cost and Qty s Maintenance 30 18 1 13 This could be a very lengthy process To avoid this situation IES Data Take On is provided This allows you to cost all receipts in selected periods at the GL cost stored for those items providing that no work order or purchase order receipts of those items have occurred in the periods concerned Note tis assumed that when initial inventory balances were loaded into MFG PRO the GL costs defined for the items concerned represented the correct FIFO or LIFO valuation of that inventory as calculated on the previous inventory
76. flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 enables VAT registers Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 253 Setting VAT Registers VAT registers can then be used with the following MFG PRO functions e Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 e Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 e VAT Register Maintenance 2 13 7 1 e VAT Register Browse 2 13 7 2 e VAT Register Report 2 13 7 3 e Blanket Order Maintenance 5 3 1 e Blanket Order Release to PO 5 3 6 e Scheduled Order Maintenance 5 5 1 13 e Purchase Order Maintenance 5 7 e PO Shipper Receipt 5 5 5 11 e Purchase Order Receipts 5 13 1 e Purchase Order Returns 5 13 7 e Sales Quote Maintenance 7 12 1 e Sales Quote Release to Order 7 12 10 e Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 e Pending Invoice Maintenance 7 13 1 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 254 European Accounting User Guide Invoice Print 7 13 3 Invoice Post 7 13 4 Pre Shipper Shipper Confirm 7 9 5 Schedule Order Maintenance 7 3 13 Call Activity Recording 11 1 1 13 Call Invoice Recording 11 1 1 15 Contract Maintenance 11 5 13 1 Billing Release to Invoice 11 5 18 13 RMA Maintenance 11 7 1 1 RMA Shipments 11 7 1 16 RTS Maintenance 11 7 3 1 RTS Shipments 11 7 3 16 Waiting Expenses Voucher Maintenance 28 1 2 Recurring Voucher Maintenance 28 8 1 Recurring Voucher Release 28 8 4 ERS Proc
77. followed by the next transaction The GL Book and GL Book by Account are the only two reports that calculate a running balance Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 332 European Accounting User Guide Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 10 Intrastat The completion of the single European market on the 31 December 1992 resulted in important changes concerning VAT All custom formalities and documentation checking at the borders within European Community EC countries were abolished with effect from 1 January 1993 However statistics are of interest for government departments and for business as they are important sources of information to help in developing economic policy to identify markets to determine market penetration by competition etc Thus Intrastat has developed as the new system for collecting foreign trade statistics in the movement of tangible goods between EC countries Note It does not cover the supply of intangible goods i e services This chapter describes the enhancements added to MFG PRO s standard Intrastat functions by European Accounting The following topics are covered Intrastat Data Set up of Intrastat Entering Transactions Intrastat in IC DO and VO Reporting from Intrastat Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 334 European Accounting User Guide Intrastat Data All traders have to suppl
78. for future use You must use Journal Report Maintenance to make any permanent changes Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 330 European Accounting User Guide Journal Report Print Account type journals can be printed in either summarized or detailed form The detailed format shows all individual GL transaction entries while the summarized format shows a condensed version of the report in which only a summarized version of the account is printed An example of the detailed version of a Purchase Journal by Account is shown below Purchase Journal By Account Detail Euglrp21 p c7la 10 Date 13 03 01 Page 1 Bi Time 13 15 13 AIC code Sub A C CC GL reference Debit Amount Credit Amount Balance AP001103000167 00000001 03 11 00 AP001103000168 00000001 03 11 00 AP001103000169 00000001 03 11 00 AP001103000172 P01050 00000001 03 11 00 AP001103000173 00000001 03 11 00 AP001103000174 00000001 03 11 00 AP001103000175 1av00012 imhusl 03 11 00 AP001103000176 1152 ajh a3 03 11 00 AP001103000176 1153 ajh a3 03 11 00 AP001104000178 1154 frfsupp 04 11 00 AP001104000178 1155 frfsupp 04 11 00 AP001106000179 1156 befsupp 06 11 00 AP001109000180 1187 0200 09 11 00 AP001109000181 1190 0200 09 11 00 The summarized version of the same report is shown below Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 9 Journals Purchase Journal By Account Summary Euglrp2l p c7la 25 10 3 PURCHASE BY ACCO
79. for simulation FIFO2000 year 2000 period 1 and item 10 15000 0012 Routing copy for simulation FIFO2000 year 2000 period 1 and item 10 15000 0019 Order quantity for item 10 15000 is not defined Order Qty 1 used 0009 No WO was closed for item 10 15001 within the bucket ti 0011 BOM copy for simulation FIFO2000 year 2000 period 1 and item 10 15001 0012 Routing copy for simulation FIFO2000 year 2000 period 1 and item 10 15001 0019 Order quantity for item 10 15001 is not defined Order Qty 1 used 0020 IES Routing for period 1 and item 10 15000 already exists Refer to Appendix B Mean Data Generation Error Messages for a full list of the exception messages that you could receive during the data generation process together with recovery advice where appropriate After you have made your selections into all the fields in the IES Mean Data Generation 30 18 1 4 selection screen you are prompted to enter an output device for the audit trail The data generation process is then started The actions described in the following three sections are then taken depending on the type s of data you selected to be generated As all of the processes described below are performed on the transaction history and some of them are even carried out on the same records the processes are carried out simultaneously when more than one data type is selected Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Eval
80. indicate if this voucher is to be marked for Waiting Expenses Due Date Standard MFG PRO field With a new voucher European Accounting allows you to modify the calculated due date at once European Accounting allows you to add VAT only vouchers Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 5 Accounts Payable 137 VAT Only Vouchers i Voucher Boainhenance Lice Haru Ede Queva Option Help boyy e a gt Batch Goucher Gsi 1005 Batch Cnt a aaa Tot aaa Veescher 1001 ELR Chk Tot amp a D iti iai WARNING Beginning al file Ficteip Faso EGCind Heie DE Eu Copr ate E First enter a zero value distribution line Standard MFG PRO does not allow this Zero Value Distribution Line When the system asks if you want to view or edit the tax detail answer Yes You are then able to enter details for the transaction amount the taxable base the tax amount and the amount of recoverable tax these last two will usually have the same value Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 138 European Accounting User Guide Tax Details in Voucher Maintenance diea Mera Ed Quma iption Hap tekel Batch 1000 Batch Chi t r Tot D PPE Prerak Aari or chad EAN Daetibution Tax Betail hecord Lime 2 Related Do Tina nt TOT Entity Tae beheaded ina Aon T arable Hatt b bi Tax By Line Tax Env ieu Tarsbie Ooo TET Edet no Tar Typa
81. of both proposed and approved drafts However European Accounting extends draft functionality by permitting all types of drafts to be submitted and or discounted separately using either Single Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 9 or Multiple Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 10 A setting in the European Control File 25 23 determines which behavior is enabled Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 97 Enabling Separate Submission Discounting of Drafts Separate Submission Discounting Determines if it is possible to separately submit and discount a draft By default this flag is set to No to indicate that the submission and discounting of drafts will be combined into one operation when using either the Single or Multiple Draft Bank Submission functions However if set to Yes you will be able to submit and then separately discount previously submitted drafts using either of these draft submission functions To accommodate this enhanced functionality a new status D Discounted has been added for Draft transactions When this flag is set to Yes you have the option when using either the Single or Multiple Draft Bank Submission functions to e Submit a draft e Discount a draft e Submit and discount a draft in one operation The GL entries generated as a result are different depending on which option you select as is illustrated in the following sections Submit and Discount Together
82. of invoice numbers for which you want to see the correction invoices The report can also be used to display the original invoices when you enter the selected range of correction invoices This selection is dependent on the setting of the Sort by Original Invoice No flag Correction Invoice Link Report Conection lide Link Repat Invoice Range of invoice numbers you want to see in the report Sales Order Range of Sales Orders related to the selected invoices Customer Range of customer address codes on sales orders to export Bill To Range of bill to addresses on sales orders to export Currency Transaction currency applying to the selected invoices Detail Enter Yes or No If set to No only invoice numbers will be printed If set to Yes detailed information about the correction will also be printed Sort by Original Invoice No Enter Yes or No If set to Yes correction invoices will be displayed for the selected range of original invoices If set to No the original invoice will be displayed together with the correction invoices which meet the selection criteria Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 13 Correction Invoices 443 Invoice History Report MFG PRO s standard Invoice History Report 7 13 8 has been enhanced to support correction invoices A new flag Correction Invoices has been added which indicates whether just correction invoices or just standard invoices should be printed in the report I
83. one for the IC transfer data Manual post Intrastat orders 2 22 9 E ipta Attang Demo gail fe Feet 2 Hama Post Inra VO In the header screens of Manual Post Intrastat IC data 2 22 9 1 or Manual Post Intrastat VO data 2 22 9 2 you can select an Import Export detail Details are shown in the detail screen In Manual Post IC data only Order Intrastat records of type IC will be selected For Manual post VO data only Order Intrastat records of VO will be selected The current Import Export detail can be posted to Intrastat History press lt CTRL_P gt or can be deleted press lt CTRL D gt Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 354 European Accounting User Guide Manual post Intrastat IC data 2 22 9 1 When you press lt CTRL P gt the Intrastat posting has to be confirmed first Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 10 Intrastat 355 Confirm Posting If the user confirms the Intrastat posting an Intrastat History record is created using the data supplied by Import Export detail If the Show Intrastat field is set to Yes then the Intrastat History record just created is displayed Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 356 European Accounting User Guide Intrastat history record When the Intrastat posting has been completed successfully the Import Export detail is deleted and the next Import Export detail is displayed Proprietary infor
84. operation for this routing code only Entries for all the above fields are extracted by default from the Shop Floor Operation History and their combined results generate a mean value for labor costs Alternatively you can obtain simulated routings by copying the standard routing information to the simulation using IES Routing Copy Std gt IES 30 18 1 24 4 IES Routing Copy Std gt IES 30 18 1 24 4 1E5 Hauling Copy Sid gt IES Une Menu Edt ume pions Help as 2 2 ee Simalation FIFO2000 FIFO Yahustion Simalaion Tear 200 Pesiod 7 To D000 248020 miea 2502 0 item Humbi 015000 Tx fio 15000 Delete existing Roulinga ro Dapit Fi Help F2 Go ESC End Nest Prev CICNE Copy Paste Begin by entering the simulation code and period range for which you want to create mean routing data The simulation data is shown for verification Next enter a range of item numbers covering those item numbers whose standard routing information you want to be copied After a verification question the actual processing starts All parts within the specified ranges are processed The related standard routings are copied to the simulation when a routing code is entered in the item information that code is used otherwise the part number is taken When a routing is already available in the simulation then that routing is first deleted Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11
85. order site or it can be that of the WIP location Inventory Movement Code ISS TR Call Activity Recording 11 1 1 13 Any component issue recorded using Call Activity Recording Shipping Group Source address must be the same as the site code for the issuing site and the destination address must be the same as the end user address Inventory Movement Code ISS WO RMA Maintenance Giz Transaction Any RMA maintenance issues processed within RMA Maintenance Shipping Group Source address must be the same as the site code for the issuing site and the destination address must be the same as the end user address for the particular RMA item involved in the transaction Inventory Movement Code ISS SO RMA Shipments 11 7 1 16 Any component issue performed using RMA Shipments Shipping Group Source address must be the same as the site code for the issuing site and the destination address must be the same as the end user address for the particular RMA item involved in the transaction Inventory Movement Code ISS SO RTS Shipments 11 7 3 16 Transaction Any processing of supplier returns using RTS Shipments Shipping Group If the Inv Issue flag is set to Yes the system checks for a shipping group whose source address is the same as the site code for the issuing site and has a destination address that is the same as the supplier address If the Inv Issue flag is set to No the system checks for a shipping group whose so
86. product line s Cost of Production or Sales accounts as in standard MFG PRO Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 12 Shipping Documents 425 Unplanned Issues Account Sub Account and Cost Center Refer to Inventory Movement Codes In this case because the Address field has been filled with a valid address from an existing Shipping Group then the Shipping Information Frame appears and you will be able to generate and print a Shipper Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 426 European Accounting User Guide Shipping Information Frame Non Inventory Items Shipper documents created using Transfer Single Item 3 4 1 can include non inventory items memos as well as items already listed in inventory If you enter an item number for which no inventory is currently defined the system outputs a warning to alert you to the fact that you are attempting to move a non inventory item Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 12 Shipping Documents 427 Transfer Single Item 3 4 1 If you choose to proceed with this transaction you are prompted to enter the necessary information needed to allow a shipper to be generated Then the Shipping Information Frame appears and a shipper can be generated and printed Invoices European Accounting enhances standard MFG PRO functionality to allow shipper numbers to be shown on their associated invoices A new field
87. receipt quantities are used in the calculation of mean receipt prices during Mean Data Generation Unp Rct Qty The Unplanned Receipt Quantity shows the quantity of an item received using unplanned transactions during the period covered by this LE S simulation This includes receipts processed using Receipts Unplanned 3 9 Receipts Sales Order Return 3 10 Receipts Return to Stock 3 11 Cycle Count Results Entry 3 14 Tag Count Entry 4 11 and Tag Recount Entry 4 12 It will also include receipts processed using Receipts Backward Exploded 3 12 when the Use Receipts Backwards as WO flag in IES Mean Data Generation 30 18 1 4 has been set to No This field is also used to store negative issue quantities for transactions such as sales orders or work order component issues which affect the total receipt quantities for the item in the period covered by the I E S simulation but do not affect the calculation of the mean price Only work order receipt quantities and purchase order receipt quantities affect the calculation of mean receipt prices during Mean Data Generation Any receipt quantities stored in this field have no effect on mean prices WO Iss Qty The Work Order Issue Quantity shows the quantity of an item issued to either work orders or repetitive schedules during the period covered by this LE S simulation This value is calculated during Mean Data Generation and is stored in this field temporarily The value is s
88. represents a fee item that has a reason code which calculates withholding tax at a rate of 10 The second distribution line also for 100 00 shows an expense item for which withholding tax is not calculated The total withholding tax due on this voucher is thus 10 00 At this point there is no withholding tax to report as the withholding tax liability is not created until a voucher is paid Voucher Payment When you pay a voucher that is subject to withholding tax the withholding tax amount is subtracted from the amount paid to the supplier and this amount is credited to the withholding tax account Multiple entries can exist per voucher and you can make partial payments against each voucher The system calculates your withholding tax liability by pro rating it against the total payment due for that voucher Several standard MFG PRO functions have been enhanced to allow them to handle withholding tax voucher payments e Payment Selection Automatic 28 9 4 1 e Payment Selection Manual 28 9 4 2 e Payment Selection Register 28 9 4 4 e Payment Automatic Checks 28 9 4 6 e Payment Manual Checks 28 9 10 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 293 e Payment Inquiry 28 9 11 e Payment Register 28 9 12 e Check Void Maintenance 28 9 15 Manual Payment When you enter a check for payment manually using Payment Manual Checks 28 9 10 the setting of
89. selection the computer marks vouchers for you based on the selection rules you supply Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 239 Manual Selection The second method of creating payment selections is the manual selection method using Payment Selection Manual 28 9 4 2 Manual selection of open vouchers Pagnent Selection Manual E3 Lest Mera Edt Geos Option Help Voucher Supple Hini Pian m Te Pay Dnk ma Dheck ibti Open Vouchers Fi Help F2 Go ESC End Mest Prev Lahi Cat Cops Paste E With this program you can create new planned payments or modify existing planned payments Three windows are available In the top window you can enter selections for vouchers and you can decide to look at planned payments only The middle window shows the active payment selection or open vouchers that comply with the selection rules of the top window The one shown depends on the value you enter for the To Pay Only field The lower window provides the opportunity to select vouchers and to add or change planned payments The top window has the following fields Voucher Selection of reference of vouchers If you leave this blank all references are selected Supplier Selection of suppliers of vouchers If you leave this blank all suppliers are selected Bank When To Py Only is set to Yes selection of Bank of payment selection otherwise selection of Bank of voucher Pa
90. simulation Calculation Method The calculation method to be used in this evaluation and simulation It must be either LIFO or FIFO Simulation Year The year with which the simulation is linked This year is defined in a similar manner to a General Ledger year Typically this is your financial year It is not necessarily a calendar year Mean Data Generation Period The entire period for which the simulation is performed This date range is also taken as the default date range for the mean data generation Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 381 Take Beginning Balance From The simulation code from which the starting inventory balance by period lot should be copied The value of this field is set by IES Beginning Balance Copy 30 18 1 3 You cannot change it here Is Simulation Frozen A simulation can be frozen once it has been completed This flag indicates if a simulation is frozen or not Data from a frozen simulation cannot be altered although it can be copied into another simulation The value of this flag is set by IES Simulation Freeze 30 18 1 9 You cannot change it here Within a simulation you can define a range of periods for which the simulation can be performed The smallest period you can define is a day Periods can be created manually or automatically within a range using IES Auto Period Generation 30 18 1 2 Refer to Auto Period Generation When a new
91. simulation is created the following screen is shown IES Simulation Set Maintenance 30 18 1 1 CES Simulation Set Maintenance U Mam Edi Queues Opos Heip ulem Fp ce oo mulai FIFOZO00 Deacipios FIFO Valiabenn Calculation Method FIFO Smnulation Year Pho Slant Date feiyoasoo End Date 11717700 Paiiod Type MONTH Tea Patina Start Ered FlsHelp FieGo ESC Eed Fi Delete CrS AC Cut Copp Porte Once you have entered the header data you can then define or modify the simulation periods Once you have done this you can use IES Auto Period Generation 30 18 1 2 to change the periods defined here without the need to manually change the date ranges for all the periods Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 382 European Accounting User Guide Auto Period Generation IES Auto Period Generation 30 18 1 2 allows you to create or regenerate a range of time buckets for a simulation IES Auto Period Generation 30 18 1 2 First you enter the simulation set for which you want to create the periods This must be an existing set If periods already exist for this set a warning message appears shown above and you are asked if you wish to continue If you select Yes another window displays in which you can enter the start date the end date and the period type which must be one of the following e Year e Quarter e Month e Week e Day The system then calculates all the time buckets automatically
92. submitted while in its enhanced flow it is also possible to submit proposed drafts Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 73 Note The later stages in the flow of drafts are similar or identical in both European Accounting s standard and enhanced draft handling logic It is the initial steps that contain significant differences Standard European Accounting Draft Flow The following sections detail the standard default flow of drafts in European Accounting through the initial draft creation stages namely the Proposal and Approval steps Drafts follow this flow when the Submit Discount Proposed Drafts flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 is set to No the default to prohibit the submission and discounting of proposed drafts Proposed Drafts In European Accounting Proposed Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 1 replaces the draft maintenance function found in standard MFG PRO European Accounting has made a number of changes to this function e The function has been renamed to Proposed Draft Maintenance because European Accounting also allows you to create approved drafts directly which is not possible under standard MFG PRO e The payment method has been added to the header frame e The reference number is determined by the payment method e Unapplied or non AR distribution lines can be added Proposed Draft addition of payment method Propomed halt A senberare
93. system Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 407 To use IES Data Take On you must first enter a valid I E S simulation set code The system will then display the Year and Calculation Method associated with that simulation set You must then enter a range of periods within the I E S simulation set for which you want to have item receipt prices copied from item GL costs Typically most data take on activities are confined to one period so a range is not necessary Alternatively instead of using IES Data Take On to record the opening inventory balance you can define LE S simulation sets for all previous years of inventory which are necessary for the calculation of future FIFO or LIFO costs Then use the MFG PRO CIM Interface to load the correct values directly into IES Cost and Qty s Maintenance 30 18 1 13 These LE S simulation sets can then be linked using IES Beginning Balance Copy 30 18 1 3 This means that FIFO or LIFO valuations for the current year s inventory can correctly use information on unconsumed inventory quantities and mean receipt costs from earlier years Maintaining and Using Completed Simulation Data Once you have completed a simulation various functions are available to allow you to maintain or make further use of the simulation data you have created e IES Routing Copy to Cost Set 30 18 3 2 Copies LE S simulation routing data to standard MFG PRO
94. tax information is attached to a voucher or DR CR memo then the standard discount account as set in the System Control File is used for posting the discount amount If the voucher or DR CR memo has only one tax rate attached to it then the AR or AP discount account defined for that tax rate will be used for posting the discount amount If no AP or AR discount account has been defined for that tax rate then the standard discount account as specified in the System Control File will be used However if the voucher or DR CR memo has multiple tax rates attached to it the discount amount will be split and posted proportionally to each of the AR or AP discount accounts defined for those tax rates Any of the Payment Selection reports in Accounts Receivable or Accounts Payable that produce GL detail will now also show discount amounts on the correct GL discount accounts as defined in the new function Tax Rate Discount Account Main 2 13 13 6 If an AP check is voided all the GL transactions for the discount amounts will be reversed automatically Withholding Tax European Accounting supports withholding tax functionality that allows you to withhold tax when paying suppliers and then to declare the tax part of the supplier payment to the authorities on that supplier s behalf Introduced in response to Italian requirements this feature has been extended to make it of more general use It is typically of use when dealing with sole traders or s
95. the Submit flag in the middle frame is set to Yes each individual draft in the list will be automatically submitted in this batch run This is indicated by an asterisk in the Submit column Should you wish to exclude individual drafts from this batch run you can do so by removing the asterisk next to the relevant drafts Conversely when the Submit flag is set to No none of the drafts on the list will be submitted in the current batch run This is indicated by a blank entry in the Submit column However if you wish to submit any of the individual drafts in this batch run you can do so by entering an asterisk next to the relevant draft in the Submit column These drafts will then be submitted even though the Submit flag itself is set to No Amounts of all selected drafts will be totaled This total is displayed in the Total Selected field When all the information is correct a list of all submitted drafts will be sent to the output device specified as shown below This information includes draft number Bill to due date and amount Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 96 Print drafts to be submitted 27 6 6 10 European Accounting User Guide eudmdim p c7la 27 6 6 10 Multiple Draft Bank Submission Page 1 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Check Bill To Date Amount Discount Closed 400007 EUROCUST 31 03 01 117 50 0 00 no 400008 EUROCUST 31 03 01 117 50 0 00 no 400009 EUROCUST 31 03 01 352 50 0 00 no eudmdim p c l
96. the Unit of Measure used for the purchased item in order to generate the mean cost of that item If no lines on the relevant purchase order contain the UM then the UM for that purchase order is assumed to be the same as that stored for the original transaction and the UM conversion coefficient is then set to 1 This can result in LE S generating an incorrect mean cost for an item if the UM for the purchase order was actually different from the original UM No Work Order with Lot ID existing for WO CLOSE transactions A WO CLOSE transaction was found when either a mean product structure or mean routing was being generated for which no corresponding work order can be found Thus the work order uniquely identified by the Lot ID number in this message will not be included in the calculation of either the mean product structure or mean product routing Work Order Lot of type will not be considered When mean product structures and or mean routings are generated only work orders of type blank C or F are taken into consideration Work orders of any other type are skipped This message indicates that work order of other types have been found and identifies their type These will be skipped in a particular product structure or mean routing generation No parent item was manufactured for order and lot ID The work order identified by this message cannot contribute to the work order calculation as the total receipts for this work order calcula
97. the Withholding Tax flag determines if the amount of withholding tax due is calculated automatically or whether you wish to calculate it yourself manually Payment Manual Checks 28 9 10 Automatic Withholding Tax Enter Yes if you want the system to calculate the withholding tax liability for you automatically or No if you wish to calculate it yourself manually Typically withholding tax will be calculated automatically but if you set this flag to No you can record multiple payment lines against each voucher together with the GL accounts to which each amount relates Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 294 European Accounting User Guide Calculating Withholding Tax Automatically When you choose to calculate withholding tax automatically the system calculates the amount of withholding tax that is to be excluded from a payment Automatic Withholding Tax The values you enter into the Amt to Apply and Cash Amount fields are not the amount of the actual physical payment instead they show the amount of the voucher that will be settled by this payment The example shown above is for a voucher of 235 00 US dollars which will be settled with a payment of 225 00 US dollars This check represents the payment of this voucher with 225 00 US dollars in cash less the withholding tax portion of the voucher which in this case has been calculated as 10 00 dollars This example represents a full payment of a voucher You
98. to handle co by products Mean Product Structures and Routings are generated based only upon those work orders or repetitive schedules for which a Work Order or Cumulative Order Accounting Close has been processed during a specific period When work order or repetitive schedule receipts have been processed in a given period but no Accounting Close has taken place then standard Product Structures and Routings will be copied in order to create I E S Mean Product Structures and Routings Inventory Evaluations Inventory evaluation can be a complex process Evaluation methods like FIFO and LIFO are not complex concepts in themselves but calculating inventory using them can in reality be quite difficult True FIFO or LIFO is only used in very specific situations and when it is used each individual production or purchase lot has to be priced There are a number of difficulties associated with this in that e Lot control must be activated for each item if you are to calculate the necessary pricing information e Inventory Transaction History data can get very large especially for complex product structures which can result in disk space and performance problems e All inventory detail records have to be on line so archiving data can pose problems When all these difficulties have been tackled the issue still remains of how useful the resulting data actually is In practice little is actually achieved by knowing that the production lot cre
99. to receipts made in the current period For example you receive 10 pieces of item X in periods 1 2 and 3 and the mean receipt price in each of these periods was calculated as 10 11 and 12 respectively If 15 pieces of item X were issued in Period 3 the results would be different depending on whether the LIFO or FIFO rules were used Using the LIFO method 10 pieces of item X would be deemed to have been issued from receipts made in period 3 while the remaining 5 would be deemed to have been issued from period 2 s receipts The value of this overall issue is thus 10 12 5 11 175 while the mean price of consumption is calculated as 175 15 11 66 Using the FIFO method 10 pieces of item X would be deemed to have been issued from receipts made in period 1 while the remaining 5 would still be deemed to have been issued from period 2 s receipts The value of this overall issue is thus 10 10 5 11 155 giving a mean price of consumption of 155 15 10 33 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 397 Cost Rollups Once you have created simulation data you must perform rollups of the simulated routings and product structures Optionally you may also want to copy IES simulation routings and purchase costs to standard MFG PRO Cost Simulation cost sets Use functions found on the Cost Rollup Menu 30 18 3 to do all this Cost Rollup Menu 30 18 3
100. top window a selection can be made Bank The bank of the payment selection Payment Method The payment method Batch The batch File The filename of the created media Check Date The check date In the lower window the result of the selection is shown On the right hand side you can see whether the payment selection is processed Pr You can also print a duplicate of the audit trail report for an already processed payment selection using AP Payment Selection Report 28 9 4 17 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 247 Report of payment selection Bank The bank of the payment selection Payment Method The payment method Check Date Selection of a range of check dates Sequence Selection of a range of sequences The sequence is the internal number of the payment selection Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 248 European Accounting User Guide Creating Duplicate Media Should payment media be lost or damaged in some way you can use Creation of Duplicate Media 28 9 4 8 to create new duplicate payment media for already processed payment selections Creation of duplicate media No financial or sub ledger transactions are performed Batch The batch number of the processed payment selection A help screen is available Bank For display purposes only The bank of the payment selection Payment Method For display purposes only The payment meth
101. versions of MFG PRO namely 9 0 8 5D 8 5E and 8 6E As with standard MFG PRO both Graphical User Interface GUI and character versions CUD of European Accounting are available Some European Accounting reports have been enhanced so that they can be used in a NET UI environment as well Refer to Appendix A Web Enabled Functions for a full list of these reports Audience This manual describes the use of the features added to MFG PRO by European Accounting This manual is written for those MFG PRO users who will use the enhancements offered by European Accounting on a day to day basis Previous knowledge of the existing financial module within standard MFG PRO is assumed New features added by European Accounting are described in full in this manual but where a feature enhances existing MFG PRO functionality only the changed behavior is covered here Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc European Accounting User Guide Manual Organization European Accounting is a large module with a great deal of new functionality This functionality can be grouped into various categories The manual is divided into the following sections which mirror these various categories Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Setup and Basic Data Chapter 3 General Ledger Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable Chapter 5 Accounts Payable Chapter 6 Cash Management Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes
102. voucher Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 300 European Accounting User Guide Selecting withholding tax vouchers for payment The withholding tax for the voucher distribution lines marked with an asterisk is now due for settlement Simply de select by deleting the asterisk if you do not wish to pay at this time or alternatively mark as paid As with other selection screens found in European Accounting use the Enter and Return keys to select de select items You can also mark as unpaid any items erroneously marked as paid Withholding Tax Reports Three withholding tax reports are available e Withholding Tax Report A generic report showing the vouchers that are subject to withholding tax e Withholding Tax Certificate An Italian specific report certifying the amount of withholding tax paid to the authorities on a supplier s behalf on an annual basis e Compensation to Third Party Report An Italian specific report listing the amounts of withholding tax due for settlement to the authorities in the selected month Refer to Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues for details on the two Italian specific reports Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 301 The output from these reports shows the address information of the company that is responsible for settling the withholding tax liability with the tax authorities This address information is taken
103. vouchers are to be processed Reason Code The range of reason codes Date Paid The range of dates when withholding tax vouchers were paid Withholding Tax The percentage at which withholding tax should be paid Selection Order Enter Voucher or Payment Date to control the order in which vouchers meeting the selection criteria are to be displayed Maximum to Withhold The maximum of amount of withholding tax to be withheld Withholding Tax Payment Date The effective date on which the withholding tax liability is settled and optionally the associated GL transaction is created Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 299 Select All Enter Yes or No to determine if all the vouchers meeting the selection criteria should be selected automatically in the Payment Selection screen shown below Update GL Enter Yes or No Determines if GL transactions are to be created automatically once withholding tax liabilities are settled Entity Only vouchers for the selected entity will be processed GL transactions are created for one entity at a time Day Book Only to be entered if daybooks are in use in which case the name you enter must be that of a valid daybook By default this is determined for each GL transaction by the system based upon the transaction type JL and the entity selected for the transaction You only need to enter a different one if you need to separate withholding tax tra
104. 0 Mean Cot PO wi E So CC 7 Oveshead fo 0e Ose he po FleHelp F 6o ESC Emd FoeDelete Cell Cui CappPasie Begin by entering the simulation code and period for which you wish to create the mean cost data Then make entries or changes to as many of the remaining fields as required The original values of most of the fields that are available for updating are determined by IES Mean Data Generation 30 18 1 4 However some are also determined by IES Routing Cost Roll Up 30 18 3 5 or Structure Cost Roll Up 30 18 3 6 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 394 European Accounting User Guide WO Rct Qty The Work Order Receipt Quantity shows the quantity of an item received against work orders or repetitive schedules during the period covered by this I E S simulation It will also include receipts processed using Receipts Backward Exploded 3 12 provided that the Use Receipts Backwards as WO flag in IES Mean Data Generation 30 18 1 4 has been set to Yes to force such receipts to be treated as work order receipts LE S work order receipt quantities together with purchase order receipt quantities are used in the calculation of mean receipt prices during Mean Data Generation PO Rct Qty The Purchase Order Receipt Quantity shows the quantity of an item received against purchase orders or supplier schedules during the period covered by this I E S simulation Purchase order receipt quantities together with work order
105. 00 2 Date 02 12 01 with amount 200 3 Date 03 12 01 with amount 400 4 Date 04 12 01 with amount 200 Date 31 12 01 with amount 800 Customer Balance 900 is positive Range 01 12 01 01 12 01 01 12 01 02 12 01 01 12 01 03 12 01 01 12 01 04 12 01 01 12 01 15 12 01 01 12 01 31 12 01 01 12 01 01 12 01 01 12 01 02 12 01 01 12 01 03 12 01 01 12 01 04 12 01 01 12 01 15 12 01 01 12 01 31 12 01 01 12 01 01 12 01 01 12 01 02 12 01 01 12 01 03 12 01 01 12 01 04 12 01 01 12 01 15 12 01 N N N N N N N N N N N 01 12 01 31 12 01 N 01 12 01 01 12 01 01 12 01 02 12 01 01 12 01 03 12 01 01 12 01 04 12 01 01 12 01 15 12 01 01 12 01 31 12 01 Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc European Accounting User Guide Reconcile Allow Payment gt Resulting Selected Entries for Balance Payment 100 200 400 200 100 100 100 200 300 100 200 300 100 200 400 200 100 200 400 200 100 200 200 800 100 200 100 200 300 100 200 200 400 100 200 200 400 QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods Test Case 2 Create a new customer cust2 with the following entries 1 Date 01 12 01 with amount 100 2 Date 02 12 01
106. 00 6 561 67cr 00000001 Matched 1C001215000019 2 1000 2200 6 461 67 00000001 Matched AP001221000077 2 1000 2200 990 00 00000001 Matched 1C001221000001 2 1000 2200 6 561 67cr 00000001 Matched 1C001221000002 2 1000 2200 5 571767 00000001 Matched 1C010104000013 2 1000 2200 20 00cr 00000001 Matched 1C010122000005 2 1000 2200 5 905 50cr 00000001 Matched 1C010122000006 2 1000 2200 5 014 50 00000001 Matched 1C010122000007 2 1000 2200 656 17cr 00000001 Matched 1C010122000008 2 1000 2200 557 17 00000001 Matched AP010129000244 2 1000 2200 20 00 00000001 Matched AP010129000246 2 1000 2200 20 00cr 00000001 Matched AP010129000248 2 1000 2200 20 00 00000001 Matched 1C010129000002 2 1000 2200 20 00 00000001 Matched 1C010129000005 2 1000 2200 20 00cr 00000001 Matched 1C010129000008 2 1000 2200 20 00cr 00000001 Matched AP010130000314 2 1000 2200 468 00 00000001 Matched AP010130000316 2 1000 2200 468 00cr 00000001 Matched 1C010130000034 2 1000 2200 1 312 33cr 00000001 Matched 1C010130000035 2 1000 2200 844 33 00000001 Matched 1C010130000036 2 1000 2200 17312733 00000001 Matched 1C010130000037 2 1000 2200 844 33cr 00000001 Matched AP010131000339 2 1000 2200 20 00 00000001 Matched AP010131000346 2 1000 2200 20 00 00000001 Matched 1C010131000003 2 1000 2200 20 00cr 00000001 Matched 1C010205000017 2 1000 2200 6 561 67cr 00000001 Matched 1C010205000018 2 1000 2200 6 461 67 00000001 Once consuming transactions have been matched it is not possible to reverse them
107. 1 1 When you have no PO attached the Imp Exp flag in the lower screen becomes updateable Set this flag to Yes if you want to create Intrastat data The data created will then be handled by the Intrastat functions in a similar way as the data for sales orders Refer to Chapter 10 Intrastat Voucher Maintenance European Accounting gives you additional functionality in the area of voucher maintenance e You can mark vouchers as Waiting Expenses Refer to Waiting Expenses Vouchers e VAT Registers are supported e Mirror accounting functionality can be used for vouchers that are not linked to Purchase Orders e Invoice and Credit Terms are mandatory e Payment Method has replaced check Form Refer to Manual Payments e Ability to enter VAT only vouchers has been added Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 136 European Accounting User Guide Additional and changed fields in Voucher Maintenance Paym m The payment method that should be used for paying this voucher Replaces the Check Form of standard MFG PRO Defaults to the payment method of the supplier Invoice Standard MFG PRO field the invoice number of the Supplier In European Accounting you are obliged to enter this Invoice number Used by European Accounting payment procedures Terms Standard MFG PRO field the Credit Terms code In European Accounting you are obliged to enter an existing Credit Terms code Waiting Exp Enter Yes or No to
108. 1 month 15 days 15 May 2001 Due Date 31 March 2001 2 months 31 May 2001 As a last example set Due Days to 61 Due days from 2 In this instance you would always get a due date set to the 1 of the month 3 months from the invoice date 6 March gt 1 June The following table shows the MFG PRO menu options that support this new European Accounting functionality 27 10 Customer Credit Review Update 27 14 Customer Account Statement Print 28 1 2 Waiting Expenses Voucher Maintenance 28 8 4 Recurring Voucher Inquiry 28 9 4 1 Payment Selection Automatic 28 9 10 Payment Manual Checks 28 17 AP Aging by Due Date Report 28 18 AP Aging as of Effective Date Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 3 General Ledger Standard MFG PRO General Ledger functionality has been modified in various places and new functionality added to satisfy the requirements of a number of European countries For example European Accounting now supports the Italian requirement that accounts must be formally closed In addition modifications have been made to some of MFG PRO s existing reports and new reports have also been added Again this has been done to satisfy the legal and business requirements of some European countries This chapter looks at the various enhancements that European Accounting has made to the General Ledger The following topics are covered Journals Secondary GL D
109. 2 Reporting of Diratts sisted etek acess aces E E E EE EEEE EEE EEO ES E chen E EEEE 116 Accounts Receivable PayMent cesessseesecssecssecsseceseceseceseesseeeseeeeneeeseecaeeseneeeaeeeneeenaes 119 Manual Payments and Payment Methods 0000 eee eee eeeeceeeceseceecesecesecsaecaeecaeseeeseeeseeeeereeeennees 120 Payment Submission to the Bank eee cee csecseeeeeeeeeeeceseseeeeeeeeecesecssecsaecsaecsaecsaesaeseaseeneenees 125 Bank Reconciliation of AR Payments cece eecseeceescesecesecesecaecaeecaeeeaeeseecaeseaeseeeeeeeeeseeeensees 126 Unapplied Payments Register ee ee eeceseceecseecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeensecesecsaecsaecsaecseecseseseseaeeaeseneseneenees 129 AR Check Void Maintenance 0 cee eecescesecssecseecneeeseeeeeeeeeecensecesecaecsaecsaecsaecseseeeseeeseeeeereeseeaees 131 AR Check Status Report o csccicsd cesses seid renie enori eee Eea EE sects coreeubsescbevbdagtadehceed tebeesaavs 131 Customization vsiiceesistiy ets eeely Wivetn TR E teed nee deeds ene te i 132 Chapter 5 Accounts Payable cccccccssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 133 Accounts Payable Features cict cessive leetieag aiin i ea i i is 134 Intrastat in V OUCHELS 2 5 sei i As ata E ta ee AE E a EEE EEES 134 Voucher Maintenance sericct cziecsssecsta titty ees teartea ee e a oa ai A R ie 135 Waiting Expenses Vouchers insira n E R S T E A A A 138 Manual Payments eanes riin eo asi ee Reda Seti he a hs Taaie ea 148 Unapp
110. 2 500 2 500 Line Article Description UM Cost Last Period Cost Fiscal Year GL Cost teem 7 50 10 00 0 00 Year Qty Price Corr LIFO Val GL Value Difference 2000 gg gone E Boge 2 ONT IE ES eS es Tot 40 10 00 400 0 400 Line Article Description UM Cost Last Period Cost Fiscal Year GL Cost C eap 27 50 30 00 40 00 Year Qty Price Corr LIFO Val GL Value Difference 2000 e RE age O aaga O E R tt SS Tot 40 30 00 1 200 1 600 400 R RCR G RT TOTALS Corr LIFO Val GL Value Difference 00 4 900 2 800 Additional Descriptions In Italy it is very important that the administration is clear and traceable which means that you have to be able to supply clear descriptions detailing the nature of each business transaction These must be in easy to follow Italian MFG PRO often only gives very cryptic descriptions but European Accounting adds functionality so that you can supply suitable descriptions For transactions carried out in the Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable modules European Accounting adds operation types to allow you to provide the required details Refer to Chapter 2 Setup and Basic Data For General Ledger transactions a second GL description line has been introduced Refer to Chapter 3 General Ledger Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 461 Numbering of GL Transactions In Italy as all administration must be clear and traceable not only do companies need to be able
111. 3 v List payment selection and get approval Payment Selection Register 28 9 4 4 v Execute payments and creation of checks and payment media Payment Automatic Checks 28 9 4 6 v When media are lost create duplicate Creation of Duplicate Media 28 9 4 8 At the level of the supplier the default bank and method of payment can be specified When vouchers are created this bank and method of payment are automatically assigned The bank of payment method of the voucher can be changed At the voucher level the payment method replaces the default MFG PRO Check Form Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 235 Marking Vouchers Vouchers can be marked for payment using a payment method When a voucher is entered in Voucher Maintenance 28 1 1 the default bank and method of payment of the supplier are copied to the voucher It is possible to modify the bank and method of payment Voucher Maintenance update of bank and payment method The bank and method of payment shown here are used as the defaults when the payment selection is created You can however decide to use a different bank and payment selection for the actual payment Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 236 European Accounting User Guide Creating Payment Selection Payment selections can be created automatically or manually These two methods are considered in the following sections
112. 3Z1 Te A Check Unappiied Date 15703701 Curencr ELIA Entity 1000 Elfective araki Cil be App ith k Fi Halp F2 Go ESC End Hest Pree CAN Ca Copp Paste Ctrl to Apply The total amount to apply Left to Apply The amount of the check that has not yet been reconciled You can only apply vouchers in base currency or in one non base currency Unapplied payments must always be applied completely they cannot be applied in two separate applications After this the vouchers have an applied amount equal to the amount entered here and the check is booked in GL with the appropriate accounts and cost centers You can only delete an application if all of its associated applications are deleted first By deleting the application of the check against a voucher the voucher is automatically re opened and the amount applied on that check is restored Any corrective GL bookings needed as a result of this action are also performed Unapplied Payment Report To check the available unapplied checks and the applications made to these checks Unapplied Payment Report 28 9 21 gives an overview of the checks and the vouchers against which they have been applied You can select the supplier for who you would like to see the unapplied checks and their associated applications If you set the Only Unapplied field to Yes the resulting report will only show those checks which have not yet been applied Proprietary in
113. 482 CUSLOMIZAULON wis ccseees concise ies ecobert ces ee be escent a eee 483 Appendix B Mean Data Generation Messages ccsssseeeesssseereeseeneenes 485 Mean Data Generation Messages cssessecssecesecsseceseeeseceseesseeeceeeeneeeaeecaeecsaecaaecsaeceaaeenaees 486 C stomiza tOM Geese r eeaeee olesott secsebthildets otlevesobestocecbebideeial chacebuc a E e etana 489 AddendUM sasiesicnss cctines casstennwnanSeiane cctans ne uttiaus weaiSeenwnsdboutsldadachanseansbaadedatneadaaanaacsigns 491 Glossary i ariera aa ra ariaa saaa iaaa inaasa iiaa idaan aiaiai idana 493 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc About This Manual Purpose European Accounting is an integrated module of MFG PRO It adds new financial features and modifies existing standard MFG PRO functions to offer support for various legal and common business accounting practices found in a number of European countries While European Accounting was developed primarily in response to the individual requirements of specific countries within Europe many of its features have been extended so they are now of a more general use Some features do however remain country specific and control settings make it possible to activate these country specific features Refer to Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues for details on features that apply only to specific countries European Accounting is based on MFG PRO Version eB and is also available for some previous
114. 5 11 Italian Statement of Account Date 13 03 01 Page 2 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Time 14 40 18 Pay Eff Date Customer Account Sub Acct CC GL Reference Document Bk Mthd Batch Supplier Debit Credit 1200 ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE Opening Balance 1 479 691 34 AR010308001389 1000509 08 03 01 Logs 1 170 00 0 00 Invoice Credit Note 1857 AR010308001389 1000509 08 03 01 Logs 0 00 1 170 00 Invoice Credit Note 1857 AR010308001390 1000511 08 03 01 Logs 505 78 0 00 Invoice Credit Note 1857 NLG 1 170 00 AR010308001391 1000513 08 03 01 Logs 518 75 0 00 Invoice Credit Note 1857 NLG 1 200 00 AR010308001392 1000514 08 03 01 Logs 522 64 0 00 Invoice Credit Note 1857 NLG 1 209 00 AR010308001393 00003012 AA AC 08 03 01 L0QJ 0 00 1 478 43 AR Payment file Dutch Cli 1858 NLG 3 420 00 AR010308001394 00003013 AA AC 08 03 01 L0QJ 0 00 1 170 00 AR Payment file Dutch Cli 1858 AR010309001398 00001088 AA MC 09 03 01 001 0 00 1 00 MANUAL CHECK AP 1860 AR010309001400 00001089 AA MC 09 03 01 L0QJ 0 00 1 100 00 MANUAL CHECK AP 1861 AR010309001402 00001090 AA MC 09 03 01 Logg 0 00 1 150 00 MANUAL CHECK AP 1862 ARO10309001404 2114 AA MD 09 03 01 L0QJ 0 00 518 75 AR Manual Draft 1864 NLG 1 200 00 AR010309001407 2115 AA MD 09 03 01 L0QJ 0 00 1 209 00 AR Manual Draft 1867 AR010309001408 2116 AA MD 09 03 01 Logg 0 00 522 64 AR Manual Draft 1867 NLG 1 209 00 Period Activity 22 238 82 15 489 82 Closing Balance 1 474 088 69 End of Report Proprietary inform
115. 7 At the end of registering a voucher the system will determine the final voucher number based on the VAT register you have linked to the voucher This number is the next available number taken from the numbering sequence specified in VAT Register Maintenance 2 13 7 1 Final Voucher Number i Youches Marnlenanne Wer Mera fet Qusa Giptis Heip ce oe cl I Cool 9 000 Total 2 090 Centiot 200 00 Elective Larai ERS nn Taak in bb Tar Date ir rii Suppher EUROSUPP European Ansonia Renat Te EUROSUPP Euiopean Accom Ship Tec 10000 Quality Prohacts an Currency EUA Bank AA Papmm MC invata im 29 Aset F100 ete aaar Dier Acct Tenn 30 Enlily 1000 Disc Dale tiyaayod Ak Que Daie Ia oa son Supp i BA Separate Dk ma Exp Date Type Waiting Exp ma Note If you disabled VAT register functionality on purchase transactions in the Purchase Order Control file the system will not validate the VAT registers of any purchase order being linked to a voucher It will simply check that the tax rates for each voucher line as entered in the receiver matcher frame lie in the same VAT register Sales MFG PRO s standard documents associated with sales transactions have been enhanced to handle VAT register functionality The following sections describe how this is handled when creating sales ord
116. 70 00 07 03 01 00003011 P 4 07 03 01 AR010307001343 1836 1200 LOQJ Test Supplier f 1 100 00 17 03 01 07 03 01 1000473 M 4 eultrp0l p c7la 25 13 23 15 Matched Transactions Report Date 13 03 01 Page 2 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Time 13 34 16 Enty Account Address 1000 1200 LOQJ Eff Date Reference Batch Account Description Cur Sub Acct Due Date Ext Invoice Ent Date CostC Document Project Address Typ Matching Currency Amount Debit Credit 07 03 01 ARO10307001344 1836 1200 LOQJ Test Supplier f 1 150 00 17 03 01 07 03 01 1000474 M 4 07 03 01 ARO10307001346 1837 1200 LOQJ Test Supplier f 2 250 00 07 03 01 00001085 P 4 07 03 01 AR010307001358 1846 1200 LOQJ Test Supplier f NLG 1100 00 475 52 17 03 01 07 03 01 1000482 M 4 07 03 01 AR010307001359 1847 1200 LOQJ Test Supplier f NLG 1100 00 475 52 07 03 01 07 03 01 2110 D 4 Movement Account 17 045 52 16 495 52 Balance Account 550 00 End_of Report Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 3 General Ledger 51 Various existing reports and inquiries have also been modified to add GL Matching Transaction functionality e Account Code Report 25 3 15 e Account Balance Detail 25 15 2 e Transaction by Account Inquiry 25 13 18 e Transaction Register 25 13 21 e Journal Report Print 25 10 3 The matching number assigned to a matching process is shown on all these reports and the options to Include Matched and Include Non Matched transactions have also been added Conver
117. 82 Cash Book Re penis ccsisesscetestes oes etcee denis Lie ec ae ee a aie ete 183 Bank Slip Numbers in AR and AP Reports ceeeseceseceseceseceeeceseeeseesseeeeneeeaeeeaeesaaeenaees 184 CUSTOMIZ AL OMe en e e e a E a E cette Pelt ed ele wre et E ae ae Surt Mecbetrase tebe Meee ox 184 Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods ccccccssseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneteeeees 185 Payment Methods scccccc niet eet eaetlisitiel A cl Serle ene aaa a ls eatin ee 186 Validation of Customer Supplier s Bank ACCOUNL eee eeceeeeseceeceseceecaeecaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneensees 190 Appropriate Bank Account Validation with Payment Method 000 0 eee see cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseensees 195 Currency Validation sisri erete co costes ish Gao ent sateds Biv S aoa Ka EERE NEEE SEEK vie eesin 196 Settlement Validation jc eiieeii eos tsioen aeon eine EEEE ne eaS eer EDS duis cbs evaded bdvtecvcbes 196 Payment Selection Logic sssrinin iian ene i scent E i ea 197 Godse R aE tek oc a A E EE a RRS 197 Election DOFT R ieee A ee die 197 Automatic Payments Examples iersinii rT a E EC EE e Ea ER 200 TOSU Case E E hs EE E itd Og E E E eR ES 200 TOStiCase 2 seni sees EE EE E Soe og etn Coded Ais SPR eae 201 Automatic Payments Control File 0c eeseceseceseceseceseceseeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeseneseneeeaeeeaaecaaeenaees 202 Defining Payment Methods 03 sche aot ind ch ee she a ete 206 Additional Swift Datan cererea e a a waked e 214 Accounts REcelvables t
118. AT Register Next Page Number Header For Sales VAT Register Next Page Number Invoice Sequence ID Credit Note Sequence ID Voucher Sequence ID Correction Invoice Sequence ID euvtrgrp p c7la Page 8 VAT Register Site Active EC VAT Register Header For Purchase VAT Register Next Page Number Header For Sales VAT Register Next Page Number Invoice Sequence ID Credit Note Sequence ID Voucher Sequence ID Correction Invoice Sequence ID euvtrgrp p c7la Page 9 REPORT CRITERIA VAT Register Site Active Only no EC VAT Registers Only no 2a 10000 yes no 2a site 10000 00000001 2a site 10000 00000003 2aiv Next 2acr Next 2avo Next laco Next 3a yes yes EC Purchases 00000003 EC Sales 00000004 3aiv Next 3acr Next 3avo Next 3aco Next 3a 10000 yes no pole begs 00000003 glk lk l 00000004 2aiv Next 2acr Next 3avo Next 3aco Next 2 13 7 3 VAT Register Report EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT purchase VAT header sales vat header Seq Number 2ai00022 Seq Number 2ac00002 Seq Number 2av00027 Seq Number 1aa00002 2 13 7 3 VAT Register Report EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Seq Number 3ai00002 Seq Number 3ac00002 Seq Number 3av00002 Seq Number 2000002 2 13 7 3 VAT Register Report EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Seq Number 2ai00022 Seq Number 2ac00002 Seq Number 3av00002 Seq Number 2000002 2 13 7 3 VAT Register Report EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT End o
119. Bank Reconciliation Together submitting and reconciling drafts replace the standard Draft Discounting functionality found in MFG PRO When a draft is submitted the payment in process account is used while the Discount Charges Account is used when a draft is discounted When the draft is reconciled the cash account of the bank is then updated Single Draft Bank Submission To submit a single draft to a bank you must first enter the batch number and batch total Entering the batch 27 6 6 9 Next you are asked to enter the reference of the draft you wish to submit Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 89 Update of reference to be submitted When you have chosen the correct draft you are then able to enter the relevant data The type of draft you are submitting and the submission discounting combination selected will determine which of these options can be set Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 90 European Accounting User Guide Update of submission details Targhee rsi Henk Sibra Effective Date The effective date for the submission Description The GL description Bank The bank of the submission Pmt Meth The payment method of the submission Cash Account Payment in Process account for bank payment method and module will be displayed This defaults to the Payment in Process account for the payment method selected However if no PIP account has
120. Consumption Net Effect Not Allocated Receipts Mean Receipt Price Mean Price for consumption Total Inventory Value Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 374 European Accounting User Guide kes o o S S c O O O Peers o o o S Mean mead Price o a kees O o o S 0 oa Not Allocated Receipts 100 500 Mean Receipt Price Mean Price for consumption 4 4 8 2 se 100 10 x Ja aa Net Effect Net Effect 1 o aol 50 Mean Mean Receipt Price Price Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 375 Not Allocated Receipts Available Stock Mean Receipt Price Mean Price for consumption eae EIS 500 13 500 10 1 100 11 81 Using the LIFO calculation the same inventory as shown in the example in the previous section is now valued at 1 000 Mean Consumption Price and Calculation of Manufactured Item The example used for LIFO and FIFO in the previous two sections was a simple one using a purchased item In the following example the Mean Price for Consumption is calculated This mean price is used for calculating the mean receipt price of a manufactured item The following example calculation shows the mean receipt price of manufactured item B using LIFO methodology Manufactured ltem B Purchased ltem A Manufactured item B is created from two Purchased Item
121. Currency The country table can be maintained with the function Country Code Maintenance 2 22 1 10 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 14 European Accounting User Guide Country Code Maintenance Intrastat Code The Intrastat country code as used in the Intrastat reports VAT Prefix The VAT prefix for this country This prefix must be a valid VAT prefix and is used as the default prefix for addresses you enter for this country Currency The currency of the country This is used for some Intrastat reports that have to report in the currency of the country Customers European Accounting adds the following new fields to Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 e VAT register and Operation Code e Suspended VAT flag e Bank e Payment Method e Bank Account validations Not all additional fields flags will display some are dependent upon settings in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 When VAT Registers have been enabled by setting the VAT Register flag in the European Accounting Control File a new pop up displays in the first window Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 2 Setup and Basic Data 15 of Customer Maintenance Here you can specify a VAT register for the customer and set the associated operation type VAT Registers in Customer Maintenance Cuslomer 4 ainlenance VAT Register The default VAT Register to be used with this customer Operation Code The default opera
122. D Inc Appendix A Web Enabled Functions 483 Menu Label 28 20 13 AP VAT List Voucher Numbering Report 28 20 20 Supplier Debit Credit Report 28 AP IBLC Report IES Simulation BOM Inquiry IES Simulation Routing Inquiry IES Excluded Part Report TES Excluded Location Report 36 4 7 14 EPM Message Inquiry 36 4 7 15 EPM Message Report Customization ustoma Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 484 European Accounting User Guide Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Appendix B Mean Data Generation Messages This Appendix contains a full list of the exception messages that can be output when generating mean simulation data using European Accounting s inventory evaluation functionality See Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation for full details on this functionality This appendix contains the following sections Mean Data Generation Messages Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 486 European Accounting User Guide Mean Data Generation Messages Mean Data Generation messages can be output from any of the following functions e JES Mean Data Generation 30 18 1 4 e IES Routing Roll Up 30 18 3 5 e IES Structure Cost Roll Up 30 18 3 6 e IES Data Resynchronization 30 18 1 5 Should any of these messages be output they will be shown on the audit trail report that is created after the mean data has been generated This is pr
123. E EA A EREA E E EA L Ea 357 C st mizatiom eeii iiaii iii iii iii i i a 359 Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation ccccsssseeesesseeeenes 361 Usina TE Sery i EE EN E te detec se egy E eas ese EVE EE Jennies se EAE E 362 Special Considerations and Limitations ssssssesesessssesseseseestsssrsesesrensssnestntsrenesnnsenenneninenenseneren 363 Inventory Evaliations neren eo eeo dies sced levis o aE aE EEEE a OAS oA SS I ERS SEEK E I EEY 363 Main Flow a a r a ee i eA 369 Calculation Examples 3 2 notin eens a E e aE ERE EARO AE ate eine A 370 Setting up the Simulation tc send eh wei eet eee eee ks 379 Creating a Manufacturing Simulation Set cece cscsecsesecseessesecseesscesesessesssesssseesseseseenes 380 Generating Mean Simulation Data 0 cece cescesecsseceseeeseeeseeseaeeeseeeseeeeaeeeaeessaecaaecsaecaeenaaes 384 Generating Data Automatically sceccvisse casescssies opsssessusessbsiescavessdeuse en erei EEEE arion aee rire I Sos 384 Generating Data Manually siise ninine cipeseevevsassctussttossistes chsubsaesibuse x E Ea E SEEE EE EErEE ra E Sios 388 Cost Rollups ee ce a ea t EAE a oroa EA SE EEE EE ERT A E EE ches hae 397 Performing Cost ROUUPS oes nepe a N a aa E E oa Ea nE I EERE Een heoo 397 Data Resynchromization sesse e A A E the e 400 Repon a e ae roe e eea E e E EE A N AEA EEE EEA eee aR 401 Inventory Evaluation Report o esinsin eneee noiri ir EREE EESE EEEE en EER Ere eak 402 Setting Inventory B
124. EE 54 Improvements in REPOM S roesini eei a eee eet eae 56 Itahan Statement of ACCOUNT trresna A eevee aia eins deen ee aes 56 GL Account Sheet REPOLts siscessca seertesse n a E A R E ee 59 C stomizatlO Miesies nenene e e E E EEE EE EE EE EE EEA EEA EEEE REE 60 Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable ccccsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeeesenseeneeeeeeeeeees 61 DR CR MEMOS oari oere eare eenaa E EES EE ENA EIEEE EE E E E EEEE 62 DR CR Memo Maintenance sneinen esenee eo eeo oir EE OEE EEEE E EEEE EE ES 62 DR CR Memo Inquiry eeen eae iier ea E rE Ee EEEE eE E EE EET EE ESK EE E 65 Customer Account Inquiry seee eree EEr EE EEEE E EEE A EAEE a 2 65 Additional Functionality for Drafts esseeeeeeeeeesseeeesesreesessresrrsressesressesrrssresresesriesereessrentesee 67 Flow of Drattsic 2 sete hat hina tee anid esis aoa tele haa ede 69 Draft Creation cic 2 sth n e het dee is die ek AE ee ase ed ee 72 Draft Bank SubDMISSiOn ee ec eeceeeceseceecesecseecasecaeecseseaeseceeeeessesecsecsaecsaecsaecaaecsaseaeseeeeeeeeeeenes 87 Draft Bank Reconciliation cies csecseceseceecaeeeseeeeeeeeesecesecsaecsaecsaecsaecsaecseseaeseeeeeeeeereeeensees 102 Draft Closings 2e sise dee tae is ar eles Redes Sie tel ee eee See dine a 107 Draft Re Openss nck haste she A dese aa ee ae ed 109 Draft Reversal rinine rins risov u ieor SEE eer EOE EVENE EKET EE coboussncveeeabestovbecansepeeeeues 111 Unapphed Drafts cnino a e EEr E hei aa EE aul EEE E 11
125. European Accounting User Guide MI QAD 78 0511A For MFG PRO eB Printed in the Netherlands April 2001 ii European Accounting User Guide This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated without the prior written consent of QAD Inc The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice QAD Inc provides this material as is and makes no warranty of any kind expressed or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose QAD Inc shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages including lost profits in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material whether based on warranty contract or other legal theory Some states do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties or the limitation or exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations and exclusion may not be applicable PROGRESS is a registered trademark of Progress Software Corporation Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation MFG PRO is a registered trademark of QAD Inc Copyright 1997 2001 by QAD Inc 78 0511A QAD Inc 6450 Via Real Carpinteria California 93013 Phone 805 684 6614 Fax 805 684 1890 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc
126. European Accounting User Guide Withholding Tax in Supplier Maintenance Here you can enter the fiscal address code of the relevant supplier plus specify if the supplier is an individual rather than a company Refer to Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes In the bank account window bank account validations have been added Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 2 Setup and Basic Data 23 Supplier Maintenance Added Bank Validations Hank Account E i fF The functionality of this window is identical to that of Customer Maintenance When you want to perform payments to this supplier using the Swift format you should also enter this supplier in Supplier Swift Data Maintenance 2 3 17 Refer to Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods Changed Address Information European Accounting changes the address information Bank account validations and additional numerical VAT code validations for Italy and Belgium have been added Refer to the previous two sections Customers and Suppliers for full details Changed address information can be found in the following MFG PRO address functions Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 24 European Accounting User Guide Description Bank account Additional VAT code al Currencies European Accounting has a different setup of currencies from that used in standard MFG PRO If you want to use the Swift standards to perform your
127. Generating data automatically from the transaction history using IES Mean Data Generation 30 18 1 4 This is the recommended method e Creating data manually by keying it in yourself by hand e Copying data from existing standard MFG PRO data Generating Data Automatically IES Mean Data Generation 30 18 1 4 automatically generates simulation data from real historical data This function creates all the information needed for any inventory evaluation from the transaction history In one run through the Inventory Transaction History tr_hist and Shop Floor Operation History op_hist records you can generate the mean bill of material the mean routing and the mean purchase prices of all parts in the simulation set A LIFO or FIFO inventory evaluation can then be created from this information Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 385 IES Mean Data Generation 30 18 1 4 mi Mi E UrerMers Edt Queue Options Help t h Simulation FIFO 2000 FIFO ahestion Cake Methed FIFO Sanulateen Year 2000 Parad i To az 01401 400 31000 MAZDE 317120 Item Typa To Shas To Groep Ta Gemerate Foutieg pes Generate Structure par Calculate Puachase Cost pes Use Ineoier Price no Use Receipts Backwards as WO no Primi Asii Tr pes Taput Balch ID Fl Help F2 Go ESC Eind Haai Pia Ch Cu Copy Paria E A sim
128. Global Shipping FE GL Peotocol Humbering Roquesd yer Beal Journal Poot Hii aa oononns FieHelp Feefio ESC End Cie Cet CitC Copy Chl V Pasta Use Enhanced Global Shipping Enter Yes or No European Accounting includes functionality originally introduced to support the Italian Bolle d Accompagnamento Merci or Bolla a legal shipping document that used to be needed in Italy for all goods movements Now known in Italy as the Documento di Trasporto these documents are no longer a legal requirement but are common business practice both in Italy and in a number of other countries too MFG PRO functionality has been extended to allow the production of shippers in many areas where this is not supported in standard MFG PRO Setting this flag to Yes enables the creation of these shipping documents in those functions where it is not supported by standard MFG PRO GL Protocol Numbering Required Enter Yes or No to enable this Italian specific feature In Italy all GL transactions must be assigned a number known as the protocol number These must be numbered sequentially with no gaps in the numbering This field determines if such numbering is required Next Journal Prot Nbr If the GL Protocol Numbering Required flag has been set to Yes to indicate GL Protocol numbering is required this field shows the next protocol number available for allocation by the system VAT Register Enter Yes or No When this flag is set to Yes the system will prompt you to
129. IFO rules were used in the previous year but you wanted to use LIFO ones in the current one then you would not be able to create the starting inventory balance for the current year using this function Recording Opening Inventory Balances When I E S is being used in a new implementation of MFG PRO you can use IES Data Take On 30 18 1 24 9 to load existing data into I E S and record the opening inventory balance This special program allows existing historical receipts made before the implementation of MFG PRO to be added to I E S as unplanned receipts These receipts are then treated as though they were at the standard cost for those items Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 406 European Accounting User Guide IES Data Take On 30 18 1 24 9 IES Daia Take in Lals Ui Menu Edt Quas Dpr Help AA Simulation FIFOZ000 PIFO Valais Cak Method FIFIN Sanulaton Yes AWI Period a tafi On A00 mi BiAA 31010 liem Typa Te Satu tal Geoup Te Output Batch iD Fistelp Fe Go ESCeEnd Heati CrbxicAveCut Copy Paste Fs This special program is intended specifically to assist in the recording of opening inventory when LE S is used in a new implementation of MFG PRO In these cases MFG PRO will have no Inventory Transaction History data for any previous years from which to calculate the correct Opening inventory position according to LIFO or FIFO rules IES Data Take On allows you to
130. KEERT ETEO REA TEA 27 Credit T m Ssn i areira iee e ee ee ei Ce ei oa 28 Customization verisi ieee CE EEE EA EERE EAE TREE EEE 30 Chapter 3 General Ledger wicisssiscicccecccsecisasenceceencseseeenasesnassnesdowenseseseauansuawcunesis 31 Jo mmals asune eE A A a eat e A lad stele E E O AE 32 Secondary GL DeScriptlons seccscclestslesaceesl ee aee aeaaee aaar aae oo Eaa e Enae en b lstes 32 Improved GL Descriptio nS eaeoe eie reie aE Aet DE ARE E GE ERE 34 Year End Closerie desea E E ETE EAE EE R EE pes ETE R EATE 36 GE Transaction Matec hindere o a raa AR ee eat eae 37 Setting up Transaction Matching issis sees iseisoros sre en arase vp aesa SEKE E sasi RESE OERE E EE REES oTa SINEES 37 Matching TramsactOns gt ss scscesssc ss sdeezseescscyss goss rea a ER EEE S renes er ASEE a EERS osar ERRE EEn bE RESSE 39 Reversing Matched Transactions ssesssseessseessereerestsresrrsttetsstertssestrssertestesrertesenreestenesrenrseeerssee 48 Consolidating Matched Transactions sseseeeseeesesseessseesrestsrrsrstesresreetssreresrerteseerrnertenesrenrrsreersse 49 GL Transaction Matching Repotts essseessseeesesrsesssesresrsteerssrerrssesrrstertrstesreerssrerenestrenesrentsseeersset 50 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc iv European Accounting User Guide Converting from an Older MFG PRO System eee eceeceesceeeceseceseceseceaecseecaeesaeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeseens 51 GE Control Flessen eee iene ia eis MR ee a a ee
131. LCR supplier initiated drafts are raised by the supplier based on a customer s outstanding invoices and are sent directly to that customer s bank for payment Customers can approve these drafts for payment but in reality rarely take the time to do so Customers who do not wish to allow you to submit proposed drafts to their bank without their prior approval can refuse to allow you to do so even if the submission of proposed drafts has Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 82 European Accounting User Guide been globally enabled This is controlled by the setting of the Refuse Submission Proposed Drafts flag in Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 Lushon Masker gre M E3 Umea Eel Qusus Opies Help toM GICs Cestoaer Address e ee Customer EUANDCUST Kame Eurepean Accounting Custom Addie Format Esi Fou Teche Added AEII Eeropean accounting Customer Data Aafomalio Pamen Bank a Payment Hethod MT Refuse Submission Proposed Drafts Indicates whether it is possible to allow the submission or discounting of proposed drafts for a particular customer If set to No proposed drafts for that customer can be submitted directly to that customer s bank for payment However if set to Yes proposed drafts cannot be submitted to that customer s bank without that customer s prior approval Proposed Draft Creation You can select the range of invoic
132. Maintenance ojom ce c 0 Country The country for which you declare Intrastat The country has to be defined in the country table 2 22 1 10 Entity The list of entities of which the transactions are reported in this country One entity can only report once in one country Declarant The company address used for declaration This address can be created in Company Address Maintenance 2 12 Branch The office of declaration used for some countries being the office to which the declaration is to be sent Agent Address code of the third party that is making the declaration on your behalf Currency The currency of the report Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 338 European Accounting User Guide Program The program that does the actual reporting for the Intrastat movements Minimum Weight Minimum of each reported consolidated line to be reported in KG Reporting Frequency For display purposes only The reporting frequency Last Date For display purposes only The last date on which the report was run This field cannot be updated and is set to Static by Intrastat s reporting modules A browser is available for the Declarant Declarant Browse 2 22 1 21 Declarant Browse 2 22 1 21 Dinclaiant Brean 1 GO alala Salu salele Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 10 Intrastat 339 Intrastat Transport Maintenance Intrastat uses a code to denote the meth
133. Maintenance 2 13 13 1 This new flag shows the VAT register to which a particular tax code is linked Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 262 European Accounting User Guide VAT Registers for Customers and Suppliers European Accounting allows you to add VAT registers against customers and suppliers for use in sales and purchase transactions A pop up window has been added to MFG PRO s standard Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 function to allow you to enter a VAT register and its associated operation code against a specific customer Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 A browse is available to show the VAT registers currently available for selection Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes VAT Register Browse VAT Reqicter Browee 71 Loe Heras Edt Navigate Config gpa gidem Help BO s o 5 alala Joja jalea Purchace VAT yes yes L VAT Sales VAT He yes yes H VAT Purchase VAT Yeo yea H VAT Sales VAT He FileHelp F2efo FP Optinns ESCE nd ALT F Toggle Similarly a browse is also available to show the operation types Operation Code Browse Customer Honiensmae 263 Ure Mens Fed Gjueu Opies Help Customer Address Customer EUROCUST Kame Eurepean Accounting Custom Addrers Addrepr Ardh Liperatian Lode Hanes Cty Shabe Tyne ni paraten fin County FRANCE Anmnlinn WAT Register 1a Type af Gperation Pescri
134. Material Labor Burden Overhead and Subcontract costs associated with each Note Any unplanned receipt quantities do not affect the calculation of any mean prices Mean Cost PO The Material Labor Burden Overhead and Subcontr fields in the Mean Cost PO column store the mean receipt price for the item in each individual cost category calculated for all receipts processed in this IES simulation period for purchase orders and supplier schedules Mean Cost WO The Material Labor Burden Overhead and Subcontr fields in the Mean Cost WO column store the mean receipt price for the item in each individual cost category calculated for all receipts processed in this IES simulation period for work orders and repetitive schedules If the Use Receipts Backwards as WO flag in IES Mean Data Generation 30 18 1 4 flag is set to Yes the cost of such receipts typically the GL cost are treated as work order receipts and will also be used in the calculation of the mean receipt price Mean Cost Reception The Material Labor Burden Overhead and Subcontr fields in the Reception column store the weighted average mean receipt price for the item in each individual cost category calculated for all receipts processed in this I E S simulation period for all purchase orders supplier schedules work orders and repetitive schedules A weighted average mean receipt price is needed because in a given period an item may be both purchased and manufactured I E S wil
135. OB Point transport mode ship via transaction type and countries of dispatch and destination additional The charges can be calculated as a percentage a fixed amount per KG or as a fixed amount per unit A minimum amount for the charges can be entered For the calculation of the statistical value Intrastat looks in this table If a perfect match can not be found Instrastat looks for a partial match Intrastat looks for the following combination of matches in the following order 1 FOB Point transport mode ship via transaction type country of dispatch country of destination 2 FOB Point transport mode ship via transaction type 3 FOB Point transport mode ship via 4 FOB Point transport mode 5 FOB Point 6 Everything blank Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 10 Intrastat 341 When partial matches are searched for Intrastat looks for matching fields where the other fields are blank So in the second search a calculation method is searched with blank countries of dispatch and origin Statistical Value Calculation Maintenance oy jojojo i Sha Faa Cale H aminini Terms Delivery The method of delivery Transport Mode The transport mode Ship Via The MFG PRO ship via Flow The Intrastat Flow Indicator for this transaction for example A for Goods In Arrivals The code you enter here must correspond to that set in Flow Indicator Maintenance 2 22 1 1 Dispatch Countr
136. Out basis e Create a report for the inventory evaluation Create a report showing the LIFO Inventory Value and comparing it to the GL value of inventory in order to calculate the GL adjustment that needs to be entered The Italian LIFO Report 30 18 5 5 is available for this purpose In order to correctly value inventory as at the end of a given year it is necessary to go through all of the above steps for each year at a time As each year s inventory value has been calculated and reported the year should then be frozen and you can then link it to the next year s I E S simulation set using IES Beginning Balance Copy 30 18 1 3 Start by calculating the Mean Receipt Price for the fiscal year using Italian Fixed Yr Mean Price Calc 30 18 5 1 Italian Fixed Yr Mean Price Cal 30 18 5 1 UseHenu Edt Queue Opoe Help LIFO Simulation LIFODD LIFO Valuation Cale Methed LIFO Simulation Year 2000 Dup en a Fi Help Fi bo ESC Eed Heati Prev Dohi Af Cut Dopy Pashe Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 457 You just have to enter the simulation set code The calculation method and the year are then displayed The results of the calculation are automatically reported Next calculate the mean receipt price for the last quarter or period of the year using Italian Last Quarter Mean Price Cal 30 18 5 2 Italian Last Quarter Mean Price Cal 30 18 5 2 Simulation T
137. PSO FOES POO AFSIISzs00eEOS POCO AFPIOITIDUWOLL ehh ASAE RLS eO00eOO AFssas23000013 RF POO BFPO FONE Pod BFss0ss SONNETS OOOO APFPOSAIOOEDLI SOOT ARSE OOEIS HO0TeOOO aFsI0s7I00Nn13 PI ETTE EETL OEN eo aPSa0s s0iti i F PPOOOSEOO AFPIOIFIODHOFZ I eho ASAE OES 3 eDO00ebOO APPIUS 2000024 SOTSCOD BFSIORE ROOeETS POCO BFs057 SONNETS 5 SOOO APPIOSMOTEEFI eho TOS HOOdeOO Icssasz4008nDZ HO Tossed eoddOd IE iis ijitb s 3 PPOOTSPO0 ICYI0IFAOTPENS eho TOs eo Odeo Tessas24000008 Protocol The range of protocol numbers to be displayed A special procedure is also available to allow you to initialize or convert protocol numbers from an existing database Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 466 European Accounting User Guide GL Number Initialization 36 25 68 E GL Numbi brillation Effective Date The range of effective dates to be covered Print Date to Assign The print date to assign to the transactions This must be a valid date an entry of blank is not allowed Update Database Enter Yes or No If set to Yes then all changes will be stored in the database if set to No then a report is created but the changes are not stored in the database Assign Protocol Numbers Enter Yes or No If set to Yes protocol numbers are assigned starting with the next actual value available from the European Accounting Control File If set to No the protocol numbers are set to zero Withholding Tax In Italy under
138. Sort and Sub Total Criteria nianie ee eR e aE S ERE S EE EE ERE eraa aa S REEE 320 Total Journal Summary ossei ar a ne ae ARO Eae SEERIA ES 321 Report Definition skea e A dies sted tee ected EE eae ede a 323 Printing Journals ona orse raies a ETE ncletlaas Sete a a aiea 329 Cust mizatih e ennor cited cele R E sels atl a E N E R 331 Chapter 10 Intrastat sccccccciicicicssssetecnccccasinaiannasecenceassdeesananavansnauducesvacinvnsuananans 333 Intrastat Datacs 2 ices site sibe e E oat eens ves ies atin ee beast eileen eet 334 Set up Ob Intrastatas sec ae si eat is eh asl ee ee eee ee dee hae 335 Declar nts ai eese e E E a o a every E Hen AIREA pevees gouteatnes E e ENO EIRE deve ESSEEN 336 Intrast t Transport Maintenance posi 2s cccesesacsd eveck ss devsepanseessbsasaseen se puceeb ENESE sueceseneseeseee sos EVS KAS SRE 339 Statistical Value Calculation sce vebero oes nesar areen pesene re ara S En o ESI EEE EEE I EASES KAEI SISE 340 Entering Transacthots erone oann iinet ec a ee aa 343 Intrastat in IG DO and VOe eicere eae Eee E EEEE RE 347 Intrastat in Intersite Transfers icnn oeni e earo EREE K EEEE EESK EEE e s anok 348 Intrastat in Distribution Orders reisiin ionet esie enekes esie aee oeni nea in Erene aE 351 Intrastat in Vouchers without PO ssiisioeeiroirsiorioeeeionestenioeeenesre inebar rei eosrere iresi erie eeni 352 Manual Intr st at Postien aisre a e ine no EE sche EEEE EREE E E E E E ish hails 353 Reportins tromi lntrastat ertesi iie
139. T list A special AP VAT report Spanish VAT by Transaction 28 20 11 is supplied for conforming to Spanish standards Spanish VAT by Transaction Reference The range of voucher references to report Batch The range of batches to report Supplier The range of suppliers to report Entity The range of entities to report Date The range of voucher dates to report Effective The range of effective dates to report Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 475 Curr The currency of the transactions that should be reported Base stands for base currency When Base is entered all currencies are reported When another currency is requested only that currency is reported An example of the report is shown below At the end of the report a summary per VAT code is given Report Spanish VAT by Transaction euspvtap p c7la 28 20 11 Spanish VAT by Transaction Date 22 02 01 Page 1 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Time 14 57 18 Reporting Currency USD Exchange Rate Tax Reference Date Eff Date Tax ID State Sort Name Class Tax Amount Tot VAT Incl 20 02 01 20 02 01 gb111222233 XVT7A Address 20 02 01 20 02 01 gb111222233 XVT7A Address 20 02 01 20 02 01 gb111222233 XVT7A Address 20 02 01 20 02 01 gb111222233 XVT7A Address 20 02 01 20 02 01 gb111222233 XVT7A Address 20 02 01 20 02 01 GB444555566 XVT7 Dutch Address 20 02 01 20 02 01 GB444555566 XVT7 Dutch Address 20 02 01 20 02 01 GB444555566
140. The actual layout of the reports is done with so called report drivers For the major European countries report drivers are available Some versions also allow electronic declarations to be made Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 10 Intrastat 335 e Modification of update The update of the Intrastat data is moved to the end of the transaction In the statistical value calculation you can use trailer code elements as part of key This also means that you can only calculate this value after the trailer is entered Also some screen modifications have been implemented e Additional supported transactions In standard MFG PRO collecting Intrastat data automatically is only implemented for a few transaction types SO PO RMA RTS European Accounting has expanded this to Intersite Transfers IS Distribution Orders DO and Vouchers without purchase orders VO Set up of Intrastat The MFG PRO standard version of Intrastat can be activated in the Intrastat Control File 2 22 24 Intrastat Control File Umama Ed fusus Options Help iniaatai Met tah Inteactat Het anigi Mimareure 1 tr Inte gbat Interachye 2458 Teo tel dapi Sil beW0 To prevent the user having to enter too many frames you can enter transaction types for which you want the user to manually modify the Intrastat data in the Intrastat Interaction fields for the newly added types of Intrastat transactions You must supply
141. The range of dates on which transactions were entered for the appropriate account Effective The range of effective dates to be covered by the matching process Matching Number For display purposes only The matching number assigned to this particular matching process This is allocated once the process has completed and is useful should you wish to undo the procedure Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 42 European Accounting User Guide Sort on Amount Enter Yes or No to determine the order in which the un matched transactions identified by this procedure will be shown Yes sorts the transactions from the highest to the lowest while an entry of No sorts them by effective date Once you have entered the selection criteria the system searches the defined accounts and lists any non matched transactions that is open transactions Open transactions T2000 CEMTRE DE k Hiit CENTRE DE F 000 CENTRE DE k Hwat CENTRE DE k J CENTRE DE b Begin Balance GL eal Begin Balanoe GL Hate FisHelp FisGo ESCeEnd Page Uip Down Line lip own This list shows the effective date of these un matched transactions the document number of the document that created each transaction the customer or supplier code with their description plus the type of document For AP vouchers the external invoice number associated with that transaction is also shown The actual information given here varies depending on the type of information being process
142. The segment number currently being defined Minimum Value The minimum value that can be assigned to the integer element of the segment number Maximum Value The maximum value that can be assigned to the integer element of the segment number Initial Value The initial value of the integer element of the segment number Reset Value The number to which the integer element of the segment number is to be reset once the sequence reaches the end of the specified range Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 260 European Accounting User Guide By default the number assigned to the next voucher invoice credit note or correction invoice will consist of the next available number within the relevant numbering sequence An exception to this is DR CR Memos For DR CR memos invoice and credit note sequences are used provided the Use VAT Register Number Sequence flag in the Accounts Receivable Control File 27 24 is set to Yes If this flag is not enabled the numbers of these documents are assigned using standard MFG PRO functionality Setting Numbering Sequence Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 261 Tax Codes VAT registers must be linked to a tax code before they can be used MFG PRO s standard Global Tax Management features have been enhanced to allow you to do this A new flag VAT Register has been added to Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 Tax Rate
143. To Due Date Disc Date Amount Bank Closed 400000 EUROCUST 31 03 01 14 03 01 200 00 AA yes 400001 EUROCUST 31 03 01 14 03 01 300 00 AA yes End of Report Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 109 Draft Re Open Sometimes drafts have to be reversed even after they have been closed To facilitate this European Accounting has introduced the function Draft Re Open 27 6 6 23 Using this you can re open previously closed drafts Once a closed draft has been re opened it can then be reversed using MFG PRO s standard Draft Reversal function Draft Re Open 27 6 6 23 First you have to enter the reference number of the draft you want to re open Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 110 European Accounting User Guide Verification of draft that is being re opened 27 6 6 23 When the draft reference has been entered the draft data is shown for verification and you are asked if all information is correct On answering Yes the draft will be re opened Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 111 Draft Reversal Drafts can be reversed when they are approved submitted or reconciled Previously closed drafts can also be reversed providing they are first re opened using Draft Re Open 27 6 6 23 Refer to Draft Re Open The various flows are depicted in the figure below Reversing Drafts Proposed Vo
144. UNT S Page 1 qad inc AIC code Sub A C cc GL reference Doc Number PO Supplier Eff Date End of Report 331 Date 13 03 01 Time 13 17 26 Amount Amount Bal ance 5 396 09 89 084 282 For the detailed format of the majority of journal reports the balance column shows the difference between the credit totals for the account reference or document depending on the journal type It also displays the currency value of any transactions reported in a currency other than your database s base currency and the relevant currency code for each transaction provided the Display currency field in Journal Report Maintenance is set to Yes The difference between Debit and Credit is shown when this is anything other than zero but foreign amounts are not shown However for the Total Journal Summary and the two GL Book Reports the balance column is used slightly differently Refer to Total Journal Summary for details on the balance column in this report The GL Book Reports list for each account the starting balance the selected period and all the transactions against each account within that period This information is then used to calculate an ending balance for that period A beginning balance column against each transaction shows a running balance For the first transaction this will be the starting opening balance plus the first transaction For the next transaction this will be the balance from the first transaction
145. a 27 6 6 10 Multiple Draft Bank Submission Page 2 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT General Ledger Detail Entity Account Sub Acct CC Project Date Eff Date Description 1000 1250 26 03 01 26 03 01 Discount of Draft 26 03 01 26 03 01 Discount of Draft 26 03 01 26 03 01 Discount of Draft 1300 26 03 01 26 03 01 Discount of Draft 26 03 01 26 03 01 Discount of Draft 26 03 01 26 03 01 Discount of Draft End of Report eudmdim p c la 27 6 6 10 Multiple Draft Bank Submission Page 3 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT REPORT CRITERIA Report submitted by imh Output Date 26 03 01 Time 11 29 47 Date 26 03 01 Time 11 29 48 Debit Amount Credit Amount Date 27 03 01 Time 11 29 49 The actual GL entries that will be generated and the resulting status of the drafts will be different depending on the submission discounting combinations selected for each draft and whether the draft is approved or proposed They will be the same as those that would be created when using Single Draft Bank Submission In addition European Accounting has further enhanced Multiple Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 10 by adding a new bank driver that allows you to produce an electronic bank submission file for the electronic submission of drafts to the bank Refer to Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods for full details on bank drivers Separate Submission and Discounting By default drafts are submitted and discounted in one combined operation this is true
146. a Declarant and a corresponding Commodity Code The Agent and Intrastat Net Weight Minimum in this screen are not used but European Accounting adds a declarant table In the Intrastat Setup Menu declarants are added a statistical value menu and country code maintenance is modified Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 336 European Accounting User Guide Intrastat Setup Menu Fup Achdenling Demo gaddh Fko bredhoaboe Piar 2 Flow Indicator Brosse d Tare of Delivery Hl sintenences The changes to Country Code Maintenance have already been described Declarants Intrastat declarations are made for declarants A declarant is a company address for which transactions are reported for a country and a number of entities An agent for example a transporter can optionally perform the declaration for the declarant For the creation of the Intrastat report several report programs are available At the declarant you state the program name that has to be used Available reports program names are shown below Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 10 Intrastat 337 The Luxembourg driver has three output options paper flat ASCII and EDI All the other drivers have two output options paper or flat ASCII file according to an individual country s specification unless marked otherwise in the above list Declarants of Intrastat are defined in Declarant Maintenance 2 22 1 20 Declarant
147. abeechgud specs ienaeecbtonsesees 454 Additional Descriptions sseni eioi eeno seks co nenas e a Eeo aoao eSa obta E SE eKA SESS 460 Numbering of GL Transactions esesesesseessseeesssrrsrsststesrestertrsrerrsestestrstentesrertsserrrsententesrentsseeerset 461 SPa eee n a AA EE E iE ENEA EE e ENEE odes EAE EE E ATE E E 471 Bank Account Validation ES pnie iioi a EEEE E E e eaa 472 AR AP Transactions exceeding 500 000 pesetas ee eee eeceescesecesecesecssecseecseeeseeeseeeeeeeaeesaeenaes 472 AP WAT St eea E sae ceca teasecdes E E E AA ERT eg vaaaaeeneescevenbevss E E EE 474 Spanish RDE by Invoices n a tgs cae AEN PS EERE iti aces KEE AE ARE NS PIIRE eN 475 Belgium iinan nann a a a a i a ned nit a a 477 IBC Reports i255 oie san r dee Mi eel eRe a i Rees Mie hea 477 Yan Cis menna feet ve cee raucs ewe eaves T yet alle sbeseass Mle wy cts shlong eta ate 479 Netherlands eienenn eronneen eie ee adams eE aea i TE e EAO owes ceeastaganeseedeetusttoes 480 United Kingdom miira eA E E nd E cade ess hacer hak TE 480 Gernnany ierre a eiar Ee CEA E EEEE EEE EAE EE A E EEA E E EERE 480 LOTET EE E EET TE 480 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc viii European Accounting User Guide Customizationvccch ntl etal Laat te oi eet renee 480 Appendix A Web Enabled Functions cscsseeecesseseeeeeesseeeeeeeensseeeeeenneeees 481 Web Enabled Reports and Inquiries cece ceeceseceseesseeeseeceseeeseeesneeeneecseeesaecsaecsaeeeaaeenaes
148. abled this inquiry also shows the customer bank record associated with that draft the bank account number to be used when proposed drafts are presented to the bank and the draft s type customer or supplier initiated Draft Inquiry 27 6 6 2 Dalk gump Mi 2 bed el eka a a Eeference Abb Emmark Date ZE EI TL Currency Dus Date F1lfee o Entity Expect Fay Date Barik Eftectivu Date DERE Aooount Pistiane Rise Cece Bank hki ee A PRAAL Draft Report As for Draft Inquiry bank and payment method criteria have also been added to Draft Report 27 6 6 3 More status information is also given in this report than is the case in standard MFG PRO Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 117 When the facility to submit unapproved drafts to the bank has been enabled this report also shows the customer bank record associated with that draft the bank account number and the draft s type Supplier or Customer initiated The selection screen allows you to enter a status of D to generate a report showing only those drafts with a status of Discounted Note Draft Report was previously located on menu 27 6 15 Output example from Draft Report 27 6 6 3 Gmdmrp p 99 27 6 6 3 Draft Report EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Reference Status Sent By Account Date Sub Acct CC Date 26 03 01 Time 16 48 41 Amount Due Date Eff Date Curr C Total of Invo
149. accounts sub accounts or cost centers are determined from the System Account Control File the system will use the account specified for the relevant supplier should one exist All MFG PRO functions which generate GL transactions for either PO receipt accounts or expensed item accounts have been modified to support this functionality If no entries are found for a particular supplier then standard MFG PRO logic is used to determine the accounts to be used Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 5 Accounts Payable 161 Voucher Numbering Report In certain countries you are legally obliged to have a voucher numbering system that is sequential and contains no gaps The way this practice is upheld depends on the country Countries like Italy are very strict in enforcing this rule European Accounting has introduced VAT Registers to enable you to ensure no gaps are permitted in the numbering sequence of vouchers Refer to Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes However if you do not need such a strict application of this rule you can use Voucher Numbering Report 28 20 17 to check if any numbers are missing from your numbering sequence and make any corrections you require Voucher Numbering Report 28 20 17 Reference The range of voucher references that you wish to check The report will identify any gaps in the numbering sequence It has the layout shown in the example below Proprietary information Prope
150. action Matching feature you must first enable this functionality by setting the Use GL Transaction Matching flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 to Yes Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 38 European Accounting User Guide GL Transaction Matching Flag Once you have done this you must define the credit accounts against which debit transactions or vice versa from the General Ledger must be matched Do this using Account Code Maintenance 25 3 13 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 3 General Ledger 39 Account Maintenance 25 3 13 i Atel ode Hminlenint Matching Sequence Enter one or more of the following values 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 to determine the method used to control the matching of debit and credit transactions Enter 1 if you want to match transactions yourself manually The other numbers all represent various algorithms which the system can use to perform transaction matching automatically Refer to Automatic Matching below for details on these seven algorithms You can select more than one of these seven algorithms if you do so then your entries must be separated by commas European Accounting will process multiple algorithms in the order specified here If no matching is required leave this field blank Matching Transactions Once GL transaction matching has been activated and the accounts to be matched have been defined then transaction ma
151. actions may not form part of the same consolidation process In this situation the transaction that is matched but is not part of the current consolidation process is assigned the same matching number as the consolidation transaction This ensures no matching data is lost Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 50 GL Transaction Matching Reports European Accounting User Guide A new report Matched Transactions Report 25 13 23 15 has been added for GL Transaction Matching This lists all the matched transactions that meet the specified criteria Matched Transactions Report eultrp0l p c7la 25 13 23 15 Matched Transactions Report Date 13 03 01 Page 1 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Time 13 34 15 Enty Account Address 1000 1200 LOQT Eff Date Reference Batch Account Description Cur Sub Acct Due Date Ext Invoice Ent Date CostC Document Project Address Typ Matching Currency Amount Debit Credit 26 02 01 ARO10226001292 1792 1200 LOQJ Test Supplier f 1 100 00 09 03 01 27 02 01 1000433 M 1 27 02 01 ARO10227001290 1792 1200 LOQJ Test Supplier f 1 150 00 1000429 M 1 27 02 01 ARO10227001292 1792 1200 LOQJ Test Supplier f 1 150 00 1000429 M T 27 02 01 AR010227001293 1794 1200 LOQJ Test Supplier f 1 100 00 27 02 01 00001081 p 1 28 02 01 AR010228001294 1795 1200 LOQJ Test Supplier f 1 000 00 1000434 M 1 28 02 01 ARO10228001294 1795 1200 10qj Test Supplier f 1 000 00 1000434 M 1 28 02 01 ARO10228001295 1796 1200 10qj Test S
152. active planned payments for another bank or payment method European Accounting allows you to split payments between banks and payment methods If you have chosen to reconcile the credit amounts European Accounting next determines the total amount of open credit vouchers All open credit vouchers for that supplier are processed regardless of the selected range within the payment selection Now it is possible to calculate the maximum amount that can be allocated to the open vouchers in the selected range of vouchers of the payment selection Maximum amount available to allocate Supplier balance total amount on hold total planned payments that are not yet processed total amount of credit notes when you choose to reconcile When you choose to reconcile the amount is Maximum amount available to allocate 200 100 0 250 350 In this example if you had chosen not to reconcile the amount would have been Maximum amount available to allocate 200 100 0 100 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 199 When European Accounting knows the maximum amount available to allocate all open debit vouchers are processed within the range of the payment selection and vouchers are marked for payment on due date order up to the maximum amount available to allocate You add all these vouchers to one planned payment When European Accounting reaches the maximum amount availa
153. addresses of the suppliers for an AP account or the addresses of the customers for an AR account Sub account The sub account This can only be entered if sub account functionality has been activated Cost Ctr The cost center associated with the relevant account This can only be entered if cost center functionality has been activated Project The project associated with the relevant account Entered The range of dates on which transactions were entered into the appropriate account Effective The range of effective dates to be covered by the matching process Matching Number For display purposes only The matching number assigned to this particular matching process This is allocated once the process has completed and is useful should you wish to undo the procedure Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 3 General Ledger 47 Detail Summary Determines if the resulting list of un matched transactions will show the totals per account split by their respective transactions Detail or if it will just show a summarized total Summary Once you have entered your selection criteria European Accounting automatically selects the transactions to be matched Transactions are matched according to the algorithm s selected in Account Code Maintenance 25 3 13 numbers 2 through 8 identify the algorithm s used If multiple algorithms were selected in Account Code Maintenance they are processed in the order specified there
154. aices per Display Cash Book Balance no Use Suspended WAT es Manual Deali Method Oi Page HD AR Chetault Bank AA AR Cetqult Method of Feneant JHE Uss recondwy GL description pox Print Shipp n invoices pes Urs GL Transaction Matching per Withholding Tax Tepe WITHAOE Use Waiting Expenses Vouchers Enter Yes or No Indicates if the European Accounting Waiting Expenses voucher logic needs to be used If set to No you will not be able to mark vouchers as Waiting Expenses Account The account number sub account number and cost center codes used for Account Payable vouchers marked as Waiting Expenses Voucher Maintenance 28 1 1 Waiting Exp no An account should always be entered here even if you do not plan to use the waiting expenses voucher logic If an account is not filled in you will not be able to enter the account number on any voucher distribution lines Use Correction Invoices Enter Yes or No Indicates whether European Accounting s Correction Invoice function is turned on or off You will only be able to use Correction Invoices when this flag is set to Yes Display Cash Book Balance Enter Yes or No In Cash Book Maintenance 31 13 the starting balance has to be entered In standard MFG PRO for this balance the actual account balance is proposed as the beginning balance The disadvantage of this approach is that it requires all GL transactions to be posted In addition a serious performance problem
155. alances 0 insiti iae oinei e esii epi aeris 404 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Contents Vii Recording Opening Inventory Balances 00 0 0 eee ceeeceeeceeeeesecesecesecaeceaecaaecseseseseaeseeeeereeseensees 405 Maintaining and Using Completed Simulation Data eseesecsseceseeeneecnaecnaeeaaes 407 Copying Simulation Data to Standard Cost Sets cee ceseceeecsecssecseecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeereneensees 408 Copying Simulated Routings and Product Structures cece cesceseceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseneenseenaes 410 Deleting Period Datas es sssas sock eas scence den e sata zecesbaiss a E A E AA A RRE E ETETE VEERE A a RAS 412 Deleting Simulation Data ss ssc cs s8sssscesceeessestssesvestas ass OE ESSEET aeS OERE E Ea TES RESEO TONE PESSET EE aaae SR 413 C stomi ati n sesiis eea EN E REA EEE Een EEEE E e E 413 Chapter 12 Shipping DOCUMENIMS cseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeees 415 Stock Transfer FUNCUODS meneere tee EE ea EEEa eA EENEN EEEE EEE Ee EES 416 Unplanned 1ssues and Receipts manns a a ones E EN S 417 Set p OF D ta icere enee EA E EE A Ea E ea EEE EEA eE 418 Address Codes arre areenan s irae e E E Ra nE aE EOR AR dts edzebesscc TEETE RE 420 Creatine SHIPpers eenen eene aa oa RA eaa E a ao ie e A EA aeaa 421 Nop Inventory Items cesis co enrete ieo ihn o sees a ig e ae eoi tue oeo EEr EE TOE iE eia einek 426 VOICES rei EEE EE EE EE ETEN E AN ETNE OANA EN EA E EE E 427 Shippe
156. alian specific options allow you to calculate the LIFO value of inventory for a fiscal year using this calculation method e Italian Fixed Yr Mean Price Calc 30 18 5 1 e Italian Last Qtr Mean Price Calc 30 18 5 2 e Italian LIFO Calculation 30 18 5 4 e Italian LIFO Report 30 18 5 5 These are all accessed from Inventory Evaluation Report Menu 30 18 5 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 455 Inventory Evaluation Report Menu 30 18 5 Eiiaptan Aooounhrey Dema g ddh U i Menu Edt Quma Opie Help Inventory Evaluation Report Menu 1 likan Fead vr Haon Pare Lae 2 laian Lact Gir Haan Figa Ca 4 lakan LIFO aiclio B iiaisn LIFI Fepot 13 E5 invert Eval Rapai 24 E5 Sim Copy gt Naw Sim Maln Menu DE Financials Ta 30 Cost Management ta 30 16 leventory Evaluation Simulation as 3018 5 Inventory Evaluation Meport M These Italian specific options must be performed after the normal I E S processes have been completed up to and including the IES Structure Cost Roll Up Refer to Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation for details of these processes Therefore you must first carry out the following steps Create a LIFO simulation set for this Italian LIFO calculation using IES Simulation Set Maintenance 30 18 1 1 Run the Mean Data Generation 30 18 1 4 process to collect quantity informat
157. allow the creation and tracking of such invoices Originally added in response to requirements found in Poland European Accounting s Correction Invoice facility has been extended to make it of more generic use Using this functionality it is possible to create a correction sales order for an original invoice by entering the correct amounts rather than by entering the difference between the original invoice and the correct amount You can also keep track of the relationship between the original invoices and their correction invoices and print corrections invoices on which the original amounts the corrected amounts and the differences between the two are all shown You can also display the link between an original invoice and its correction invoice This functionality is all described in this chapter which covers the following topics Enabling Correction Invoices Creating Correction Sales Orders Shipping Correction Sales Orders Printing Correction Sales Orders Sales Order Control File Correction Invoices Link Report Invoice History Report Archiving Correction Invoices Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 436 European Accounting User Guide Enabling Correction Invoices Correction Invoices can only be created when the Use Correction Invoices flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 has been set to Yes eunling Ceol Fis Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Ch
158. als Daybooks e IBLC Report for foreign currency transactions e Payment drivers for Belgium e Intrastat report for Belgium both in Dutch and French e Two new reports AP VAT List Report 28 20 13 and AR VAT List Report 27 22 1 allowing the identification of a Tax Rate by a single code for reporting purposes These issues have been discussed in earlier chapters of this manual with the exception of the IBLC Report This is discussed below IBLC Reports Belgium s IBLC reports have to be supplied to the Institut Belgo Luxembourgeois Du Change and contain foreign currency transactions Two reports have been added to European Accounting to allow you to output these reports For Accounts Receivable the AR IBLC Report 27 22 23 is available Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 478 European Accounting User Guide AR IBLC Report 27 22 23 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 479 For Accounts Payable the AP IBLC Report 28 20 23 is available AP IBLC Report 28 20 23 France Many enhancements which have been incorporated into European Accounting were originally added to meet France s requirements e Improved draft flow and draft functionality e GL Transaction Matching Lettrage e Option to have separate GL references per document e Journals Daybooks e Intrastat reports e Several bank format drivers e VAT reports Proprietary inf
159. an Accounting Control File the following pop up window displays when the previous window is closed Here you can specify if Suspended VAT is to be used for this memo Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 64 European Accounting User Guide Suspended VAT in DR CR Memo Maintenance Suspended VAT Enter Yes or No to determine the due date of VAT If set to No VAT is due when the invoice is originally raised if set to Yes VAT is due on invoice payment Refer to Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes for further details on VAT registers and suspended VAT Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 65 DR CR Memo Inquiry The bank and payment method for a Debit Credit memo have been added to DR CR Memo Inquiry 27 2 Additional display of Bank and Payment Method GHALA Memo leery HWT EUROCUWST Sait Kame lag Tentrilante Laveice Sales Order A Payment Bethel KE E vaya Cr Tere 40 heat F i oo z iiaii Estity tong maani Deen D ae 7 i magii bpost 2700 z Eo Tem Level Currency EWE Eo Eamark Batch L822 DECUIT Europassa Accounting Cuertomr Sold To EROCUST Disinbuhon ERDERD EEEa aC ODETI 5 000 TE Customer Account Inquiry Customer Account Inquiry 27 13 has been enhanced by European Accounting to give e Option to include or exclude drafts in the inquiry e Option to include or exclude closed items in the inquiry e Option
160. an decide to look at planned payments only The middle window shows the active payment selection or open Dr Cr memos that comply with the selection rules of the top window which one is shown depends on the value you enter for To Py Only The lower window supplies you with the opportunity to select Dr Cr memos and to add or change planned payments The top window has the following fields Ref Selection of reference of Dr Cr memos If you leave this blank all references are selected Bill To Selection of bill to addresses of Dr Cr memos If you leave this blank all bill to s are selected To Py Only Enter Yes or No to determine if you just want to look at those Dr Cr memos that have been selected for payment When you enter No all open Dr Cr memos that fall within the other selections are viewed Date Date to use for determining the discount Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 223 Bk When To Py Only is set to Yes selection of Bank of payment selection otherwise selection of Bank of Dr Cr memo PM When To Py Only is set to Yes selection of payment method of payment selection otherwise selection of payment method of Dr Cr memo The middle window is read only The lower window has the following fields Reference The reference of the open Dr Cr memo Bill To The bill to of the open Dr Cr memo Curr The currency of the Dr Cr memo Amount The amount of the Dr Cr memo Rece
161. ancial Year The financial year which must be defined in the GL calendar for which GL transactions are to be printed A journal cannot span financial years Period The range of periods within the specified financial year for which GL transactions are to be reported This range must have been defined in the GL calendar When left blank details on all periods in the relevant financial year are included in the report Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 9 Journals 315 Effective Date The range of effective dates for which GL transactions are to be reported By default this is the start date of the first period and the end date of the last period This range must lie wholly within the specified period Account Code The range of account codes to be included in the report If left blank all account codes are included Note The name and effect of this field is dependent on the type of journal you are creating If creating a Reference journal this field will allow you to select the range of GL references to be included if creating a Document journal this field will allow you to select the range of document numbers to be included Sub Account The range of sub account codes to be included in the report If left blank all sub account codes are included Cost Ctr The range of cost centers to be included in the report If left blank all account codes are included Entity The range of entities to be included in the report
162. ansactions as defined in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 This must not be the same as any tax type for any tax environment as defined in Tax Environment Maintenance 2 13 5 1 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 287 Tax Usage This field may be optionally used to store the tax code from the list of Codici Tributo for this type of service This information is published by the Italian Tax Authorities Tax Code The reason code indicating the transaction s service type Every withholding tax transaction must have a reason code assigned to it Many of the tax codes listed as Codici Tributo may have a number of different reason codes or causale Percent Recoverable The percentage of any voucher distribution line amount that is subject to withholding tax This will be 100 if the whole transaction is subject to withholding tax Tax Rate The percentage at which withholding tax is to be calculated for this transaction AP Tax Account The account cost center to be used for booking the retained withholding tax Next you must define the withholding tax type in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 to allow the system to determine the tax rates to be applied for withholding tax calculations European Accounting Control File Lwnopasn foocqumnhng oniro iks A browse is available to show the withholding tax reason codes currently available Withholding T
163. apter 13 Correction Invoices 437 Creating Correction Sales Orders A correction for a posted invoice can be created in Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 by entering a correction sales order Creating a correction sales order Daer Dodie Manemsnga Use Mert Edt Queue eiere Heip Co ce al Oder 10070 SokiTa EURODCUST BilTe EUROCUST Ship Ta ELIRCUST Dagna Invoice 10008 Ong rer 100s Conechon Heii jae FRAMICE FRAN DE on Date A j Line Pricing 7 lt Ceandiamedl pe GS fOR Pia Aegared Date Lefiasan kMianust Curses DUN Lepage Pimi Date idiir i Sie 10000 Tasable no Leeson Due Dabe Lefty Channet Fined Pue pea Pricng Date Laon Prajac Credit Tema 30 Puichase Ode Cied Titi nik 6 teh Remake Hemke no Entered By imh Original Invoice 10008 FisHelp Fieio E9CsEmd Wheat Pre Ch WIA eCut Copy Partn The fields Original Invoice Org Order and Correction Reason have been added for Correction Invoices After entering the sales order number you can then enter the invoice number of the existing invoice that is going to be corrected with this sales order The data from the original invoice is then copied into the correction sales order where the correct amounts can be entered If you leave the Original Invoice field blank you can enter a normal sales order in exactly the same way as you would using standard MFG PRO Original Invoice The invoice number of the posted invoice which is to
164. art Check The starting check number of the payment The next available number according to the numbering range of the payment method is suggested Check Date The check date to be used for the creation of new payments Effective The effective date to be used for the creation of new payments Draft PIP For display purposes only The Payment In Process account or the payment method Amount For display purposes only The amount of the payment selection in base currency File Name The file name if the payment media is a file When the selection is activated additional windows can appear determined by the bank format driver In the example below with a UK driver additional details are required for the production of the electronic file Additional output determined by the bank format driver 2 Auldmalic Chirk Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 245 An audit trail that lists the created payments is always printed Printing of audit trail report Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 246 European Accounting User Guide Payment Selections Inquiry A separate inquiry function AP Payment Selection Inquiry 28 9 4 16 is available for payment selections Processed payment selections as well as active payment selections are listed Inquiry on payment selections AY Papert Selection Imgunp Aaa DLLs dint fh EWE haa LOLS ist iri BUE Tetal HIE In the
165. arter s data before that for the second quarter if you select the second quarter for processing before the first you will receive this message and the whole calculation will be skipped The whole calculation is skipped even if only one item from the preceding period has not yet been calculated Some buckets selected in the range are already calculated The current structure rollup and FIFO LIFO processing cannot be processed because at least one of the time periods specified has already been processed Each time bucket can only be processed once so the whole calculation is skipped even if only one bucket within it has been previously calculated You should now run Data Resynchronization 30 18 1 5 and correct the fault Cycle Structure Found A cyclic product structure was found within the simulation data This is not permitted so the whole calculation will be skipped Unbalanced consumption for period and item From the start of the earliest predecessor of the simulation until the end of the period identified by this message the total consumption of the identified item was larger than the total receipts for that item This message indicates that a negative balance for the specified item has arisen at the end of this period This affects further calculations There is no conversion between unit of measure used in PO line and unit of measure used in transaction nr Conversion 1 used When the Mean Data Generation function calc
166. ated at 10 15 on a certain date is cheaper or more expensive than the production lot from 11 30 on the same date With I E S an alternative approach is taken whereby periods of time are defined and production in that period is looked at as a type of lot or batch This approach calculates mean values for periods and assigns these values to the period lots How big or small the period is depends on the usage For fiscal purposes periods of a year or a quarter are often used Different amounts of Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 364 European Accounting User Guide detail can be specified depending on the period selected Smaller periods mean more data and more processing Larger periods mean less detail Receipts HHHH 3000995 In the figure above Receipts and Consumption are shown as dots over time in the two boxes Receipts originate from for example work orders that are completed purchase order receipts or unplanned receipts Examples of consumption are sales order shipments or component issues for a work order Receipts and consumption occur normally in large volumes of inventory transactions By defining periods and collating data for each period a form of period lot is created A special procedure IES Mean Data Generation 30 18 1 4 aggregates the individual receipts and consumption to totals for each period with associated mean prices It collects information from the Inve
167. ated with this draft Total of Invoices For display purposes only The total amount of the distribution lines Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 79 Unreferenced Amount For display purposes only The total amount of the unapplied and non AR distributed lines Once you have entered all the header data for the draft you are then requested to enter the distribution lines Approved Draft creation of distribution lines Reference The reference of the open AR invoice memo or financial charge that will be paid by this draft If you leave the reference blank you are allowed to create a non AR or unapplied draft Open Amount The amount of the reference non AR or unapplied payment For an unapplied payment or when you have entered a reference this amount is deducted from the accounts receivable account Amount The amount of the draft Discount The discount amount taken If you leave the reference blank the following window then displays where you are allowed to enter an unapplied or non AR distribution line Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 80 European Accounting User Guide Unapplied Non AR distribution line Appvd Orali Maine Batch 1E Contre Fez Sii Tota tbt Aeference 400015 Bill To EUROLUST Figpoxed Eatopean Mitia Citin Date zaraajai Efteolive Date re bE EL Currency EUR Emay 1000 Bank
168. ates to report and add numbers to Print Address Specifies if the address of the related customer or supplier should be printed Enter Yes or No Print 2 GL Desc Specifies if the second GL description should be printed if one has been created This second description is determined by the menu option of the program that created the transaction You can enter these descriptions in Menu System Maintenance 36 4 4 Enter Yes to print this description or No not to do so Form Code The layout of the report is defined and printed in a separate sub program eugtrp99 p where 99 is the parameter from the selection screen E g 01 for GL numbering report eugtrp01 p 02 for Libro Giornale eugtrp02 Final print no test Specifies if this is the final print Enter Yes if this is the case The protocol numbers will be assigned permanently if it is the final print If you set this flag to No you only receive a report the protocol numbers are not assigned permanently Reprint Enter Yes or No If set to Yes previously printed transactions will be re printed See below for details Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 463 If the Reprint flag is set to Yes to print previously printed transactions you can specify the range of protocol numbers and print dates to be covered by the report Only previously printed transactions within this range then will be re printed If there is any discrepancy b
169. ation Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 3 General Ledger 59 GL Account Sheet Report The GL Account Sheet Report known in Germany as Kontenblatt is a General Ledger report which provides information allowing the accuracy of entries in a given GL account over a specified time period to be verified This report shows the starting balance of the selected account as it was on the selected start date for the report It also shows all transactions in detail using the contra accounts for each transaction which occurred from that date up until the report s selected end date Totals per GL period per account are also given To run this report use the GL Account Sheet Report 25 15 10 function GL Account Sheet Report 25 15 10 SSL ECOURI 9 eS Pals Ei temele Entity iann To iona focenaanl Ta Sub Aooount To Cost Chr Te Effective oayfo1sa To ay Gl Cuneney EUR Rieand jo Meares Whaola Linii ren est past Batoh ID FicHelp Fi Ge ESC End Cli X Cut CiHC Copy Chi Paste Make entries into the relevant fields Entity The range of entities to be covered in the report If left blank all entities are included in the report Description The company name as it is to appear at the top of the GL Account Sheet report Account The range of account codes to be covered in the report If left blank all account codes will be included in the report Sub Account The range of sub account codes t
170. ation number Italian specific feature Already Effectuated Enter Yes or No to show if the declaration has already been effectuated Italian specific feature Change of Activity Enter Yes or No to determine if this is a change of activity Italian specific feature Filename The filename if the output is being sent to file You can change the filename Last Edition Enter Yes or No to determine if this is the last edition of the report In the final edition version of the report all transactions should be marked as reported When transactions are marked as reported they will not be shown again on the next Intrastat report Audit Enter Yes or No to specify if you additional audit information such as Intrastat numbers and references to be printed on the report You should not use this option in combination with Last Edition set to Yes Update Currency Enter Yes or No to determine if you want to change the exchange rates Transmission Type Enter Test or Live Normally this will be set to Live The Test option is used in order to produce a test file for submission to UK Customs amp Excise to validate that your Intrastat file has been produced in the correct format UK specific feature Media The type of media used to submit this UK Intrastat data file Possible values are Disk E mail or Tape UK specific feature If you set Make Extrastat File or Extrastat Report to Yes the Intrastat questions are not asked However when you ha
171. ax Rsn Code Browse 2 13 15 4 12 displays this information but you can also choose to display it whenever you are prompted to enter a reason code for a transaction Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 288 European Accounting User Guide Reason Code Browse Withhelubn 2 Ae Cade w e jG e ajajaj Saja ta a ce el 10 00 23 0414 is 00 gt 100 005 1409 Supplier Maintenance A new flag Withholding Tax has been added to Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 It must be set to Yes when a supplier is eligible for withholding tax Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 289 When this flag is set a Withholding Tax Data window displays Here you can enter the fiscal address code of the relevant supplier plus specify if the supplier is an individual rather than a company In this instance you can enter additional personal details that might be relevant such as the person s place of birth Withholding Tax Data fie M oevtenarce Fsc addr code The address code of the fiscal address Phys Pers Enter Yes or No Specifies if the supplier is an individual person Yes rather than a company No The subsequent fields on this screen are only available if this flag is set to Yes First Name The person s first name Birthd The person s date of birth Sex The person s sex M ale or F emale Bth addr 1 The first add
172. ax percentage Tot Pag The total amount paid to the supplier against this particular reason code Spain For Spain changes have been made by European Accounting in the following areas e Bank account validation ES e AR AP Transactions exceeding 500 000 pesetas e AP VAT list e Spanish RDE by Invoice Report e Spanish payment drivers Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 472 European Accounting User Guide Bank Account Validation ES In Spain bank accounts have to comply with the following format 1234 1234 12 1234567890 In this example account two check digits are integrated The bank account validation ES verifies that the bank account is correct according to the check digits AR AP Transactions exceeding 500 000 pesetas In Spain you are obliged to report all AR AP transactions exceeding the amount of 500 000 pesetas The reports AR Transactions gt given amount 27 22 13 and AP Transactions gt given amount 28 20 10 are available for this AR Transactions gt given amount 27 22 13 ont gt bith Amoi Reference A range of transaction references to report Batch A range of AR batch numbers to report Bill To A range of Bill to addresses of customers to report Entity A Range of GL entities to report Date A range of transaction dates to report Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 473 Effective A range of effective dates of
173. aybook structure for journals although you can have any structure you wish A blank document type indicates that all document types not specified in other daybooks will be included The System daybook includes all transactions not defined by the other default daybooks Daybook Trans Type Doc Type Description DB 5 E AR Bankers Draft DB 6 aR O Eoo AR Financial Charge DB 7 AR Invoice DB 8 AR DR CR Memo DB 10 ARs AR Blank Type DB 11 Sales Invoices DB 12 Iso fs Sales Transactions other DB 13 a i Inventory Transactions DB 14 mT Journal Transactions DB 15 IRV fs Reversing Transactions DB 16 wo fs Works Order Transactions DB 17 yA Year End Adjustments SYSTEM a System daybook default Use Default Daybook Maintenance 25 8 4 to set these default daybook codes up Creating Journals You define journals using European Accounting s Journal Report Maintenance 25 10 1 function This function offers you the flexibility to create any type of journal you wish and to modify existing journals Your journals are stored by a user defined report code which you are prompted to enter when you initially define a journal Entering an existing report code in the Report Code field displays the relevant parameters and descriptions previously defined for that report which you can then amend as you wish You can also base a new report on an existing one tailoring the parameters as necessary for your new report before saving it with a new repor
174. been changed to accommodate European bank accounts Currently bank account validations 11 12 ES Spain DE Germany FR French and IT Italian are supported Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 18 European Accounting User Guide Added Bank Validations Suppliers European Accounting adds the following new fields to Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 e Payment Method e VAT Registers Operation Types and Site Codes e Withholding Tax e Bank Account validations Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 2 Setup and Basic Data 19 Using Supplier Maintenance you can define the default payment method for vouchers received from a supplier Payment Method in Supplier Maintenance Paym M The default payment method for vouchers received from this supplier This payment method has to be defined for the appropriate bank When VAT Registers have been enabled by setting the VAT Register flag in the European Accounting Control File a new pop up displays in the first window of Supplier Maintenance Here you can specify a VAT register for the supplier and set its associated operation type and site Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 20 European Accounting User Guide VAT Registers in Supplier Maintenance VAT Register The default VAT Register to be used with this supplier Operation Code The default operation code associated with this supplier This is used with VAT
175. ble to allocate or there are no more vouchers left within the range of the payment selection then all that supplier s open credit vouchers are processed in order of due date This is only the case once you have decided to reconcile the credit notes European Accounting adds the vouchers to the planned payment decreasing the amount to pay up to the total of the debit vouchers previously selected to pay Planned payment can not become negative unless you specify this as a selection criterion so you cannot collect money from a supplier with a check Another complexity is that you may get discounts for paying early This means that a registered voucher for USD 100 could be paid with a payment of USD 97 a USD 3 discount What counts as the maximum amount available to allocate is the net amount you have to pay in this case USD 97 When making automatic payment selections you can have two basic options e Allow Payment gt Balance Should the system disallow payments beyond the balance of the customer or the supplier e Reconcile Credit Memos Should credit memos or credit vouchers automatically be reconciled Together with the other selection criteria the selection logic can become quite complex Some examples are shown in the next section Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 200 Automatic Payments Examples Test Case 1 Create a new customer cust1 with the following entries 1 Date 01 12 01 with amount 1
176. bles For each simulation period and each item this allows you to obtain e Consumption quantity receipts quantities with respect for their sources purchase production transfer and issue prices assigned to each source e Mean product structures used within the period for manufactured items e Mean routings used within the period for manufactured items e Run Cost and Qty s Maintenance 30 18 1 13 if necessary This step is not mandatory This function allows you to e Manually correct any calculated values to allow for situations that might have resulted in the generation of incorrect mean data e Load existing inventory data into I E S if this is a new implementation of MFG PRO This special step is only performed once at data take on time A great deal of thought must be given to how historical data is to be initially loaded into MFG PRO before this special step is performed e Run IES Routing Cost Roll Up across the simulation This determines the total labor burden overhead and subcontract costs e Run IES Structure Cost Roll Up 30 18 3 6 This function is the one that actually performs the LIFO or FIFO calculation It e Rolls up structures to obtain manufacturing cost of each manufactured item e Finally calculates the mean receipts cost e Calculates the mean price of consumption using either a FIFO or LIFO algorithm depending on the calculation method set for the IES Simulation Set Imagine a manufactured item t
177. buckets e Time dependencies are considered e LIFO FIFO algorithms are implemented e Final calculations of mean receipts cost and mean consumption cost are performed When you have concluded these actions your evaluation process is complete You have calculated mean costs for the periods of the simulation set and have stored these costs together with the results of the FIFO or LIFO calculation in the IES simulation set Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 400 European Accounting User Guide Data Resynchronization IES Data Resynchronization 30 18 1 5 is a special function that allows you to go back a step in the LE S process if you have made any mistakes in entering data It removes the need to rerun the entire process from scratch should you discover you have made mistakes IES Data Resynchronization 30 18 1 5 IES Dala Retpechioen ole Uae Meu Edt Juas pire Hein te Smmulalion FIFO S000 FIFO Vill ior Calc Method FIFO Simulation Year ADO Paint Audit Trait irc Output Batch ID Fistelp Fe ho ESCeEnd Heati Pe CrbXiCAveCut Copy Paste You must enter a valid simulation code The calculation method and simulation year are then shown You can choose if you want an audit trail to be created or not after the data has been restored to its previous state After running IES Data Resynchronization 30 18 1 5 you can update the incorrect data and rerun the previous step in the I E S process
178. c countries e Added logic for unapplied and non AR drafts e Reconciliation functions for drafts and payments e Improved Cash Book Maintenance supporting the reconciliation of Accounts Receivable payments and drafts and of the deletion of cash book lines e Ability to enter petty cash transactions in the Cash Book together with the associated tax entries e Improved flow of drafts allowing the entering and maintaining of approved drafts the submission of drafts to the bank and the reconciliation of drafts Separate functions to close drafts are also supported e Support for the submission and discounting of proposed drafts e Addition of Correction Invoices e Support for VAT registers e Suspended VAT logic which allows the tax date on sales invoices to be set according to the payment date of those invoices e Addition of withholding tax functionality that allows a customer to withhold tax when paying suppliers and then to declare the tax part of the supplier payment to the authorities on that supplier s behalf e Additional support for Project Realization Management PRM an extension of MFG PRO s standard Service Support Module controlling the handling of project activities e Support for the extended account structure throughout the product allowing the entry of a separate account code and sub account as well as a cost center e Documento di Trasporto shipper documents to accompany goods movements e Option to bo
179. ccount e Document The fields that can be included within a journal vary slightly depending on the journal type However in order to be able to use any of the journals created using Journal Report Writer you cannot make any summarized journals so this feature should be switched off wherever it can be set on for example in the Accounts Payable Control File 28 24 Switching off Summarized Journals Arenum Papahia Lona Fiks Mi Use Hema Edt Queue pira Hep Ms Ta Se Ge Se Stceunts Pagable Coatrol File Mest Batch 100 Heat Vesscher 1001 Hest Jounal 000 taa w eo chin Ta Default Hank AA Dalat Payman Hatka MT internonpasy Acot F101 Enter Vouchers Coefirmed pes EAS Packing Slip Ema no Felosee Recor Wir Confirmed ao ERS Update GL Avg Coat nu Lise Papmesd in Process Acct ra ERS Youcher Date Option e Use Expereed Mem Var Acti per Extemel Voha Fatemnces Alisa pre Use Assigned To Fieid pes ilen Drait Management ra FisHelp F 5Go ESC Em CilX 0A Cul C Copp Cul Parte A Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 312 European Accounting User Guide Setting up Data Information from existing daybooks is included within your journal reports so the relevant daybooks must have already been set up using Daybook Maintenance 25 8 1 before you can create these journal reports Transactions are grouped within daybooks using the transaction and document typ
180. ce 26 1 All such variances are combined with other unrealized gains and losses for the currency concerned European Accounting adds Purchase Gain Loss Maintenance 26 10 which allows you to define a purchase gain and a purchase loss account sub account and cost center by either a combination of product line and currency or simply by currency If by currency you can specify a different account sub account from those defined in Currency Maintenance without needing to define separate accounts sub acounts by Product Line Purchase Gain Loss Maintenance 26 10 Purchase LaenfLoes Blige recs Les Mero Ede Queus Qptenr Help oe Pet ad ee Pa Curence BEF Belgian Franc Piaduct Line TODE Pence Pinducts Purchase Gen Account EEG OoOO Purchase Leet Accoun 3607 7 ee FisHeip Fi Go ESt Eed Fisielte GuiliCACut Copp Paste Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 26 European Accounting User Guide Here you can enter a currency code which must be a valid currency code as defined in Currency Maintenance 26 1 You can enter a product line code or you can leave this field blank if you wish but you must enter a purchase gain account sub account and cost center combination and also a purchase loss account sub account and cost center combination These entries are validated in exactly the same way as accounts are validated in all MFG PRO s standard maintenance functions that is the account must be an e
181. ce account specified in the GL Control File 25 24 This transaction can only be created if the Create Opening Trans At Year End flag is set in the GL Control File 25 24 e A GL transaction with an effective date of the first day of the next year which re instates the balances on all balance sheet accounts debiting or crediting the Year End Opening Balance account specified in the GL Control File 25 24 This transaction can only be created if the Create Opening Trans At Year End flag is set in the GL Control File 25 24 The GL references for these three year end transactions all begin with the letters YR so making them easily identifiable Unlike other GL transactions these three transactions are all posted immediately GL Transaction Matching Functionality has been added to European Accounting to allow you to match debit transactions in the General Ledger to their corresponding credit transactions or vice versa This is done on an account by account basis You can choose if you want transactions to be matched manually or automatically Known in France as Lettrage in Belgium and the Netherlands as Afletteren and in Germany as Auszifferen this functionality introduces the concept of open item accounting into the General Ledger Only identical debit and credit amounts can be matched using this functionality so allowing you to verify the open balance of an account Setting up Transaction Matching In order to be able to use the GL Trans
182. ceivable Payments The payment logic used in Accounts Receivable has been changed by European Accounting e The payment logic is located in a new menu Manual Payment Menu 27 6 5 e Payment Method has been added e Auto apply function has been improved e New register for unapplied payments has been added e Use of payment in process account for payments submitted to the bank e New register for submitted payments has been added e New option to reconcile payments at the bank has been added e Payment of invoices with Suspended VAT is allowed e Reversal of AR checks is now allowed e Additional check status report has been added In European Accounting all AR payment functions are now located on one menu Manual Payment Menu 27 6 5 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 120 European Accounting User Guide Manual Payment Menu Manual Payments and Payment Methods In European Accounting the reference of the accounts receivable payment is determined by the payment method Payment methods are also used for automatic payments Manual payments can be entered using AR Payment Manual Checks 27 6 5 1 which replaces the standard MFG PRO function 27 6 4 When a manual payment is entered the payment method is also required Because the reference can only be determined after the payment method is entered a temporary reference must first be assigned Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD
183. ch GL transaction against the specified account These new reports are described in the following sections In addition European Accounting has also enhanced some existing MFG PRO reports These are listed below with a brief description of their European Accounting enhancements Account Balance Detail Ability to use standard GL transaction description or show a combination of address code batch and document number Also option to show the secondary GL description 25 17 13 Custom Report Print Technical change for performance improvement Italian Statement of Account Use Italian Statement of Account Report 25 15 11 to create a General Ledger report known as the Italian Statement of Account report This is a primary document used by auditors and representatives of the Italian fiscal authorities to reconcile entries on GL accounts to the relevant sub ledgers Although introduced in European Accounting to satisfy Italian requirements this report is available for general use Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 3 General Ledger 57 Italian Statement of Account 25 15 11 Make entries into the relevant fields Entity The range of entities to be covered in the report If left blank all entities are included in the report Account The range of account codes to be covered in the report If left blank all account codes will be included in the report Effective The range of effective dates to be co
184. ch number and batch total In addition the range of drafts to be selected has to be set by specifying the criteria bank payment method due date and currency Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 94 European Accounting User Guide Entering selection criteria for submission 27 6 6 10 Halip Dialt B Bank The bank of the submission PM The payment method of the submission Effective Date The effective date for the submission Amount to Select The total amounts of the drafts currently being processed Due Date From gt To Due date range is used to select only those drafts whose due date lie within the specified range Total Selected Total amount of all selected drafts when Submit flag is set to Yes Currency Currency in which the amount of each draft has to be displayed Submit Enter Yes or No to determine if the draft should be submitted for processing The Submit flag of every selected draft receives the value of this field initially A list of all drafts meeting the criteria will be displayed Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 95 List of selected drafts 27 6 6 10 Haliiple Dia Bank Subert iian of oes e e r Submit Enter Yes or No to determine if the draft is to be submitted for processing A draft can be submitted only when this flag is set to Yes Total Selected Sum of the amount of all drafts when Submit flag is set to Yes When
185. chers or AR memos that are marked to be paid with another bank or payment method This way we can choose to use another payment method than the suggested payment method We can print a report of the planned payments and have that report approved Finally we can execute the payment selection and create actual payments or drafts With the payment selection logic you can create AR payments AR approved drafts AR proposed drafts and AP checks A payment selection can be made for a payment method of a bank This can be done automatically based on the characteristics of the memos or vouchers like the due date customer or supplier reference etc or can be done manually by adding AR memos or vouchers to the selection The payment selection is stored in separate tables that have the structure shown in the following figure Structure of Payment Selections Payment Selection Bank and payment method AR or AP selection Total amount of selection v Planned payments Customer Supplier Amount to pay Bank account Currency Due Date v Open AR memos Vouchers that are selected for payment Reference Amount to pay and to discount The payments or drafts made are effectuated at once You can choose to use a Payment in Process GL account Each payment method connected to a bank can have a separate Payment in Process account When the payment selection is executed media are created also Media can be a pre printed form or an electronic data file
186. counted together in one operation Draft Closing Using either of the Draft Submission function Single Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 9 and Multiple Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 10 or Draft Reconciliation 27 6 6 17 you can choose if you want to close a draft automatically or not If the draft has not yet been closed Draft Closing 27 6 6 22 gives you the opportunity to do so for one or more drafts simultaneously Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 108 European Accounting User Guide Draft closing entering selection criteria 27 6 6 22 Due Date From gt To Due date range is used to select only those drafts with a due date within this interval Close Date The close date of all drafts being closed in this run will be set to this date Close Enter Yes or No The Closed status of every selected draft initially receives the value of this field When the end of the list is reached a draft can be selected at the bottom of the screen The details of the selected draft will be displayed For each draft you wish to close set its associated Closed field to Leave this field blank for those drafts you do not wish to close When the selection of drafts for closing is completed a report listing those drafts being closed in this run can be printed Report of drafts being closed 27 6 6 22 eudmclos p c7la 27 6 6 22 Draft Closing Date 26 03 01 Page 1 European Accounting Demo Time 10 51 27 Reference Bill
187. cted Invoice Range of Invoice numbers to report of invoices that have been corrected Correction Invoice Number Range of invoice numbers of correction invoices to report Original Invoice Range of invoice numbers of initial invoice numbers to report The Original Invoice is the initial invoice the very first one That can never be a correction invoice The Correction Invoice is the invoice that corrects a Corrected Invoice The generated archive file can be re loaded into the system using standard MFG PRO archive load functionality Customization Custom dog Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues Many of the features added by European Accounting were added as a result of requirements of a particular country While many of these have been extended to make them of more general use and are documented elsewhere in the manual some of the features remain country specific These country specific features are described in this chapter The following topics are covered in this chapter Italy Spain Belgium France Netherlands United Kingdom Germany Poland Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 446 European Accounting User Guide Italy Italian financial legislation is the most complex amongst the countries supported by European Accounting and can be counted among the most complex legislation found anywhere in the world To be able to support customer
188. d with this driver In the screen showing the available payment methods you can select the method you require using the arrow keys Payment method can be added by entering a new Payment method code and module Pa The code of the method of payment This code is validated in generalized codes field name eubk_py Mo Enter AR Accounts Receivable or AP Accounts Payable The module for this method of payment Aut Enter Yes or No to specify if this payment method can be used for automatic payments using 27 6 4 6 or 28 9 4 6 Man Enter Yes or No to specify if this payment method can be used for manual payments using 27 6 5 1 27 6 6 1 27 6 6 8 28 9 10 and 31 13 Dr Enter Yes or No to specify if this payment method can be used for drafts This flag must be set to Yes if you want to use this payment method for drafts in 27 6 6 1 27 6 6 8 27 6 6 9 27 6 6 10 27 6 6 11 28 9 10 and 31 13 Due Enter 1 2 or 3 to determine how payments are to be grouped 1 Not by due date only one total payment is created 2 Sorted By Due date 3 Make individual payments for each separate invoice newly added in this release From The first check or AR reference number to be used when creating AP checks or AR payments To The last check or AR reference number to be used when creating AP checks or AR payments Next The actual AR reference or AP check number This number is automatically incremented by the system When a new payment method is
189. dditional Skip line after account code yes Report selection list should have Begin balance account code and account description This is a two line report GL Book by Account G02 previously 25 9 8 Report Content List Account Code Account Description Cost Center GL Reference Document Number Bank Code Address Effective Date Begin Balance Cum Balance Daybook Code List Sort Order Database Field Sub Total By Account code Additional Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 9 Journals 329 Total Journal Summary T01 previously 25 9 13 Report Content List Account Code Account Description Begin Balance Period Journal Cum Balance Daybook Code List Additional Summary yes Display currency value no Report selection list should have Journal Begin balance Period Printing Journals All journals can be printed using Journal Report Print 25 10 3 This generates and prints a report using the criteria entered in Journal Report Maintenance 25 10 1 Use the Up Down arrow keys or the Browser to select the Report Code of the journal you want to print Once you select a report its details as defined in Journal Report Maintenance are displayed in the Journal Report Print window You can make any last minute changes you may require to those fields before actually printing the report Note Any changes you make here are only effective for this particular print they are not stored
190. destination address must be the same as the work order site Inventory Movement Code ISS WO Repetitive Labor Transaction 18 14 Transaction A backflush where the site issuing the component is not the same as the order site Shipping Group Source address must be the same as the site code for the issuing site and the destination address must be the same as the order site Inventory Movement Code ISS WO Backflush Transaction 18 22 13 Transaction A backflush where the site issuing the component is not the same as the order site Shipping Group Source address must be the same as the site code for the issuing site and the destination address must be the same as the order site Inventory Movement Code ISS WO Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 12 Shipping Documents 419 Rework Transaction 18 22 17 Transaction A backflush issue where the site issuing the component is not the same as the order site Shipping Group Source address must be the same as the site code for the issuing site and the destination address must be the same as the order site Inventory Movement Code ISS WO Repetitive Picklist Transfers 18 22 3 6 and 18 8 6 Transaction A picklist transfer Shipping Group Source address can either be the same as the site code for the issuing site or it can be the address of the issuing location Destination address can either be the same as the
191. determined by the order in which the field was originally selected Thus for example if a report is to be sorted by entity then entity will be the first sort field while if the report is also to be sorted by daybook code then daybook code will be the second sort field Total Journal Summary The Total Journal Summary Report is a special report that is slightly different from the other reports you can create using Journal Report Maintenance It lists the starting balance of an account and summarizes all the entries by journal type per period to calculate the end balance Unlike the majority of other journal reports individual entries in this report can be two lines long if both the description and the account code fields are selected and the Skip Line After field all in Journal Report Maintenance 25 10 1 is set to Yes If these criteria are met the account code and the description are printed on one line all the remaining data for each particular entry on the next To create a Total Journal Summary select the following account codes within the Report Contents frame of Journal Report Maintenance 25 10 1 e Account type e Beginning Balance e Journal e Period e Cum Balance To create a detailed version of this report you must also set the Summary Detail flag in Journal Report Maintenance to Detail This version of the report shows the opening balances and debit and credit totals per financial period for each account for the entir
192. dress can be updated This Bill To address needs to be entered specifically as it determines the default bank to be assigned to this draft Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 77 Approved Draft update of Bill To vid Dial nli Bill to The Bill To address code for which the draft is to be created When you have entered the Bill To address you can then update the other fields with the necessary draft data Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 78 European Accounting User Guide Approved Draft update of other draft data tall Muanlernie Date The date of the draft Due Date The due date of the draft You have to make an entry into this field Expect Pay Date The expected payment date of the draft Effective Date The effective date for the GL transaction related to this draft Currency The currency of the draft Amount The amount of the draft An entry of zero is not allowed Bank The bank of the draft This bank defaults to the bank of the bill to address Pmt Meth The payment method of the draft This payment method defaults to the Manual Draft Method of Payment specified in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 Entity The entity for the GL booking of this draft Account The account number defaults to the Drafts Rec Acct specified in Bank Maintenance 26 13 Remark Any comments that are related to this draft Daybook The daybook associ
193. e Dzsi Mer Fed Queus pior Hal Es a Ce a Reference THI 4 Bii To EWATCHST Date zajaajai Dua Dst Expect Pap Date a Cusine Banik E e a a M EN Fi Heip F2 G0 ESC End Hest Prey hA CA Cut CopP ae Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 74 European Accounting User Guide Since the reference is determined by the payment method and the payment method can only be entered after a reference is assigned European Accounting first assigns a temporary reference if you leave the reference blank When the payment method is set then the final reference is assigned When the header is entered the distribution lines window is shown In this window you can now leave the reference blank This is used to create unapplied or non AR distribution lines Proposed Draft unapplied or non AR distribution line Progneed Dish Hanenin a When the reference is left blank a new window is shown T Enter U or N to specify if the line is of type Unapplied or Non AR Unapplied lines can be applied using Unapplied Draft Application 27 6 6 14 Unapp Ref The unapplied reference This is used to differentiate between different unapplied amounts You should always enter an unapplied reference Account The account number to store the unapplied or non AR amount Sub Acct The sub account number to store the unapplied or non AR amount CC The cost center to store the unapplied or non AR amount Entity The enti
194. e Accounts Payable Features European Accounting enhances MFG PRO s standard Accounts Payable module in the following areas e Creation of Intrastat data in vouchers without a PO attached e Waiting Expenses Vouchers e Check number has 8 positions instead of the standard 6 positions e Assignment of voucher references based on the VAT register e Support for withholding tax Refer to Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes e Additional operations type description when VAT registers are enabled e Automatic payment functionality for Europe Refer to Chapter 7 Bank and Payment Methods e Unapplied Accounts Payable payments e Report for gaps in voucher numbering e Improved supplier activity inquiry e Additional reports e Ability to define PO Receipts Accounts and Expensed Item Receipts Accounts by Supplier Unless indicated otherwise in the above list these enhancements are described in the remainder of this chapter Intrastat in Vouchers European Accounting allows you to create Intrastat data for vouchers that have no purchase order attached In standard MFG PRO you have to create a manual Intrastat record but in many instances you will want to create Intrastat data for a voucher for which you have not issued a purchase order Voucher Maintenance 28 1 1 has been enhanced to allow you to do this Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 5 Accounts Payable 135 Voucher Maintenance 28
195. e Approved Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 8 Approved Dial Harbinie Babie 1A Cetol a aaa Releremce 400012 bilo EVADCUST Panposed Enparan Accounting Custom Dake FEPORF OL Elbette Dain Pest fi Comenoe EUR Entity 1000 Dank AA Prot Meth MD Account 1300 Tata af lave 00 in 34910 Due Date si urmi Expect Pay Date Customer Bank Account A 12056783 eee Fl Help F2 Go ESC Eeed Met Pree CHAA Cat Copp Paste Cust Bank Acct The customer s bank to which the draft is to be submitted By default this is the default bank account set for that customer in AR Payment Selection Automatic You can enter any other valid bank here provided its effective date range covers the draft s due date Alternatively you can set this field to blank if the Bank Account Needed flag for the draft s particular payment method has been set to No Note The actual bank account itself is shown in the unlabeled field immediately following the Cust Bank Acct field Sent By Identifies the draft type An entry of Supplier indicates that the draft is a supplier initiated one while an entry of Customer indicates it is customer initiated The default setting is Supplier for Proposed Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 1 and Customer for Approved Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 8 Draft Approval Even when the submission of proposed drafts has been enabled and is permitted by a certain customer it is still possible that a customer might appro
196. e N Record the payment of the draft and closes the draft 27 6 6 17 Draft Bank Reconciliation 31 13 Cash Book Maintenance Reconcile D Reconcile the received money for draft question if you want to close the draft 27 6 6 22 Draft Closing Close the draft 27 6 6 23 Draft Re Open Re open a closed draft Here European Accounting enhances MFG PRO s draft handling facilities by allowing you to track both the submission of a draft to the bank and the reconciliation of that draft It also allows you to enter approved drafts directly and to determine when to close drafts Previously closed drafts can be re opened if necessary using the European Accounting function Draft Re Open 27 6 6 23 In addition it is also possible to submit and discount drafts separately rather than combining their submission and discounting into one operation as is the case in standard MFG PRO and remains the default behavior in European Accounting This is controlled by the Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 71 setting of the Separate Submission Discounting flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 The following figure shows European Accounting s enhanced flow of drafts that is the flow when the submission of proposed drafts has been enabled Enhanced Flow of Drafts in European Accounting 27 6 6 1 Proposed Draft Maintenance Enter a proposed draft
197. e veo 1o07 1o08 OUT kes o o o o mmn ooo e e a E E Not Allocated Receipts 350 Mean Receipt Price 22 66 EENT 25 44 Mean Price for consumption 20 20 21 06 50 22 66 350 25 44 400 25 09 During the last year 550 items are received and 400 are consumed This consumption is taken first from the remaining 50 items from 1998 and then from the items manufactured in 1999 The mean receipt price is again different due to the mean consumption cost of the component item for the period The only stock remaining at the end of 1999 is 200 pieces of item B manufactured in 1999 The ending inventory value is therefore 200 25 44 5 088 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 378 European Accounting User Guide LIFO Example The following example takes the same manufactured item with the same receipts and consumed quantities as in the previous example but evaluates it using LIFO methodology Manufactured tem 8 a Mean Price for consumption Fconumpion Po Not Allocated Receipts 50 100 Mean Receipt Price 20 2 OM 22 40 ee ae Mean Price for consumption 22 40 Total Inventory Value 1 000 2 240 EEE o You will notice that the mean receipt price for item B in 1997 is now higher because the mean consumption price of component item A was higher Manufactured Item B 1996 1997 1998 es o o o consumo J of o oo Not Allocated Receipts 50 100 150 100 150 0 0 Mean Receipt Pric
198. e 22 40 2 S20 ooo Mean Price for consumption 20 22 40 150 26 100 20 250 23 60 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 379 Manufactured ItemB 1996 1997 1998 1999 Receipts 300 150 550 Consumption 200 250 400 Net Effect 100 150 Not Allocated Receipts 550 400 150 Mean Receipt Price 20 22 40 26 2gs 23 62 Mean Price for consumption 23 60 23 62 Total Inventory Value 1 000 oo of o 3 543 Using the LIFO calculation the same inventory as shown in the example in the previous section is now valued at 4 543 Setting up the Simulation To be able to make an inventory evaluation or simulation you must first create the appropriate data This can be done using functions found on the Simulation Setup Menu 30 18 1 Simulation Setup Menu 30 18 1 Eiiaptan Aooouniey Dema g ddh U Meng Edt Juas pirs Hap Simulation Setup Menu ES Simulation Sel Martenance IES Aus Fenced Geraisin IES Begny Balance Copy JES Hear Daa Geres JES Daa erpmohonizsin IES Simulation BOM Marberarice IES Sirmulaton BOH rap JES Simulation BM Alena IES Simulation Fisazs ES Simula Figuli H ort ES Simulation Foamglas ES Siimustis Rowing Report 13 E3 Cod ard Oip s Hsintensnce 14S Cod aed O ardat ling th 30 18 Inventory EvaluationfSimulation is Ee ccs ma O a 7 1E ES Eeckaded Port Hanensia 13 E5 Eua Pai Rapi 27 Earkijii Loca
199. e actual balance of the customer or supplier becoming negative To prevent this the selection process calculates the new balance and checks whether this balance becomes negative In the case of credit notes you can choose to reconcile them with debit notes If you choose not be reconcile them then an equal amount of debit notes is left open up to a balance of Zero Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 197 Special options allow you to deactivate these validations Refer to Payment Selection Logic below for full details on how European Accounting ensures you do not pay or demand more than the balance due Payment Selection Logic European Accounting allows you to make automatic selections for Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable payments This logic is more complicated than it might first appear and the following sections give full details on the payment selection logic used by European Accounting Goals The European Accounting selection logic is based on the following assumptions e You do not want to pay or have paid more than the current balance e You see amounts that are contested AR or on hold AP not as open amounts so the balance should be corrected for this e You have the option to reconcile have credits matched with debits e Whenever you reconcile you want to reconcile all credits as soon as possible meaning that even when you select a payment range of
200. e an additional popup window is shown when the payment driver is executed In this pop up you can review or change the additional Swift data Select gt Balance Enter Yes or No Specifies if the payment selection functions allow that payments are made beyond the balance of the customer or supplier Entering Yes could cause the customer or supplier balance to be negative when credit notes are available and all debit notes get paid Reconcile Credit Notes Enter Yes or No Specifies if the payment selection functions automatically reconcile existing credit notes If Yes is entered credit notes are reconciled regardless of their effective date If No is entered credit notes are not reconciled If the option Select gt Balance is set to Yes then the balance of the customer supplier is paid up to the balance of the credit notes Pip Account The GL account number sub account number and cost center used to create the GL posting of the payment or check When payment methods are defined a minimum of at least the following payment methods should be entered for each bank e Manual AR Payments Module AR Auto no Manual yes Draft no Due no Prg File no e Manual AP Payments checks Module AP Auto no Manual yes Draft no Due no Prg File no e Manual AR Payments drafts Module AR Auto no Manual yes Draft yes Due no Prg File no The account numbers sub account numbers and cost centers
201. e date range covered by the report This information is shown separately for each account The final end balance is calculated from this data and is shown at the end of the report An example of the detailed version of a Total Journal Summary is shown below Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 322 European Accounting User Guide Total Journal Summary Detailed format euglrp2l p c7la 25 10 3 TOTAL JOURNAL SUMMARY Date 13 03 01 Page 1 qad inc Time 12 47 45 A C Description Begin Amount Per Journal Debit Amount Amount Balance 2100 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE 568 852 05cr 10 Financial Purchase Total Financial Purchase Total Financial oD Purchase Sub total by Account 2100 2 i y A 1 129 533 16 The column Per represents the period The column Journal indicates the grouping to which a particular journal belongs Available Journal groupings are You can translate the labels for these six groupings into any language of your choice Use Language Detail Maintenance 36 4 3 to enter the actual text for each label in the language of your choice For example if you want to setup the Journal labels in the German language specify a language code of German and then enter the actual Journal labels in German Then when you print the journals using Journal Report Print 25 10 3 the journal labels will appear in the report in the selected language in this case in German You can also output a summarized version of this
202. e following AP and AR payment programs to ensure the correct discount account for the relevant tax code can be used when posting discounts e AR Payment Autom Checks Drafts 27 6 4 6 e AR Payment Manual Checks 27 6 5 1 e Unapplied Payment Application 27 6 5 14 e Check Void Maintenance 27 6 5 16 e Approved Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 8 e Unapplied Draft Application 27 6 6 14 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 285 e Payment Automatic Checks 28 9 4 6 e Payment Manual Checks 28 9 10 e Unapplied Payment Application 28 9 20 e Check Void Maintenance 28 9 15 When making payments using any of these functions the tax rate for each voucher or DR CR memo is checked the appropriate discount is taken and that discount is automatically posted to the correct AP or AR discount account Where multiple tax rates are used on a voucher or DR CR memo then the discount is split among the discount accounts defined for the tax rates concerned These GL accounts will override the value of the Discount Account that is normally specified in the header section of these functions The normal Discount Account will still be displayed and available for update but may well be overridden because until the user has specified which vouchers or DR CR memos will be paid it is not possible to identify which tax rates and therefore the associated discount accounts should be used If no
203. e mean receipt price of item B will be the mean consumption price for item A for the period multiplied by 2 This gives a mean receipt price of 20 The inventory value as at the end of 1996 is then 1 000 Receipts 150 30 i Consumption 200 it he Net Effect wf Not Allocated Receipts 300 150 150 In 1997 300 items are made and 200 consumed Since the FIFO calculation is used the 200 consumed pieces are taken first from the lot from 1996 and then out of the lot from 1997 Again the mean receipt price is calculated using the mean consumption price of item A multiplied by the component quantity The total inventory value of the 150 items left at the end of 1997 is 150 20 3 000 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation Manufactured Item B 19969 1997 1998 FReccips E To CS ewes Semme of oa Not Allocated Receipts 150 100 Mean Receipt Price 2 E33 22 66 Mean Price for consumption 20 20 150 20 100 22 66 250 21 06 377 In 1998 a total of 150 items is received and 250 items are consumed This consumption is taken from the 150 items left in lot 1997 and from the 150 items produced in 1998 The mean receipt price is now different because the mean consumption price of the component item A was higher in 1998 Total inventory value of the stock left at the end of 1998 equals 50 22 66 1 133 Manufactured nom
204. e of the relevant GL entries The transaction type indicates the source of the transaction while the document type indicates the type of the source document from which the GL transaction originated Available transaction types are e AP Accounts Payable vouchers payments check void e AR Accounts Receivable memos finance charges payments e CS GL Transaction Consolidation e FA Fixed Assets e FX GL Foreign Exchange Revaluation e IC Inventory Control issues shipments receipts returns count updates e JL GL Standard Transaction Maintenance e PR Payroll paychecks voids e RA GL Retroactive Transaction Maintenance e RV GL Reversing Transaction Maintenance e SO Sales Order Invoices invoices e WO Work Orders shop floor labor reports e XX Imported Transaction e XY GL Imported Transaction Revaluation e YR GL Transaction Year End Close e YA GL Transaction Year End Adjustments Examples of document types are e A Payment Application e I Invoice e M Memo e F Financial Charge e P Payment e VO Voucher e CK Check Any combination of document and transaction types can be listed on your journal reports depending on how your daybooks are set up You must create default daybook codes for each transaction type document type combination that you want included within a specific kind of report Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 9 Journals 313 The following table shows a suggested default d
205. e uniquely identifiable LE S adds a new field to the first screen for this function to allow this to be achieved Part of Operation An optional code used to make the operation unique within a mean routing where multiple source routings exist for the item with the same operation number It is not sufficient to just use the standard operation field on its own as two different production lines could create the same item but manufacture it in a different way Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 391 The second screen contains some additional fields not found in the standard MFG PRO Routing Maintenance 14 13 1 IES Simulation Routing Maintenance 30 18 1 10 IES Suulaion Raving ain lM Edt Quewe Option Help Routing Code 10 1500 MOMAD TM COOLING 5 Operation 10 Part of operation Sed Op Wik Center 15000 ASSEMBLY KOMAD TH Setup Tine Ol Tool Code Run Time 2 Swabe Hove Time 0 Inventory Value o 0 Yeokds 200 008 Subcontract Cost 0 00 Mach Eda Rate 208 00 Setup Rate 0 20 Lbr bdn Aate uae na Labor Rate 29 00 Lbs Bdn o irs EA FleHelp F bBo ESD End Fo Delete Chl XACV Cut Dopy Pasie 2 The values of these additional fields detailed below are all used by cost calculations in I E S Inventory Simulations Mach Bdn Rate The machine burden rate per hour as applicable to machine run time and
206. e used when processing this DR CR memo However as for pending invoices the VAT Register and Operation Code fields only display if VAT Registers and Suspended VAT respectively have been enabled The values held in all these fields default from the relevant settings for the invoice s bill to address Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 308 European Accounting User Guide Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 9 Journals Standard MFG PRO provides only limited reporting facilities from the General Ledger In earlier versions of MFG PRO European Accounting added the ability to create extra reports known as Journals or Daybooks to the General Ledger functionality Developed initially to satisfy the reporting requirements of France and other countries these have been extended to make them of more general usage Journals allow you to group GL transactions in such a way as to either satisfy legal reporting requirements or to be consistent with common business practices found throughout Europe They can be considered as reports in which GL transactions are grouped by document types and transaction types with separate debit and credit columns as their final entries This chapter looks at European Accounting s Journal Report Writer feature that extends this journal functionality still further allowing you to create journal reports that consist of a combination of transactions fro
207. each valid combination of period number parent name component name and reference number when standard product structures from MFG PRO are copied into I E S However should overlapping protection fail and a second record matching the specified criteria is found you will receive this message The second record will be skipped without being copied into the LE S version of the data Receipt of this message probably indicates that the standard product structure data has been corrupted due to overlapping Order quantity for item is not defined Order Qty 1 used There is no non zero order quantity defined either in Item Planning Maintenance 1 4 7 or in Item Site Planning Maintenance 1 4 17 for the specified item s default site As an order quantity is necessary in order for the I E S setup cost for a product routing to be calculated an order quantity of 1 is assumed IES Routing for period item operation and start date already exists Overlap protection should ensure that only one record exists for each valid combination of period number item name and operation number when standard routing records from MFG PRO are copied into I E S However should overlapping protection fail and a second record matching the specified criteria is found you will receive this message The second record will be skipped without being copied into the LE S version of the data Receipt of this message probably indicates that the standard routing data ha
208. ection criteria Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 6 Cash Management 171 Verification of automatic application With the cursor keys you can scroll through the selection You can select invoices memos or financial charges by pressing the space bar Selected lines are shown by an in the Sel column When you are finished you can leave this window You return to the previous screen Reconciling Payments Reconciling payments means that payments already created in MFG PRO from for instance the automatic payments functionality direct debit can be marked as being received on the bank account Reconciling payments means that the payment date is entered for the accounts receivable payment and that a general ledger entry is created for the payment in process account and the cash account The flow starts with a header frame Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 172 European Accounting User Guide Header frame of reconciling AR payments Cash boot Aainlenance Multi Entry Enter Yes or No to determine if multi line entry of payment references for reconciliation is to be permitted Chrg Acct Charge account sub account and cost center for bank charges Chrg Amt Charge amount This amount will be booked on the charge account and cost center and will be included in the total shown above the charge amount When you have for instance 15 USD charges on a receipt of 200 USD that means
209. ed Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 3 General Ledger 43 Transaction Type Transaction Type Document Number Number Document Number Description Address AP Voucher GL document number Supplier code and name CCO s external voucher number 8 positions invoice number AP Check GL document number Supplier code payment No entry document number 10 method and name positions Other AP documents GL document number 16 Supplier code and name No entry positions IC documents of type Lot number tr_lot 8 AP receiver number if one No entry RCT PO or ISS PRV positions exists or transaction number and customer supplier name Sales Invoice GL document number invoice Customer code and name No entry number 8 positions AR Payments GL document number check Customer code and name No entry number 8 positions Other AR documents GL document number AR Customer code and name No entry reference 8 positions JL and RV documents Project code 8 positions GL description Other transactions GL document number 16 GL description No entry positions To select a transaction for matching press Enter or Return with the cursor positioned on the relevant entry in the list An asterisk will then appear next to that entry in the S column Once a transaction has been selected that transaction s amount is subtracted from the balance shown at the foot of the screen When this balance is zero yo
210. ed VAT VAT registers and operation codes Creation of Invoices Within PRM pre payments and pending invoices can be created A PRM pre payment is equivalent to MFG PRO s existing DR CR memos Invoices in PRM are generated for a Project Invoice Schedule which can be created and maintained using Invoice Schedule Maintenance 10 9 1 In Invoice Generation 10 9 13 you can then select the invoice schedules one at a time for which either a DR CR memo pre payment invoice or a pending invoice must be generated Invoice Generation 10 9 13 lieet Generation fofosfo1 see yon Fa EUROCUST FO a re O75 EUAOCUST zofoafo zefeofon i EUAOGUST An additional European Accounting frame has been added to this function This frame will appear when all the relevant invoice details have been selected The frame is slightly different for the two types of invoices details on both versions of the frame are given below Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 306 European Accounting User Guide Pending Invoices When generating a pending invoice the following version of the European Accounting frame displays European Accounting Frame for Pending Invoices VAT Register The VAT register This must be a valid VAT register for the site of the project and for the project tax rate Invoices for a project can have only one tax rate which is determined at project level Operation Code The operation code This must be an exis
211. ed and maintained Discounts can then be booked into these discount accounts depending on the tax rate for the appropriate vouchers for AP accounts or DR CR memos for AR accounts Discounts for early settlement of invoices will be applied at payment time rather than at invoicing when the Discount Tax at Payment flag in Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 is set to Yes Discount Tax Flags in Tax Rate Maintenance Tax Hali Martinat S iien Ta Clee ii Descoption High Rate WAT Tax Waage Tae Fate 17 98 Elective kiraarau TarByline pea Tar Bose Hin Taxable t a Max Taxable Fir Pia 990 ph tt Fl Holp Fe Ge ESC End F5 ihnkete Lhaa py Parin Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 283 When a customer takes advantage of a discount due upon invoice payment or you take advantage of a discount offered by a supplier a VAT correction must be made to the appropriate VAT account Also the discounted amount less the VAT component must be posted to the discount account In the following example an early settlement discount of 2 of the sale is available on invoice payment Invoice Amount 100 00 VAT Rate 17 5 VAT Due 17 50 Total Invoice Amount 117 50 Early Settlement Discount Rate 2 Early Settlement Amount 2 35 VAT Component of Discount 0 35 Corrected VAT Amount owing to early settlement 17 15 In the above exa
212. ee cases leteaubbelaceesssolecb aeea Eae E a a E ae E etah 215 Flow of Automatic AR Payments eesesseesesesesreeseseeereseerrssestestesreesrentesteetesrerrsserrenestentrsrnresreeresre 216 Marking Debit Credit Memos sssesseseesseesssseeerssrrsrssrstesresterteseerrnsestesrestentsseeersserteseentnsertenrertenreset 218 Creating Payment Selections nnion neri eris eneee Si oa E n erse cevivedebe dessbesevicesenesbovnaaes 219 Modifying Payment Selections ssesesserererereererstsrerserersrerersereesrerersenseerersreressencrsrereenensrererseeeers 223 Payment Selection Reporterii suoro eee oE Eee En rE EEEE rE E EEE ESEE EEN 225 Execute Payment Sel ctionsrn inteneo en EEE EEEE eE E ES EEEE EE R EEE Y 226 Inquiry of Payment Selections snn cerises cececebccscteeiacbuatessbisnenpessebeasescdbecdensvbscsenevessbenevieesubesbernaaes 230 Creation of Duplicate Mediasi niste roiree erenneren eee erre EVE Sa EE EnEn anons E 231 Deleting and Archiving Payment Selections cece cesecesecseecseesseceeecseeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeceseeeseeaeenaes 232 Accounts Payable recents e neva EEEE A O EEE AAE A A EN EER 233 Flow of Automatic AP Payments eseessessesesrseeesesreerrseerreresresreressestentesteetesrertssertesestentesrentssrerrset 234 Markinig Vouchers 2 etisi Svelevoecses iis ca tesec sch she locaseatus ch tuts Eea eoa VA lesioned EIE T EOE EKA loans 235 Creating Payment Selection 0 2 0 0 eceseecsecsosceevenessnssersesseessvonsesenssenss
213. eed the balance of the supplier Amount Selection The amount already selected in the payment selection in base currency Due Date Selection of due dates of open vouchers Disc Date Selection of discount dates of open vouchers Supplier Selection of suppliers of open vouchers Supplier Type Selection of supplier types Sort Name Selection of vouchers based on the sort name of the supplier Voucher Selection of open vouchers Voucher Type Selection of voucher types of open vouchers Credit Terms Selection of credit terms of open vouchers Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 238 European Accounting User Guide Batch Selection of batches of open vouchers Bank Selection of banks of open vouchers Payment Method Selection of payment methods of open vouchers When the automatic selection is activated planned payments are created for the selected vouchers A report is supplied of the planned payments When open vouchers that comply with the selection rules are not selected the reason for this is printed on the report When the selection is executed all vouchers that conform to the selection criteria are processed Each voucher is checked first to ensure e Ifthe voucher is already part of a different payment selection that is not yet processed A voucher can only be part of one not processed payment selection at the time e If the voucher is negative credit memo If this is the case and the option Reconcile cred
214. een presented to your bank for payment The report output by this function shows all checks that currently have the status you selected above The report s layout is shown in the example below Output Example of AR Check Status Report arcrrp p cla Page 1 Check Bill To Name Bank AR Account 1040 00080000 CUSTXAR3 CUSTXAR3 80001 CUSTXAR3 CUSTXAR3 80002 CUSTXAR3 CUSTXAR3 00080003 CUSTXAR3 CUSTXAR3 00080004 xar3b XAR3 test customer Bank Totals Checks Outstanding 5 Total Checks 5 USD Report Totals 27 6 5 18 Check Status Report EA to eB TEST ENVI RONMENT Check Amount End of Account 1040 1040 1040 1040 1040 Report Date 09 02 01 10 04 01 09 03 01 28 03 01 19 02 01 Eff Date 14 02 01 10 04 01 14 02 01 28 03 01 19 02 01 Date 26 03 01 Time 17 34 45 Paid Void Dte Status Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 5 Accounts Payable The Accounts Payable functionality of MFG PRO has been altered by European Accounting This chapter describes those changes The following topics are covered Accounts Payable Features Instrastat in Vouchers Voucher Maintenance Manual Payments Unapplied AP Payments Reconciling Unvouchered PO Receipts Supplier Activity Inquiry PO Receipts by Supplier Voucher Numbering Report Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 134 European Accounting User Guid
215. eessensecsserssecnevssesseeeeesenes 236 Modifying Payment Selections eee cece cee cseeceeeseeeeeeeeecaeeeaeeeeeeseeseceseesecsecsaecsaecsaessaecaaeenes 240 Payment Selection Report esos iceren an sesces hake sects sacusds ants doce dbnevecb dete o EES ban dessescbaveevbeletees 242 Execute Payment Sel ctioNne noss erain eoir e Ee nbs avid bas susch late sorae TE EEDE oE E CSES 243 Payment Selections Inquiry 00 0 ee ee eeceseceecsseceecseesaecaeecsaecseeeaeseeeeseeseeeseeseceseeseeesesaecaeesaeeeaes 246 Creating Duplicate Medias esc soe sods seugebtneste Gide ue ventions A A St dave och ent E E A E E 248 Deleting Archiving of Payment Selections 0 cee eee escecesecesecesecesecaeecaeeeaeseeeeeeeeeeseaeseeesreeeensees 249 CUSLOMIZAUILON 235ecis0 25022 setecehinaslacettes tenths Rie ne TEE RE A E RE AEEA 249 Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other TaXeS sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 251 MAT ReSisterS lt f cbcis ctesesietievetes aee e REETA E Ea OE EA AEAEE E Ea SEAE EEEE 252 Data Set up nnec n a chee ee ee ee 254 Sales and Purchase Transactions cc eceesssecesscesecesecesecsaecseecaeeeseeeaeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeseseeeseeeaeeeaees 265 Suspended VAT hrenn shld dient hap ee aaia deat led naan eek eS ee 272 VAT on Petty Cash Transactions 0 cceeesecssecsseceseceseeessecsseceseceseeseesseeseneseneeeneeeaaesaaeenaees 274 AP and ARV AT LIS cad aer KE oe eee a ea reams ai ae es deta ee 280 Credit Terms D
216. eive an error message EC VAT Register Enter Yes or No Specifies if the VAT register is used for EC purchases If set to Yes it is for use with such purchases if set to No then it is not Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 256 European Accounting User Guide Header for Purchase VAT Register A description of the Purchase VAT Register as it will appear on the VAT Register Reports Next Page Nbr Controls the starting page number of the VAT Register Report Header for Sales VAT Register A description of the Sales VAT Registers as it will appear on the VAT Register Reports Next Page Nbr Controls the starting page number of the VAT Register Report Invoice Sequence ID The sequencing number range to be used for assigning invoice numbers when an invoice is printed You can either assign an existing numbering sequence or create a new one of your own Credit Note Sequence ID The sequencing number range to be used for assigning credit note numbers when a credit note is printed You can either assign an existing numbering sequence or create a new one of your own Voucher Sequence ID The sequencing number range to be used for assigning voucher numbers at voucher registration You can either assign an existing numbering sequence or create a new one of your own Correction Invoice Sequence ID The sequencing number range to be used for assigning correction invoice numbers when a correction invoice is printed You can either as
217. em was a personal item These rules not only applied for business but also for every day transactions For example when collecting a suit from the dry cleaner you would also have received a Bolla because the suit might not have belonged to you The Bolla stated what you were moving at what time and where to Bollas had to be printed on pre printed and pre numbered standard forms These pre printed forms had to be ordered from certified printers but had various layouts Companies could devise their own layout for Bollas On invoices the Bolla had to be referenced and invoiced separately This way there was a direct link between the shipment and the invoice On one Bolla it was possible to combine several sales orders providing the ship to address was the same A consolidated invoice could then be made which made it possible to link the Bolla to one invoice Once the Bolla ceased to be a legal requirement it was renamed the Documento di Trasporto and it is still common business practice to supply these for goods movements in Italy One reason for this being that new legislation is pending in this area but its contents are not yet known A simplified version of the Bolla could well be required in the future Another reason for the on going use of such documents is that it allows you to verify that what is received or shipped is in line with the invoice MFG PRO s standard shipper functionality has been extended to satisfy the Italian shippin
218. en raised For which invoices have not yet been raised That have yet to be printed That are still unconfirmed 31 01 01 Invoice 11706042 Invoice Date 31 01 01 Print Date 31 01 01 Sold To 01000013 QAD Netherlands BV Fultonbaan 20 Plettenberg West Ni euwegei n Netherlands Your VAT Reg DE 123456789 Ship Date 31 01 01 Purchase Order Shi p To 01000013 Ship Via BOL FOB Point Backorder Tax Line Total 5 00 Discount Service 10 Freight 20 Special 30 0 000 Total Tax 0 00 Total 0 00 429 INVOICE Revision 0 Page 1 You can set any of these options or any combination of these with the exception of the Unprinted Only option which cannot be set on in conjunction with any of the other options Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 430 European Accounting User Guide Shipper Report 7 9 18 Shapp Heput Set the appropriate fields to create the report of your choice Depending on options selected here each report can be sorted by inventory movement type shipment date or shipper number Ship From The Issuing Address Only shippers with a Ship From site falling within the range specified here are included in the report Leave blank to include all shippers regardless of their Ship From value Ship To Dock The Destination Address Only shippers with a Ship To Dock address code falling within the range specified here are included in the report
219. ent method codes can be defined in generalized codes field eubk_py Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 209 Filename Module Country Description Name Bank format Driver euqbpbf3 p euqbpsb3 p Belgium Inland Payments Isabelle Foreign Swift Payments version 3 Format128 AP euqdpdel p Foreign Swift Payment format Deutsche Bank DTAZV euqdpdil p Germany Inland Payments format Deutsche Bank support DTAUS of Euro euqdrdil p AR Germany Direct Debit Lastschriftverfahren format Deutsche DTAUS Direct Bank Euro supported Debit euged321 p AR Spain Drafts to file C32 Drafts eugedfl1 p AR Spain Drafts to file Program to be renamed euqed581 p C58 Drafts in XAS2 Euro supported eugedpal p AR Spain Paper Drafts version 1 Drafts eugedpa2 p AR Spain Paper Drafts version 2 Drafts eugeppcl p AP Paper Checks version 1 eugeppc2 p AP Paper Checks version 2 euqfdff1 p France AR Drafts on file Now obsolete with the introduction of the ETEBAC3 Draft driver AR Drafts to file ETEBAC3 ETEBAC3 AP Inland payments ETEBAC3 ETEBAC3 eugfret3 p AR Direct Debit ETEBAC3 ETEBAC3 eugfpffl p AP Foreign payments ETECOM WIN 1 70 ETECOM eugidifl p AR a RIBA drafts RIBA euqipsel p AP tay Inland payments Setif format SETIF i euqnpab1 p A euqnpcl3 p A Netherlands Foreign payments format ABN AMRO BTL 91 as BTL91 of May 1998 Netherland
220. ent number European Accounting automatically suggests the new bank statement number based on the last available bank statement number for the bank and year You are allowed to overwrite this number Beg Balance According to the European Accounting Control File setting for Display Cash Book Balance the proposed beginning balance is calculated from the GL or determined by the end balance of the previous bank statement number for this bank Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 6 Cash Management 167 Cash Book Maintenance When the bank statement header is entered the cash book line window is shown We will now discuss the details of the cash book lines by discussing the different types First you enter the line number Next you are prompted for the line type At this stage European Accounting adds functionality which offers you the chance to delete the line using CTRL D Lines of type R Accounts Receivable or type P Accounts Payable can only be deleted if the related General Ledger transactions have not yet been posted In the window of the Cash Book Lines a Reference has been added If a G line is shown here the related GL reference is also shown In case of P or R lines the voucher reference s or AR memo reference s are shown Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 168 European Accounting User Guide R line When you enter a line of type R Accounts Receivable then you can first enter
221. enter the VAT register at appropriate points This VAT register is used for reports and also to assign numbering ranges for invoices vouchers and credit notes Prov For RIBA An Italian specific feature County of the local office of the Ministry of Finance Provincia della Intendenza di Finanza Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 2 Setup and Basic Data 11 Autoriz RIBA Nbr An Italian specific feature Authorization number for the RIBA payment draft supplied by the Ministry of Finance Numero autorizzazione Intendenza di Finanza Autoriz RIBA Data An Italian specific feature for use with RIBA Legal Nature Will be removed in next version Fiscal Count Will be removed in next version Main Activity Will be removed in next version Activity Code Will be removed in next version Check Fiscal Code Enter Yes or No to indicate if the fiscal code should be checked or not Operation Types For Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable European Accounting introduces Operation Types They can only be used when VAT registers have been enabled by setting the VAT Register flag in the European Accounting Control File to Yes Refer to Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes for further details on VAT registers Introduced originally to fulfill the Italian requirement that clear descriptions must be supplied for all accounting transactions these operation types describe the transactions carried out in Accounts Pa
222. enter a cost for these transactions Example 2 In a particular time bucket there has been a mixture of work order receipts and unplanned transactions The receipt quantity would be calculated by considering all the received quantities including the unplanned ones while the receipt cost would be calculated from the mean cost of the planned transactions So in this instance the unplanned transactions would be valued at the mean cost of the work order receipts Negative Inventories It is possible for inventory quantities to be less than zero should the consumption quantity be greater than the receipt quantity While it is obviously impossible to consume more than you have received the most likely cause of an apparent negative inventory balance is problems with the lead time associated with paperwork For example when a company is processing its final transactions for a financial year it will probably concentrate on shipping inventory to satisfy its customers demands rather than process the paperwork associated with receipts during this period Within I E S it is assumed that if consumption is greater than receipts within a simulation compensation must be made for this Adding the difference between consumption and receipt back into the simulation does this This effectively means that consumption cannot be greater than receipts in a given simulation If this balancing figure cannot be consumed against any previous simulation it is brought fo
223. entered should be the account number sub account number and cost center of the bank For the numbering ranges you can enter the ranges of your choice Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 214 European Accounting User Guide Additional Swift Data To be able to make automatic payment using the Swift protocol additional information is needed For each supplier that you want to pay using Swift the relevant supplier Swift data has to be entered using Supplier Swift Data Maint 2 3 17 Supplier Swift Data Maintenance Supplier The supplier address code for which you want to add Swift data This supplier has to exist When the supplier is chosen or an existing record is changed the name state country and bank accounts of the supplier are shown in the top window Bank Acct The Swift bank account number This is a different bank account number than the one entered for the supplier Swift Payment Code The Swift payment code This code defaults to the payment code entered in the Automatic Payment Control file Charge Code This code defines who will be charged by the Swift costs the supplier or the customer This defaults to the charge code entered in the Automatic Payment Control file Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 215 Transact Code An additional currency transaction code like the code needed for the Belgium Institut Belgo Luxembourgeois du commerce
224. er Guide Inquiry of Payment Selections A separate inquiry function AR Payment Selection Inquiry 27 6 4 8 is available for payment selections Processed payment selections as well as active payment selections are listed Inquiry on payment selections AL ayer belaz han repay In the top window a selection can be made Bank The bank of the payment selection Payment Method The payment method Batch The batch File The filename of the created media Check Date The check date In the lower window the result of the selection is shown On the right hand side you can see whether the payment selection is processed Pr Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 231 Creation of Duplicate Media Should payment media be lost or damaged in some way you can use Creation of Duplicate Media 27 6 4 9 to create new duplicate payment media for already processed payment selections Creation of duplicate media No financial or sub ledger transactions are performed Batch The batch number of the processed payment selection A help screen is available Bank For display purposes only The bank of the payment selection Payment Method For display purposes only The payment method of the payment selection Date For display purposes only The date of the payment selection Time For display purposes only The time of the payment selection on the date Filename The filename for the media
225. ers but similar functionality is available for other sales documents such as sales quotes Refer to VAT Registers earlier in this chapter for a full list of all functions enhanced with VAT register functionality VAT registers and operation types assigned to documents created early in the sales cycle such as sales quotes are automatically transferred to sales documents for the same transaction created later in the sales cycle such as invoices For example VAT registers and operation types assigned using Sales Quote Maintenance 7 12 1 are transferred automatically to the associated sales order and from there to the relevant invoice Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 268 European Accounting User Guide Sales Orders Sales Orders can be linked to a particular VAT register When using Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 to create a sales order a pop up window displays when you enter the order header information This shows the default VAT register and operation code set up for use with the relevant customer Sales Order Maintenance 7 1 1 Daar Under Banlenaree rde 10071 p Sold To hip To Empren Accounting Cethan AE R Ceviom FRANCE FRANCE i Codes pan ayo VAT Register E 2 fenntion Code inv Aequeed Date isranal Corence EUR Language Pinme Daie Sie 10000 Tambk wa H Due Dale zajos Thana Ford Price yos Peeing Date Project Cied
226. es Voucher Maint 28 1 2 When you enter this function you are asked for a Batch and Control amount as in Voucher Maintenance Next you can enter a voucher reference you want to update A special help window is available with an added column Wait for Waiting Expenses You can only select vouchers marked Wait equals Yes Waiting Expenses Voucher Maintenance 28 1 2 EVROSIFP When you have entered a correct voucher reference you are asked if you want to remove the Waiting Expenses mark for the voucher Beware you always have to apply the waiting expenses vouchers entirely Removing the Waiting Expenses mark Al oi maian Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 5 Accounts Payable 147 Next you can update the effective date of the voucher This effective date is used for the GL transactions By default this date is set to Today and this date is validated according to the GL calendar This way the booking from the Waiting Expenses account to the Expenses Account is effective on this new date After completing your entries in Waiting Expenses Voucher Maint the effective date of the voucher is reset to the original date This is done on order to keep the Aging by Effective reports valid Next you are allowed to enter purchase orders etc Then the distribution window is shown The system will automatically make a counter booking for the Waiting Expenses account You can now make the final distribution
227. es or memos for which you wish to create drafts using AR Payment Selection Automatic 27 6 4 1 Alternatively you can use AR Payment Selection Manual 27 6 4 2 to select specified invoices or memos against which you wish to raise drafts Both these functions have been modified to support the submission and discounting of proposed drafts directly to the bank Use AR Payment Selection Automatic 27 6 4 1 to set the default customer bank to be used for the payment of proposed drafts This defaults to the first customer bank record where the address is equal to the draft s Bill To address the account is set to All and the due date of the draft being created lies within that bank s effective date range If using AR Payment Selection Manual 27 6 4 2 to manually select invoices or memos for which you wish to create drafts an additional frame displays if the Bank Account Needed flag in Bank Maintenance against the payment method has been set to Yes and the payment method is Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 83 one that supports drafts This frame shows the default bank if previously set that will be used for draft submissions to a particular customer You can enter a different bank if you wish provided it is valid for that particular customer and the draft s due date lies within the bank s date range AR Payment Selection Manual 27 6 4 2 If the customer s defau
228. escriptions Improved GL Descriptions Year End Close GL Transaction Matching GL Control File Improvements in Reports Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 32 European Accounting User Guide Journals European Accounting supports the creation of journals using its Journal Report Writer feature Journals are reports in which GL transactions are grouped by document and transaction types with separate debit and credit columns for various entries The Journal Report Writer offers great flexibility in the creation of these journals Refer to Chapter 9 Journals Secondary GL Descriptions MFG PRO s standard Transaction Maintenance facilities have been modified by European Accounting to allow you to specify a second description line for GL transactions This feature was added originally in response to the Italian requirement that a plain easy to understand description must be provided for all GL transactions This feature has been extended to allow this extra GL description line to be entered for any GL transaction provided the Use Secondary GL Descriptions flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 has been set to Yes This additional description will then be printed on certain reports For manual GL transactions you can enter this second GL description yourself when entering the transactions Second GL description line Standaad Tianzacteen Mao User Menu Edit Quews Dotions Hep es
229. ese enhancements are discussed in this chapter The following topics are covered DR CR Memos Customer Account Inquiry Additional Functionality for Drafts Accounts Receivable Payments Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 62 European Accounting User Guide DR CR Memos European Accounting has enhanced the Debit Credit memos functionality of standard MFG PRO by adding the following functionality e Bank and Payment Method have been added to support electronic banking e Settlement can be made by correction invoices e Tax distribution lines can be entered manually e The logic for 30 days of the credit terms has been implemented e VAT Register functionality can be used e Operation type can be set when VAT Registers are activated e Suspended VAT logic can be invoked if the Use Suspended VAT flag in the European Accounting Control File is set DR CR Memo Maintenance New functionality has been added to DR CR Memo Maintenance 27 1 to detail the Bank and Payment method used Added Bank and Payment Method in DR CR Memo Maintenance Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 63 When the Bill To address is entered the bank and payment method of this Bill to are copied immediately to this Debit Credit Memo Bank The default Bank to be used in electronic banking for collecting this Debit Credit Memo This is the bank to which your customer must
230. essor 28 10 13 Project Maintenance 10 1 1 Invoice Generation 10 9 13 EMT Processing EDI Processing Data Set up Specific VAT Register prints are available Purchase VAT Register EC Purchases VAT Register Retained VAT Register AR VAT Register In order to be able to print VAT registers you have to set up certain data first The VAT registers themselves Global Tax Management data Tax Classes Tax types and Tax usage codes in customer supplier and part files Operation types Refer to the following sections for details Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 255 Defining VAT Registers Use VAT Register Maintenance 2 13 7 1 to define new VAT registers and maintain edit existing ones VAT Register Maintenance 2 13 7 1 VAT Regiile Maintenance VAT registers can be selected through both the VAT Register and the site codes Generally the Site field is left blank but you can set up the same VAT Register code for different sites which is particularly useful for companies that have several logistical sites belonging to the same fiscal entity VAT Register The VAT register Site The site Typically this field is left blank Active Enter Yes or No Defines if the VAT Register is active Yes or not No If set to No you can set up the relevant VAT register but if you then try and process transactions against an inactive VAT register you will rec
231. est inventory received last in is used first first out Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc 495 O Operation Types Operation types describe AP and AR transactions in clear easy to understand language These descriptions can be linked to sales orders sales quotes and pending invoices and will appear on various reports and when VAT registers are printed P Payment Method Payment methods determine the way in which a customer is going to pay your invoice or the method you are to use to pay one of your suppliers A payment method must be specified if payment is to be made electronically Multiple payment methods can be defined for each bank Period Lots A technique used in I E S when performing inventory evaluations simulations Periods are defined and the mean values of items produced within that period are calculated and assigned to period lots This information can then be used in the calculation of inventory values using FIFO or LIFO methods Protocol Number An Italian feature A number which must be assigned to all GL transactions in Italy to conform to Italian legal requirements Protocol numbers must be sequential and no gaps are permitted in the sequencing R RIBA RIcevuta BAncaria An Italian payment method similar to a draft QAD Inc 496 S Secondary GL Descriptions A second GL description line for GL transactions providing a clear easy to understand description of
232. etail Enter Yes or No to specify if the GL effects that will appear when this selection is executed should be printed Amount For display purposes only Total amount of payment selection When these fields are entered an additional window is shown where you can enter the output destination Execute Payment Selection When the payment selection is approved it can be executed With the function Payment Automatic Checks 28 9 4 6 the payment selection is converted into actual payments and payment media report or file is created The window of this program differs between the execution of a payment method that creates actual payments and the execution of a payment method that creates drafts Executing a payment method that creates actual payments m0419 m Bank The bank of the payment selection Pmt Meth The payment method When the bank and payment method are entered the name and account number of the bank are displayed Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 244 European Accounting User Guide Company Address The company address to be used as the address of the supplying party in all printed and electronic payment media Account The bank account Currency For display purposes only The currency of the payment selection Daybook The code of the Daybook in which the GL transactions generated by this function should be stored Defaults to the daybook belonging to transaction type AP and document type CK St
233. etary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 390 European Accounting User Guide Simulation Routings Maintenance Simulation routings can be entered manually using IES Simulation Routing Maint 30 18 1 10 or copied from standard routings using Routing Copy Std gt IES 30 18 1 24 3 Use IES Simulation Routing Maintenance 30 18 1 10 to manually enter routing simulation data You can also use this function to view and or edit existing mean routing data IES Simulation Routing Maintenance 30 18 1 10 LES Simulalion Heeling Haini Mi E3 Ure Meru Edi Queue Opto Help SS 2c 2 2 7 Singleton FIFDZR FIFO Yalgstion Pariod i 1401 A000 3101 AO Resting Geode 10 1500 HOMADITH COOLING 5 Opention 10 Part of operation Sed Op afaik Gender 150800 ASSEMBLY HOMAD TH Machine Deacnption ASSEMBLE PER SPEC Machines per Op 2 im Milaztone Operation puz Overlap Units 2 Subcontract LT a ucue Time o Setup Crew 2 00 Wait Time a e Alan Crew 1 ee Fl Help Fife ESC Emd Fo Delete Cil X C V Cul Copy Pasis First enter the simulation code and period Next cycle through the available routings and operations This maintenance function is similar to the standard MFG PRO Routing Maintenance 14 13 1 although the function has been split into two separate screens in I E S and additional functionality has been added In order to be able to generate a mean routing each operation must b
234. etary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 207 Entry of SIA code for Italian Banking In this frame a Bank Account Validation field has also been added Bank Account Validation The Bank Account Validation rule Several rules are available including the 11 and 12 tests The bank accounts entered for this bank are checked for the validation rule When this window is closed a new screen is presented showing this bank s available payment methods Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 208 European Accounting User Guide Payment methods defined for bank Payment methods have been introduced in European Accounting as a means to cope with the different payment methods available in Europe Payments can be made by printing pre printed forms or by means of electronic data communication using diskettes The payment selection procedures of European Accounting 27 6 4 1 27 6 4 2 28 9 4 1 and 28 9 4 2 give you the opportunity to select AR memos or AP vouchers for payment A bank and payment method can be specified When the payment selection is executed these selected AR memos and AP vouchers are transformed into payments payments drafts or checks Each automatic method of payment can use a bank format driver A number of bank format drivers commonly used in Europe are available these are shown in the following table The payment method codes are pre defined but new paym
235. ethod is one which creates drafts you must answer an additional question to determine whether approved or proposed drafts have to be created Executing a payment method that creates drafts AN Panoni Aulon Checks Testte Ahl bop Y e r Fano Bek Account Dealt a mock BesltFiP 1 Check Matn 13703701 Elective fasvaayan Amour 100 00 File Hamme Bank The bank of the payment selection Pmt Meth The payment method When the bank and payment method have been entered the name and account number of the bank are displayed and if the payment method is Draft you are also asked to specify if it is approved or not Company Address The company address to be used as the address of the supplying party in all printed and electronic media Currency For display purposes only The currency of the payment selection Daybook The Daybook in which the related GL Transactions need to be posted when unapproved drafts are created no GL transactions are created The default daybook is determined based on the payment method If the payment method creates drafts then the default daybook is related to transaction type AR and document type D Draft otherwise to transaction type AR and document type P Payment Sent By This field indicates the origin of the draft Valid entries are Supplier the default to indicate the draft is a supplier initiated one or Customer to indicate it is customer initiated Approved Enter Yes or No You
236. etup and Basic Data 29 30 days logic added to Credit Terms The following example demonstrates how this functionality works Set the Discount Days field to 45 days and Due Days to 60 days and in both cases set the Date From field to 2 Discount Due days start from the end of the month invoiced Then enter an invoice with an invoice date of 6 April 2001 With standard MFG PRO this leads to Discount Date 30 April 2001 45 days 14 June 2001 Due Date 30 April 2001 60 days 29 June 2001 However if we were to have an invoice date of 6 March 2001 in standard MFG PRO we would then get Discount Date 31 March 2001 45 days 15 May 2001 Due Date 31 March 2001 60 days 30 May 2001 As you can see the settings 45 and 60 days lead to different day numbers in the month European Accounting makes it possible to always have these discount and due dates set to fixed day numbers by setting the 30 days field on Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 30 European Accounting User Guide Thus for an invoice date of 6 April 2001 as shown in the above examples with the setting 30 days Yes you would obtain the following result Discount Date 30 April 2001 1 month 15 days 15 June 2001 Due Date 30 April 2001 2 months 30 June 2001 With an Invoice date of 6 March 2001 with the setting 30 days Yes you would obtain the following results Discount Date 31 March 2001
237. etween the print date and protocol number ranges no report will be created Reprint Yes i GL Maimbeiing Cenabe a oo ole Protocol Number The range of protocol numbers to report An entry of 0 is not allowed Print Date The range of dates to be covered by the report When the GL Numbering Create report is activated for a range of effective dates a check is made for the existence of any non posted GL transactions with an effective date before the end of the selection period In this case a warning will be given and no protocol numbers will be assigned Next a check is made as to whether transactions exist before the effective date range which do not have protocol numbers assigned to them If this is the case a warning message is also given Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 464 European Accounting User Guide Warning message If you receive this message you must first assign protocol numbers to the previous periods before proceeding A report and inquiry are also available giving details on transactions whose protocol number and effective date fall within a specified range GL Numbering Report 25 13 8 3 Protocol The range of protocol numbers to be printed in the report Effective Date The range of effective dates to report Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 465 GL Numbering Inquiry 25 13 8 4 GL Nu hsiing lipy POO A
238. ew Payment Method New payment method of planned payment Change in Payment Selection Yes or open AR memo Change in Vouchers Yes New Due Date New due date of planned payment Change in Payment Selection Yes or open AR memo Change in Vouchers Yes When left blank or set to a question mark the due date remains unaffected Report Currency The report currency When left blank base currency is taken Display only Enter Yes or No to control if the update is made or if the report just lists the changes that will be made to the payment selection without actually committing the changes To simply list the changes that will be made set this flag to Yes To make the actual update you should set this flag to No Payment Selection Report The report function Payment Selection Register 28 9 4 4 is available to list the payment selection With this report format approval can be obtained to process the payment selection Reporting a payment selection Piperi Seedin Kegel Bank The bank of the payment selection Pmt Meth The payment method of the payment selection Account For display purposes only The bank account of the bank Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 243 Currency For display purposes only The currency of the payment method Draft PIP For display purposes only The Payment In Process account or the payment method Effective The effective date Print GL D
239. eze the current simulation Once a simulation has been frozen no further edits can be made to it e Copy the beginning inventory balance into the simulation for the next year At the start of a new financial year use IES Beginning Balance Copy 30 18 1 3 to copy any remaining unallocated receipts from the previous year s simulation into the new simulation for the new fiscal year Thus the unallocated receipts from the previous year s simulation become the starting inventory balance for the current year s simulation Note For some calculation methods specific fiscal year costs or last period costs must also be calculated In Italy the Italian Step LIFO or LIFO a scatti evaluation method must be used when evaluating inventory Italian specific options allow you to calculate the LIFO value of inventory for a fiscal year using this calculation method These options should be used after the main IES processing has been completed up to and including the I E S Structure Cost Roll Up Refer to Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues for details Calculation Examples To clarify the calculation methods a number of worked examples are shown covering both FIFO calculations and LIFO calculations The first two examples are for a purchased item the following ones for a manufactured item In all the following examples periods lots of a year are assumed over a total time period of five years The results are calculated for each individual year Start
240. f European Accounting s standard I E S module although certain reports produced using this remain Italian specific It has been extended to support the FIFO evaluation method too e Enhanced Transaction Descriptions In Italy all administration has to be clear and traceable which means you must be able to supply clear descriptions for all transactions European Accounting allows you to add descriptions for transactions carried out in the General Ledger Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable by adding an operation code to the transaction e Numbering of GL Transactions Italian companies are required to keep a book register showing all accounting transactions for a specific period GL transactions must be sequentially numbered without any gaps in the sequence e Italian companies are obliged to withhold the tax due on various payments for services provided by sole traders European Accounting has been enhanced in order to meet the legal requirements for Witholding Tax declaration in Italy Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 447 Documento di Trasporto In Italy up to 27 September 1996 companies were legally obliged to have all goods movements between two physical different locations accompanied by a so called Bolle d Accompagnamento Merci Bolla The reasoning behind this being that in all public places one had to account for anything which was transported anywhere unless the it
241. f Report Report submitted by imh To To 3a Output ian Batch ID Date Time Date Time Date Time Date Time 19 03 01 11 54 19 19 03 01 11 54 19 19 03 01 11 54 19 19 03 01 11354219 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 272 European Accounting User Guide Suspended VAT European Accounting allows the tax date on sales invoices to be set according to the payment date of those invoices If you set the Use Suspended VAT flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 to No then VAT is due when the invoice is first raised as in standard MFG PRO However if you set this flag to Yes VAT is due on payment of an invoice rather than when that invoice is first raised Use Suspended VAT Euinpean Accounling Catia If you set this flag to No then VAT is due when the invoice is first raised When Suspended VAT is enabled you can use the Suspended VAT Account field in Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 to set the appropriate Suspended VAT account against the relevant tax code You can define multiple suspended VAT accounts per tax environment and multiple tax codes for a transaction tax rates included on any one invoice or DR CR memo do not have to share the same suspended VAT account Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 273 Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 Taw Plate Maintenance Pale E
242. formation Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 156 European Accounting User Guide Unapplied Payment Report 28 9 21 The report has the layout shown in the example below Example of Unapplied Payment Report 28 9 21 euunaprp p c7la 28 9 21 Unapplied Payment Report Date 13 03 01 Page 1 EA to eB TEST ENVI RONMENT Time 15 16 20 Eff Date Base Amt Curr Amt Curr St Inv Unapplied Ref U AA10000060 12 12 00 By guidotst A AA10000060A 12 12 00 U DD20000005 07 01 01 i 11 00 FFR Ref u dd20000006 11 03 01 18 100 00 FFR karel The report has the following elements Vendor The Vendor to which the checks were paid and vouchers were entered T Enter U or A to indicate the transaction type U indicates unapplied checks A indicates applied vouchers or invoices Ref Reference of the check with bank and check number The letter A after the ref number implies this is an application Eff Date Effective date of document Base Amt Amount of document in base currency Curr Amt If non base currency here the non base currency is presented Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 5 Accounts Payable 157 Curr The non base currency St Inv The voucher used for an application or for a check the status of that check Unapplied Ref The check s unapplied reference Reconciling Unvouchered PO Receipts In standard MFG PRO it is not possible to report on unvouchered purchase order receipts as
243. formation Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 418 European Accounting User Guide Set up of Data To be able to use shippers successfully you must first enter some basic data using MFG PRO s standard Global Shipping functions e Shipping groups e Inventory Movement Codes Entered using Inventory Movement Code Maint 1 1 9 e Physical and fiscal address codes of locations Entered using Location Maintenance 1 1 18 Refer to Address Codes The following table details the various shipping groups and the inventory movement codes within them which must have been set up if you intend to use shippers The Transaction column shows the actual transaction to be performed by the relevant function When this transaction is performed the system then checks for the existence of the shipping group defined in the Shipping Group column If this is found the system next checks that this shipping group has been set up with an Inventory Movement Code that represents the transaction shown in the Inventory Movement Code column Only if all these criteria are met can shippers be created using the functions shown in the following table If none of the criteria is met the shipper document will not be created Work Order Component Issue 16 10 Transaction A work order component issue where the site issuing the component is not the same as the work order site Shipping Group Source address must be the same as the site code for the issuing site and the
244. g document requirements Refer to Chapter 12 Shipping Documents Bank Management In Italy bank accounts consist of 26 positions of which the first five depict the bank in Italy ABI and the next five the branch of the bank in Italy CAB Besides the bank account you have to know the physical address of the branch of the bank To support this European Accounting adds a new data entity known as Third Party Banking Three new functions have been added to Customer Supplier Banks Menu 2 21 for third party banking Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 448 European Accounting User Guide Third Party Banking chaning Demo gt gail Using Third Party Bank Maintenance 2 21 5 you can add the address information of the bank branch Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 449 Third Party Bank Maintenance 2 21 5 ot Thid Pail Hank Banalemaneci When you enter the ABI code for the bank and the CAB code for the branch of the bank you can enter the address of the bank as in standard MFG PRO This address is not however part of the standard address master table Both an inquiry and a report function are also available Use Third Party Bank Inquiry 2 21 6 for inquiries Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 450 European Accounting User Guide Third Party Bank Inquiry 2 21 6 T hid Pate Hank Uricjeieng City Bampa Popolare di M
245. g Submission Discounting of Proposed Drafts Lumpean Acoourdiresg Lontnod File User Mera Fel Queur Opies Help b o mp Gp Ga Use Waiting Expense Vouchers ves Account 7105 D Use Comection invaices Yia Display Cosh Hook Balanoe He Use Suspended VAT re Manual Draft Method DI Payment M AR Default Bank AA AR Dedault Method OF Papert MWE Ure Secondary GL Dercsiption Yna Point Shipper On bnvoscesc res Submit Discount Proposed Drafts Specifies whether it is possible to submit and optionally discount a proposed draft If set to Yes this feature is enabled and extra functionality is added to Drafts as detailed in this section If set to No the default it will not be possible to either submit or discount a proposed draft and the flow of drafts in European Accounting will be the default flow See the section Standard European Accounting Flow of Drafts above When the submission of proposed drafts has been enabled two different types of proposed drafts can be created for direct submission to the bank e Customer initiated drafts Known in France as Billet Ordre Relev BOR customer initiated drafts are raised by the customer and sent to the supplier s bank for payment The acceptance of such drafts is implicit as they originate from the customer and thus they are typically entered into the system as approved drafts e Supplier initiated drafts Known in France as Lettre de Change Relev
246. g functionality is not implemented for the MFG PRO Payroll module In addition multiple DB has limited support Furthermore European Accounting requires the use of Global Tax Management other tax methods are not supported Global Tax Management supports both VAT and the Spanish Recargo de Equivalencia feature as standard Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 6 European Accounting User Guide Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 2 Setup and Basic Data Before you can start using European Accounting you must first configure it You also need to run some conversion programs to upgrade your existing MFG PRO system so that it works correctly with the European Accounting module This chapter describes how this can be done This chapter covers the following topics European Accounting Control File Operation Types Country Table Customers Suppliers Changed Address Information Currencies Purchase Gain Loss Account by Product Line Product Lines Credit Terms Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 8 European Accounting User Guide European Accounting Control File Use the European Accounting Control File 25 23 to set various European Accounting features European Accounting Control File Lope fcc Lodo is Lisi Mau Ed Ghee tons Help Cs Fe Ce Gay Use Wate Experces Vouchers PE Acco Fis Use Caiieclion lnve
247. g payment selection e Payment Selection Mass Update 28 9 4 3 Changes bank payment method and or due date of planned payments Refer to the previous sections for details on the first two methods Using Payment Selection Mass Update 28 9 4 3 you can change the bank payment method and due date of planned payments Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 241 Mass update of payment selection The changes are listed in a report Refer to Payment Selection Report below Due Date Selection of due date of open voucher related to planned payment Supplier Selection of supplier of planned payment Supplier Type Selection of supplier type of open voucher related to planned payment Voucher Selection of reference of open voucher related to planned payment Voucher Type Selection of voucher types of open vouchers related to the planned payment Credit Terms Selection of credit terms of open voucher related to planned payment Batch Selection of batch of open voucher related to planned payment Currency Selection of currency of open voucher related to planned payment Bank Selection of bank of planned payment Payment Method Selection of payment method of planned payment New Bank New bank of planned payment Change in Payment Selection Yes or vouchers Change in Vouchers Yes Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 242 European Accounting User Guide N
248. g records created by Transaction Year End Close 25 13 12 Create Opening Trans At Year End Enter Yes or No to determine if Transaction Year End Close 25 13 12 creates opening balance transactions for the balance sheet accounts for the start of the next year If set to Yes valid entries must be made in the Year End Closing Balance Acct and Year End Closing Balance Cost Center fields Year End Opening Balance Acct The GL account code of the account for the new financial year into which the accumulated balance of the previous year s balance sheet accounts is to be forwarded as the opening balance for that year When a fiscal year is closed using Transaction Year End Close 25 13 12 the year end balance for balance sheet accounts is posted to the Year End Closing Balance Account and balances are re instated in the new year from the account specified here This account can only be specified if the Create Opening Trans At Year End flag is set to Yes Opening BS Sub The GL account code of the sub account for the new financial year into which the accumulated balance of the previous year s balance sheet accounts is to be forwarded as the opening balance for that year Year End Opening Balance Cost Center The GL cost center from which the accumulated balance of the previous year s balance sheet accounts is to be forwarded as the opening balance for the next year When a fiscal year is closed using Transaction Year End Close 25 13 12 the year e
249. gail x T7 2 EC Purchaser VAT Hegler a kN c Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 453 AR Italian VAT Lists AR Italian VAT List Menu 2 13 15 5 offers several AR VAT lists specifically for Italy AR Italian VAT List Menu 2 13 15 5 Acie ing Dima gaiil Li Sa Payment Methods For Italy some specific payment methods are available in European Accounting We will not discuss these in detail with the exception of RIBA drafts An additional function is available for this payment method Ital RIBA Reversal 27 6 6 20 Using this function you can reverse RIBA drafts based on a file received from the bank Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 454 European Accounting User Guide Ital RIBA Reversal 27 6 6 20 Location File The name of the file containing the reversal data The file has to be located in the search path of MFG PRO PROPATH Effective The effective date for the reversal This date has to be in an open GL period Void the Draft Void the draft or reset the status of the draft to proposed Refer to Draft Reversal When you have entered this data you are asked if you want an audit trail printed and processing begins Inventory Evaluation In Italy standard costings are not accepted by the fiscal authorities instead the Italian Step LIFO or LIFO a scatti evaluation method must be used when evaluating inventory Four It
250. hanged at submission time Reconciliation Cash account of bank 26 13 Accounts Receivable Account of AR memo referred to in distribution line Account entered in distribution line of draft Drafts Receivable Account 27 6 6 8 When submitted the credit account of the transaction of the submission When not submitted the Drafts Receivable account When drafts are submitted and discounted separately this results in an additional effect on the General Ledger This occurs immediately after the Submission details before the Reconciliation stage shown in the above table Single Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 9 Multiple Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 10 Draft Creation Discounting Discounted Drafts account of Bank 26 13 Can be changed for specific draft in 27 6 6 9 Discount Charges Account of Bank 26 13 Can be changed for specific draft in 27 6 6 9 27 6 6 10 Drafts Receivable Account 27 6 6 8 if draft has not yet been submitted or Payment in Process Account if draft has already been submitted to the bank Draft creation differs in the standard and the enhanced European Accounting draft flows The setting of the Submit Discount Proposed Drafts flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 determines which draft flow is used The difference between the two is that in European Accounting s standard flow as is also the case for standard MFG PRO drafts must be approved before they can be
251. hat is produced in period X To be able to determine the price of this Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 370 European Accounting User Guide manufactured item the price of the individual components has to be known Simply taking the component mean price of the same period would not result in the correct price because it would assume that the starting stock in each period is always zero In the I E S module this problem is solved by calculating the mean consumption price for items per period to be consumed by either sales or as a component in production This works bottom up in the product structures low level codes Whenever the next highest level is started the Structure Cost Roll Up is performed immediately for all manufactured items on that level How the mean consumption price of components is then calculated depends on the calculation method used for the simulation e Run IES Data Resynchronization 30 18 1 5 if appropriate This step is not mandatory This function allows you to go back a step in the LE S process if there are any mistakes with the LE S data It restores the data to its previous state without the need for you to start the entire I E S process again from scratch on the original source data e Create a report for the inventory evaluation The end result of the simulation is a report that calculates the inventory value e Freeze the current simulation Use IES Simulation Freeze 30 18 1 9 to fre
252. hat it must be fully shipped before it can be printed and posted Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 13 Correction Invoices 439 Shipping Correction Sales Orders A correction sales order must be fully shipped before it can be printed and posted To ship a correction sales order use Sales Order Shipments 7 9 15 which has been enhanced for Correction Invoices Although standard MFG PRO does not generate a shipper in this function European Accounting does generate a shipper document This is in case the correction results in an actual issue or return of goods when the quantity has been corrected MFG PRO s standard Global Shipping functionality is used to generate this shipper You must ensure a shipping group has been defined for the ship from and ship to addresses and an inventory movement code with transaction type ISS COR has been linked to that shipping group As partial shipments of correction sales orders are not supported you are unable to update the quantities in Sales Order Shipment Shipping the Correction Sales Order Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 440 European Accounting User Guide Printing Correction Invoices The actual correction invoice can be printed using MFG PRO s standard function Invoice Print 7 13 3 A new flag Correction Invoices has been added to this function This flag allows you to indicate if you want to print correction invoices or standard i
253. he actual date is when the transaction was entered into the system while the effective date is when the transaction affects the General Ledger Site The site codes to be covered by this report Site codes identify areas where inventory is either manufactured or stored it can be an off site storage area a distribution center a warehouse a manufacturing facility or any combination of these Leave this field blank to include all the available sites Location The location codes to be covered by the report Location codes identify the physical location where inventory is stored they must be specified on every inventory transaction Leave this field blank to include all location codes in the report New Page Per Item Location Enter Yes or No to specify if you want the data for each different item or location to be printed on a new page Set to Yes to print information on each entry on a new page No to continue on the same page as the previous entry In addition the report contains the following information for each inventory movement e Shipper number e Invoice number where appropriate e Order number where appropriate e Quantity received or issued e Transaction date e 6Effective date Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 12 Shipping Documents 433 e Customer or supplier address code e Internal transaction number for tracking purposes e Transaction type An example of a report that could be output
254. he necessary shipping and inventory groups have been set up then the Shipping Information frame will be displayed at the foot of the window you are using to perform the shipment From here you can create a shipping document for that shipment Note The correct generation of shipping documents is not guaranteed for the transfer of more than one item unless all the items have the same source address and are being transferred to the same destination The following example shows how to create a shipping document for an unplanned issue of goods using Transfer Single Item 3 4 1 but the procedure is similar for all functions that support the creation of shippers Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 422 European Accounting User Guide Transfer Single Item 3 4 1 In this case a transfer is being performed from one location to another at the same site However these two locations have been defined with different addresses and these addresses exist within a Shipping Group together with an Inventory Movement code for transaction type ISS TR The system recognizes that this transaction should therefore produce a shipper and will display the Shipping Information Frame Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 12 Shipping Documents 423 Shipping Information Frame ramsi Singe hem anm S Wo Enter the appropriate values for your transaction This is the standard MFG PRO shipper functionalit
255. he simulation set code Calc Method The calculation method for the simulation set This is a display only field Only LIFO simulation sets can be used in this function Simulation Year The year of the simulation This is a display only field Months The periods that should be considered for the last quarter calculation normally 3 for 3 months When you enter for instance 2 months then periods 11 and 12 are taken into consideration to determine the last quarter mean price You are now ready to perform the Italian LIFO calculation using Italian LIFO Calculation 30 18 5 4 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 458 European Accounting User Guide Italian LIFO Calculation 30 18 5 4 You must first enter a valid I E S simulation set which has been defined with a LIFO calculation method You must then decide whether you want the LIFO calculation to consider the last period or last quarter s mean price in the LIFO calculation If you set the Use Price Last Period flag to Yes then the Italian LIFO calculation will use the lower of this value and the fiscal year mean price Otherwise the fiscal year mean price will be used for all items This LIFO calculation is carried out using years as periods and uses either the fiscal year mean price or last period mean price for each item that is to be consumed from each year depending on the settings chosen Previous year s information is made available to the calculation by lin
256. hed AP Payments eere 8 Al eer ce ets sede hs oe E EN A ERa Sect secs asec ving E RA 151 Entering Unapplied Payment eee ee eecesecesecssecesecseecaeeeseeeseeeeeeseceescesecsecsaecsaecsaecsaecsaecaeeeaes 152 Application of Unapplied Payment 0 0 ceeesecsseceeecseecseeeseeeseeeeceseeesecesecaeesaecnaecsaeesaecaeeeaes 153 Unapplied Payment Report eee eeccesscesecesecesecesecsecsaecseeeseeeaeseaeeseeseeeseesecsaeesaecsaecsaecaaeeneeeaes 155 Reconciling Unvouchered PO Receipts 20 0 ce cescescesseceseceseceseceseeeeeeeseeseneecaeeeaeeeneeenaeenaees 157 Supplier Activity Inquiry enan aae i tah eeis aba selene ene giatd sees 158 PO Receipts by SUpple re ieena igre aE E S stb A clea beteemesgebioa eae aeeSpaeee 160 Voucher Numbering Report ieser erneiert ie tinkera o aei te aeo eas 161 Customization ee ie inita e eO TEE ana E ee a a aa 162 Chapter 6 Cash Manageme nh 0 ccccsscceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 163 Cash Book Maimtenance seeiis rea i sce FE EE EEEa Aa EEI ALEE EAEE 164 Calculating the Beginning Balance from the Previous Statement ssseeseseerssrersserererreeresrsrreresrees 164 Entering the Bank Statement Header o oo eee e i a E EE E ESEA 166 Rieiro eee a R K A eee a E A ana N ies 168 PENG nean a Hen R tied a A a a a A RNS 180 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Contents v GIMET E Roh cha ee E EEEE E ace Oana 180 Cash Statement of Account eere n iit E esa Sees ee i ee 1
257. hey originate from the customer When supplier initiated drafts are to be created the value in this field defaults to No to indicate that proposed drafts will be created The Due setting of the appropriate bank driver controls the way in which these drafts are created Due Setting Drafts Created 1 One draft per customer 2 Separate drafts per due date 3 One draft per invoice Should the relevant bank accounts be different when the Due setting is either 1 or 2 the creation of drafts may need to be split by customer bank such that one draft is created per customer per due date per customer bank record Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 85 Draft Maintenance Once a proposed draft has been created you can change its type and or the customer bank account associated with that draft using one of the following maintenance functions e Proposed Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 1 e Approved Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 8 You can also use these functions instead of AR Payment Autom Checks Drafts 27 6 4 6 to create drafts manually The same two fields have been added to both functions to allow you to specify the type of the proposed draft plus the customer bank and bank account to be used for the payment of the appropriate draft s Proposed Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 1 Prapiied Dial Miinlenance Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 86 European Accounting User Guid
258. ices 100 1300 Proposed Supplier 12 02 01 USD 28 02 01 100 00 Reference Status Sent By Account Date Amount Due Date Eff Date Curr C Total of Invoices 103 1300 Proposed Supplier 12 02 01 USD 28 02 01 Reference Status Sent By Account Customer XAR1Cust Total Batch Total Date Sub Acct CC 400 00 400 00 Amount Due Date Eff Date Curr C Total of Invoices 111 1300 Submit Customer 13 02 01 13 02 01 USD 28 02 01 Discount Cur Customer XAR1Cust Total Batch 1571 Total 27 6 6 3 Draft Report EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Reference Status Sent By Account Date Sub Acct CC 100 00 100 00 Date Time 26 03 01 16 48 41 Amount Due Date Eff Date Curr C Total of Invoices 112 1300 Proposed Customer 13 02 01 13 02 01 USD 28 02 01 100 00 Reference Status Sent By Account Date Sub Acct CC Amount Due Date Eff Date Curr C Total of Invoices 213 1300 Void Customer 13 02 01 13 02 01 USD 28 02 01 Page 1 Entity 1000 Bank DR Batch Name Bill To Exchange Rate Cust Bk Cust Bank Account XAR1Cust XAR1 Test customer USD 1 0 USD 1 0 Reference Open Amount 1000289 100 00 Name Bill To Exchange Rate Cust Bk Cust Bank Account USD 1 0 USD 1 0 Reference Open Amount 1000290 200 00 u xarlul 0 00 Batch 1571 Name Bill To Exchange Rate Cust Bk Cust Bank Account XAR1Cust XAR1 Test customer USD 1 0 USD 1 0 Reference Open Amount U xar
259. ices from several standard reports e Display of the link between an original invoice and its correction invoice While this functionality was originally added to European Accounting in response to legal requirements in Poland it is now available as a generic feature Refer to Chapter 13 Correction Invoices for full details Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Appendix A Web Enabled Functions Versions 9 upwards of MFG PRO are web enabled releases MFG PRO s Java interface NET UI allows you to run MFG PRO remotely using a web browser Many European Accounting reports and inquiries have been modified to allow you to take advantage of MFG PRO s web functionality This appendix contains the following sections Web Enabled Reports and Inquiries Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 482 European Accounting User Guide Web Enabled Reports and Inquiries The following table lists those European Accounting reports and inquires that have been enhanced with web functionality Refer to MFG PRO s standard documentation for full details on MFG PRO s Java interface Menu Label E e Cremation Type Inquiry Third Party Bank Report 22 21 ExtraStat by Voucher 15 GL Account Sheet Report 22 AR VAT List 22 End of Year Customer VAT List 22 AR Transactions gt Given Amount ing Exp Voucher by Emp Inq Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QA
260. id Approved Reversal Submitted Reconciliation Jo Reon Closed Depending on the status of the draft different GL transactions are made Use Draft Reversal 27 6 6 12 to reverse drafts European Accounting has added a lot of new functionality to this function You can now also book bank charges due to the reversal and you are allowed to create a financial charge for the customer This charges the costs associated with reversing the draft to your customer Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 112 European Accounting User Guide Draft Reversal 27 6 6 12 Uimara Eel usu Onions Help me GICs Fieference Bil To Eifective Dake Date Due Date Expect Pap Dae Amami Woid the Orsi Ho thesis Ferel bo Propre Financial Chaige Ho Bank Change Ma Change Amount Change Amani Cumency Currency Charg Dale Change Date Efsotive Date Elfective Oeste Change Account Bank Attimi Change boomt Fiematk Change Armak First you must enter the reference of the draft you want to reverse Next the draft information is shown and you are allowed to set the effective date for the reversal Then you are asked if you want to void the draft Voiding means that the draft is discarded in which case a new draft must be created for the connected memos The memos will be re opened Next you can create financial charges in case you are able t
261. ilas Milany You can report third party bank addresses using Third Party Bank Report 2 21 7 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 451 Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues Third Party Bank Report 2 21 7 The IT Bank Account Validation is used to check the bank account of customers and of suppliers When a bank account is marked with bank validation IT this means that a third party bank address must exist with an ABI code confirming the first five digits of the bank account and a CAB code confirming the second five digits Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 452 European Accounting User Guide VAT and Other Taxes Several enhancements have been added to European Accounting to support Italy s VAT and tax requirements e VAT Registers e AP Italian VAT Lists e AR Italian VAT Lists VAT Registers VAT registers are required by the Italian fiscal administration and must display all the relevant information needed to confirm a company s VAT declaration is correct and to prove there has been no fraud While initially introduced into European Accounting in response to the Italian VAT requirements this feature has now been extended to be of more general usage Refer to Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes AP Italian VAT Lists AP Italian VAT List Menu 2 13 15 4 offers several AP VAT lists specifically for Italy AP Italian VAT List Menu 2 13 15 4 Fup Achdenling Demi
262. ine the withholding tax type in Tax Type Maintenance 2 13 1 1 which will be used for all withholding tax transactions This tax type must not be included in the definition of any tax environments You must then set the different tax rates or taxable base percentages to be used for withholding tax transactions These are dependent on the type of service associated with a transaction Every withholding tax transaction must have a reason code or causale associated with it to identify that transaction s service type Use Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 to set and maintain the necessary withholding tax details Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 Tax Rate Martinit Tam Tepe fat THHOL iban Taa Cisse inte Tax Usage Tas Raim it tiS Ellectve rira iad Tarplin pea Tar Base Mm Taxable 0 04 Man Tasable PPP PPP 208 ee oH Percent Aecowerstle i is Expiration Dabs Tax Method 01 caus T at Aesp par Updale Tas Allowed ino Ditcounl Taa al invoke Ad Alfow Toe brokeded ino Diposi Tos ot Popment no EC Sales List ino Comments mo EC Piseest Wok ina Tmt Acute 1520 Sales Tan Account 2000 Salec Ta Wbeobed 2410 no AP Tax Account 187 AP Tan Aetened 1400 no Suspended VAT Account FisHelp F2 Ge ESC End West Pree Cire C C ul Copp Paste While this is a standard MFG PRO function the following fields are used in a non standard way for handling withholding tax Tax Type The tax type for withholding tax tr
263. ing User Guide Verifying the reconciliation Cash boot Hainlenance P line The P line is nearly the same as in standard MFG PRO There are two changes besides currency rounding e The check number is 8 positions wide e Multi entry has been enhanced so that any check numbers not assigned to the chosen bank cancelled checks and checks in a different currency are skipped G line The original G Line is nearly the same as the standard MFG PRO G line the only differences are e a second description line can be entered when the Use Secondary GL Description flag in the European Accounting Control File has been activated e petty cash transactions can be entered here in the cash book together with the associated tax entries An example of the second GL description line is shown below The entry you make here will appear on certain reports Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 6 Cash Management 181 Cash Book G line second description line An additional frame allows you to enter petty cash transactions for G lines in the Cash Book together with the associated tax entries in much the same way as you can for standard transactions using Standard Transactions with GTM 25 13 5 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 182 European Accounting User Guide Cash Book G line petty cash transactions There are two possible entries you can make here e S Adds standard transactions
264. ing stock is assumed to be zero Each of the tables shown in the following sections contains the following rows e Receipts All purchase order receipts work order receipts and other receipts of an item in a period e Consumption All sales order issues work order issues and other issues of an item in a period e Net Effect The net stock effect in a period being Receipts Consumption Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 371 e Not Allocated Receipts The receipts in a certain period will be allocated over time to the consumption How this receipt is allocated depends on the calculation method LIFO FIFO etc At the start of the evaluation Not Allocated Receipts equals Receipts When time progresses the period lots are consumed until nothing is left e Mean Receipt Price The mean receipt price of the item within the considered period which is calculated during the evaluation This price is used to make the final evaluation e Mean Price for Consumption To be able to determine the prices of manufactured items it is necessary to know what the mean price for consumption of the component items is Suppose in a certain period 100 pieces of a component item are consumed Depending on the calculation method this quantity is allocated to certain production periods For LIFO this could be the most recent periods for FIFO the opposite If the 100 pieces are allocated
265. international payments it is mandatory to use currency codes defined according to the ISO standards These ISO currencies are entered in Generalized Codes Maintenance 36 2 13 using the field name euex_iso Entering SO currencies in Generalized Codes Maintenance Next each MFG PRO currency is translated into its equivalent ISO currency This translation only has to be entered when the MFG PRO currency code is different from the standard ISO currency code This can be done using ISO Currency Code Maintenance 28 9 4 13 ISO Currency Code Maintenance Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 2 Setup and Basic Data 25 Currency The MFG PRO currency code as entered in Currency Maintenance 26 1 Description The description of the currency as entered in Currency Maintenance 26 1 This description is not updateable ISO Code The ISO code related to the MFG PRO currency code Limit BNL The exceed amount used in cross border payments to be registered with the national bank Purchase Gain Loss Account by Product Line In Poland amongst other countries there is a requirement to record all variances affecting item cost against the item s product line Standard MFG PRO records a purchase gain loss when the exchange rate changes between the point of goods receipt and vouchering This variance is then posted to the unrealized gain or unrealized loss account which is defined against a currency in Currency Maintenan
266. ion and mean prices for all of the defined periods and to generate mean product structures and routings Make any necessary adjustments to mean prices and quantities using IES Cost and Qty s Maintenance 30 18 1 13 Make any necessary adjustments to LE S Product Structures using IES Simulation BOM Maintenance 30 18 1 6 Make any necessary adjustments to I E S Routings using IES Simulation Routing Maint 30 18 1 10 Run the IES Routing Cost Roll Up for this simulation set 30 18 3 5 Run the IES Structure Cost Roll Up for this simulation set 30 18 3 6 The additional steps needed to value inventory using the Italian method are listed below These steps must be carried out in the order shown here Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 456 European Accounting User Guide e Calculate the Mean Receipt Price for the fiscal year This is performed using Italian Fixed Yr Mean Price Calc 30 18 5 1 e Calculate the Mean Receipt Price for the last quarter or period of the year This is performed using Italian Last Qrtr Mean Price Cal 30 18 5 2 e Perform the LIFO calculation Use Italian LIFO Calculation 30 18 5 4 to perform the actual LIFO calculation itself All issues of inventory for the selected year are taken into consideration The cost of those issues is calculated from the lower of the Fiscal Year Mean Price and the Last Quarter Mean Price from each available year of inventory on a Last In First
267. ions for VAT reporting purposes They also enable you to determine specific ranges of invoice credit note voucher and correction note numbers to be used with transactions These number ranges are defined using MFG PRO s standard Number Range Management functionality A VAT register can be defined for a blank site or for a specific site and number ranges can be shared amongst VAT registers This means that whilst each separate VAT register can have a separate range of invoice and credit note numbers all VAT registers can share the same range of voucher numbers VAT registers are linked to transactions based upon the tax class of the transaction and the site involved in the transaction and are validated accordingly Any one transaction can only involve lines within the same VAT register Thus only lines involving tax codes with the same VAT register code can be entered at any one time VAT registers and operation codes are set up against customers and suppliers for use in sales and purchase transactions You can change them for individual transactions VAT register functionality was originally developed for Italy where VAT registers are a legal requirement but is now available as a generic function This functionality has been extended to offer greater flexibility than was the case in versions of European Accounting pre dating Version 8 6E where VAT registers were supported but as an Italian specific feature only Setting the VAT Register
268. ir H art a 18 1 f 22 ES Embed Looshon Report sy 30 181 Simulation Seip Menu H ES Cookie Mere 25 Urieck ES Simulain Sal a a tu 30 Cost Management E A F eie E a m a Ente data ga pinza ESC bo ened Start by defining a new manufacturing simulation set using IES Simulation Set Maintenance 30 18 1 1 Next define the individual periods within the simulation and then generate the mean product structures mean routing and mean purchase prices Once you are happy with the Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 380 European Accounting User Guide simulation data you will be able to rollup the simulated product structures and routings and perform the actual LIFO or FIFO evaluation itself Creating a Manufacturing Simulation Set Using LE S Simulation Set Maintenance 30 18 1 1 new simulation sets can be created or existing simulation sets updated IES Simulation Set Maintenance 30 18 1 1 TES Simulation Set Maintenance Uom Mer Edi Que pios Hain Ca ce e Simulation FIFOZ000 Desesiption FIFO Valuation Calculation Method FIFO Simulation Year roaa Waan Data Gensealion Period 01 01 00 To Take Begeining Balance From Is this Simulation Fiecen mo es oar Perimet Start Emt ae ee ee FicHolp FieGio ESC End FoeDedete Ciel X C V Cul Copp Panie Simulation The unique code to identify the simulation Description The description of the
269. is defined as the AP Tax Account against a tax rate for the Withholding Tax Type The system prorates the amount across any reason codes recorded on the voucher and deduces the amount of each expense line paid from the total paid You can also record amounts on other accounts such as INPS or Ritenuta Previdentiale These are types of pension contributions a proportion of which some professionals can charge to certain customers These are also recorded in the GL transaction created for the payment Automatic Payment The automatic payment selection functions such as Payment Selection Automatic 28 9 4 1 that have been enhanced to support withholding tax payments will not permit you to select an amount for payment on a voucher that exceeds the total voucher amount less the withholding tax liability As with manual payments manual payment selection will allow you to make partial payments of a voucher in which case the withholding tax amount due is prorated and split between the various reason codes on the voucher and their associated GL accounts Payment selection reports will highlight when the amount payable for a voucher has been reduced because of withholding tax amounts Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 297 The GL transactions created for automatic payments of withholding tax amounts are the same as those created when calculating withholding tax automatically for man
270. iscount Account per Tax Rate 00 0 ee eeeesseeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeneeeseeeaeeeaeeeneeenaes 282 Waithholding Tax sserrep eteen ee r AEE ideas Entadenes fetgeetlstaceess NEE EE EE NEER 285 Setting Up Withholding Tax saree noae reie e aae eE OEEO EE NEES ESEON E TEOR ESSR 286 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc vi European Accounting User Guide Supplier Maintenance cs scici 2 2055 neiaie r iener E AA EErEE n EEs TEE EEES i E E eir EE EE 288 Voucher Maintenances i eiei reiret i nse o e rE eor E EET E e EET EErEE Tre reS 290 Vo cher Payment senin a ra ner T Ean EE EEEa er E rE a EE E nE EET 292 settling Withheld Tak seesinane n e E A mine as A eee ieee stds 298 Withholding Tax Reports ee eecesecesecsecsseceecseeeseseeeesseseeesecsecsaecsaecsaecaeecseseseseeeeeeseeeeeeaees 300 Deleting and Archiving Withholding Tax Data 0 ee ee eecesecesecnseceeceeeeaeeeeeeseseeeeeeseeeenseenaes 303 Taxable Details for Address Data diie rria iei e E EEEE EE E 303 Project Realizationn areae i eae i ee E R ies ec 305 Creation Of INVOICES nei e R E E N death nacht pate A 305 Customization esi seee en e eh e Heed ee eee aa Eiaa E aSa ea 307 Chapter 9 Journals saci ceded satan tensescrcesvwutccegarcansaatuas aster cnaivedeacectavecuavadheeianucbunets 309 Journal Report WHter niens neenon naoa eeen e ee A oea tenes eiei 310 Setting up Data aaie eE caus AE i ere T A E EA SE E E E ee E EERE 312 Creating Journals noinen atna ai a a a i 313
271. it vouchers is set to No then this voucher is skipped e Ifthe payment method bank account validation complies with the bank accounts used e Ifthe entity of the voucher equals the entity of the bank account If this is not the case then the voucher may not be selected e The total amount to pay does not exceed the supplier balance The total amount to pay does not exceed the supplier balance unless the option Allow Payment gt Balance is set to Yes The way the actual payments for the selected vouchers are created depends on the Due setting as defined for the payment method in Bank Maintenance This setting has three options 1 Not by due date only one total payment per remit to or supplier is created for all selected open vouchers in this payment selection 2 Selected open vouchers are sorted by remit to or supplier and due date one payment is created by due date of the selected vouchers 3 For each individual open voucher a payment is made This also means that for selected credit vouchers a negative payment check is created You should be aware that this option might cause problems with electronic payment media which normally cannot handle negative amounts Now the program looks to see if the voucher is already part of this selection When it is not then a new planned payment is created If it is available then the flag Overwrite Old Selection determines if the payment is skipped or overwritten With the automatic payment
272. ith purchase transactions have been enhanced to handle VAT register functionality The following sections describe how this is handled when creating vouchers but similar functionality is available for other purchase documents such as purchase orders Refer to VAT Registers earlier in this chapter for a full list of all functions enhanced with VAT register functionality A flag in the Purchase Order Control File 5 24 determines if tax rates are validated against VAT registers in purchase transactions made with any of these functions such as Purchase Order Maintenance 5 7 Purchasing Control File Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 266 European Accounting User Guide Voucher Maintenance Vouchers can be linked to a particular VAT register during voucher line registration When registering a voucher a temporary number is initially assigned to that voucher by the system until it has been linked to a VAT register A final number can only be assigned once the voucher has been linked to a particular VAT register This is done in the header section of the voucher and during voucher line registration A pop up window displays whilst entering header details showing the default VAT register and its associated operation code and site for use with that voucher This defaults from the voucher s associated purchase order or purchase orders if the voucher is linked to more than one Note If a voucher is linked to more than
273. ithin the I E S simulation set When processing begins all items in the selected range are processed For all these items the simulation routings are processed routing code equals item code The routing operation details are processed and simulation costs in each relevant cost category are calculated Product structures must now be rolled up using IES Structure Cost Roll up 30 18 3 6 This function also performs the actual inventory valuation using either LIFO or FIFO rules Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 399 Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation IES Structure Cost Roll up 30 18 3 6 IES Shimeiune Cast Rell Up User Menu Ed Queues Qptions Hap Simelation CEET FFD Valustion Calc Method FIFO Simulation Tear S000 Peaind 1 To faz OnAgd Sno AAO 31200 hem Mumber Tef ti iOS Prod Line Ta item Type tf Group Ta Low Level Material per Set Cost Update Field For Low Level Labor pes A Charged Only Ai Low Level Burden per Inchade Yield yez Low Lewel Owerheadk res Print Audet Trak rea Low Level Sebcomract pee Dutput Batch ID Se ee ee FisHelp F2 Go ESC End ieetPeev Cols Cut Copy Paste The functionality of this program resembles that of the standard Product Structure Cost Rollup 13 12 13 but has been significantly extended e Structure cost rollups are carried out with respect for established simulation time
274. ive Amt The amount to receive for this Dr Cr memo Discount The amount to discount for this Dr Cr memo Bk When this Dr Cr memo is included in a payment selection the bank of the payment selection else the bank of the Dr Cr memo PM When this Dr Cr memo is included in a payment selection the payment method of the payment selection otherwise the payment method of the Dr Cr memo Cus Bank The customer s bank details Modifying Payment Selections Payment selections can be modified using e AR Payment Selection Automatic 27 6 4 1 Adds automatic selected payments or creates a new payment selection instead of an existing one Delete old selection e AR Payment Selection Manual 27 6 4 2 Manually changes planned payments or adds new planned payments to an existing payment selection e AR Payment Selection Mass Update 27 6 4 3 Changes bank payment method and or due date of planned payments Refer to the above sections for a discussion on the first two methods of payment Using AR Payment Selection Mass Update 27 6 4 3 you can change the bank payment method and due date of planned payments Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 224 European Accounting User Guide Mass update of payment selection e E The changes are listed in a report Refer to Payment Selection Report below Due Date Selection of due date of open Dr Cr memo related to planned payment Bill To Selectio
275. king each earlier year to the current simulation using the IES Beginning Balance Copy function 30 18 1 3 Use Italian LIFO Report 30 18 5 5 to report the results of the evaluation Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 459 Italian LIFO Report 30 18 5 5 Using this function you can enter a valid LIFO simulation set and a range of item numbers to report The year associated with the simulation set is displayed automatically You can choose between sorting by item number or sorting by product line The LIFO Inventory Value is reported and compared to the GL value of inventory in order to calculate the GL adjustment that should be entered An example of the output from this report is given below Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 460 European Accounting User Guide Output of LIFO Calculation Report 30 18 5 5 Tsfocarp p c7la 30 18 5 5 Italian LIFO Report Date 16 03 01 Page 1 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Time 15 36 41 Line Article Description UM Cost Last Period Cost Fiscal Year GL Cost A Rites NT Pe ee Coe oA Ge 7 50 o0 1000 Year Qty Price Corr LIFO Val GL Value Difference 2000 a aooo saoo 1999 40 17 50 700 Tot 80 13 75 1 100 800 300 Line Article Description UM Cost Last Period Cost Fiscal Year GL Cost i aten B O EA O a E E o0 aoo 5 00 Year Qty Price Corr LIFO Val GL Value Difference 2000 500 o0 SSS ooa SARE E a ay Tot 500 10 00 5 000
276. l calculate the weighted average mean receipt price as follows WO Rct Qty Mean Cst WO PO Ret Qty Mean Cst PO WO Rct Qty PO Ret Qty This field is updated during the LE S Structure Cost Roll Up Mean Cost Consumption The Material Labor Burden Overhead and Subcontr fields in the Consumption column store the mean price for consumption for the item in each individual cost category for this I E S simulation period The value shown in this field should be removed from the overall Inventory value for any issues of the item made during the period covered by the simulation Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 396 European Accounting User Guide The value of the Mean Cost Consumption field is dependent on whether the evaluation is carried out according to LIFO or FIFO rules If using the LIFO methodology all issues of an item made in the current period are deemed to come from available inventory received from the latest possible period Thus issues are made first from any receipts of the item that have been made in the current period then from any receipts made in the previous period and so on going back to the earliest available receipts of the item Conversely if using the FIFO methodology all issues of an item made in the current period are deemed to come from available inventory received from the earliest possible period Thus issues are made first from the earliest available receipts of the item going forwards
277. l is shown only when the Include Drafts flag is set to No When the Include Drafts flag is set to Yes the drafts total is included in the Computed Balance total In addition an overall total is also shown the sum of the proposed drafts and customer invoices European Accounting adds three columns to this screen labeled C S and D The column labeled C shows the first letter of the currency code Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 67 The column labeled S indicates if any of the drafts are either unapplied or contested The following notations are used in this column e The AR memo is marked as contested e U The AR memo concerns an Unapplied Draft This column remains blank for all other types of AR memos The column labeled D shows the status of drafts The following notations are used in this column to indicate a draft s status e A Approved e R Reconciled e S Submitted e P Proposed e C Closed e V Voided e D Discounted Additional Functionality for Drafts European Accounting has added a large number of enhancements for the handling of drafts to support e The ability to create unapplied or non AR distribution lines for drafts e The ability to apply unapplied drafts using an additional function Unapplied Draft Application 27 6 6 14 and to report on such drafts with the Unapplied Draft Register 27 6 6 13 e Creation of approved drafts using an additional main
278. lable e United Kingdom e Germany e France e Spain e Italy e Belgium Dutch and French versions e The Netherlands Bank Format Drivers In the different countries different payment methods are used regarding Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable European Accounting has added functionality for selecting invoices and vouchers The selected invoices and vouchers can be processed and translated into specific formats The actual transfer onto printed forms or electronic media is done with so called bank format drivers Refer to Chapter 7 Bank and Payment Methods for a detailed description of the available methods Base Currency Conversion MFG PRO version 9 0 includes functions that enable users to convert the base currency of their production database to the euro European Accounting makes no changes to the standard database but uses a separate database for holding European Accounting specific data Data held in some of these new database tables also needs conversion to the euro A new Base Currency Conversion procedure etbat19 p has been added for this purpose This program must be added to the Base Currency Conversion and Conversion Control script ba_conv Refer to the European Accounting Installation and Conversion Guide for full details Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 1 Introduction 5 European Accounting Restrictions European Accounting has certain restrictions European Accountin
279. lays an N in the T Type field However European Accounting enhances this functionality and allows you to enter the type yourself You can choose between N for Non AP and U for Unapplied Update of Type field If you enter U for the type you are then able to enter the Unapplied reference you should always do so when the voucher type is set to U Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 5 Accounts Payable 153 Entering the unapplied reference Application of Unapplied Payments Unapplied Payment Application 28 9 20 allows you to apply unapplied payments to vouchers Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 154 European Accounting User Guide Selecting the Unapplied Payment You can enter the supplier followed by that supplier s bank The unapplied reference is used to find the unique unapplied check Next you can enter the date of reconciliation default today and the effective date of the transaction default today This information is used for the next frame in which you can select vouchers to be reconciled against the unapplied amount Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 5 Accounts Payable 155 Unapplied payments application to vouchers Unapplied Payment Apple ahon Batch 1h Beich Cit o re Relerence AARDT A Suppier EWADSUPP Ewnpsan Accounting Supplim Bank AA Check 065i Baich 17 Chack Am 100 HE Unapplied Rel EUR
280. lection without actually committing the changes To simply list the changes that will be made set this flag to Yes To make the actual update you should set this flag to No Payment Selection Report The report function AR Payment Selection Register 27 6 4 4 is available to list the payment selection With this report format approval can be obtained to process the payment selection Reporting a payment selection AA Papel Selecten pe Bill To Selection for the bill to of the planned payments Currency Selection of the currencies of the planned payments Bank The bank of the payment selection Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 226 European Accounting User Guide Payment Method The payment method of the payment selection Check Date The check date This date is used to determine the exchange rate Execute Payment Selection When the payment selection is approved it can be executed Using AR Payment Autom Checks Drafts 27 6 4 6 the payment selection is converted into actual payments or drafts approved or proposed and payment media report or file is created The window of this program differs between the execution of a payment method that creates actual payments and the execution of a payment method that creates drafts Executing a payment method that creates actual payments Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 227 When the payment m
281. lt bank has not been previously set you must enter a valid bank here if the Bank Account Needed flag has been set to Yes for the payment method concerned Once you have selected those invoices or memos for which you wish to create drafts you can then create the drafts themselves You can use AR Payment Autom Checks Drafts 27 6 4 6 to do this Two extra flags have been added to this function to control the default type of draft that will be created Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 84 European Accounting User Guide AR Payment Autom Checks Drafts 27 6 4 6 GAH Paget Awom Leckers Umbea Ed gusu Options Hep tekeer Mank AA Euro Rank Account Pave Method OG Company Adder 1000 Dirai Steet Check 07000IEE Dri 1 Chack Date 2 oRfo1 Elllecive Dake 2e fb fo1 Amount 052 50 idle ee LEA ee Cae Sent By Specifies the type of draft to be created by default An entry of Supplier indicates that supplier initiated drafts will be created by default an entry of Customer indicates that customer initiated drafts will be created Approved The status of the draft The default entry in this field is determined by that in the Sent By field When customer initiated drafts are to be created the value in this field defaults to Yes to indicate that approved drafts will be created This is because although customer initiated drafts have not been officially approved they are treated as though they have been as t
282. lu2 100 00 Batch 1574 dmdmrp p 99 Page 2 Name Bill To Exchange Rate Cust Bk Cust Bank Account XAR1Cust XAR1 Test customer USD 1 0 USD 1 0 Reference Open Amount 1000292 100 00 Name Bill To Exchange Rate Cust Bk Cust Bank Account USD 1 0 USD 1 0 Reference Open Amount 1000293 200 00 Name Bill To Exchange Rate Cust Bk Cust Bank Account 200 00 Reference Status Sent By Account Date Sub Acct CC Amount Due Date Eff Date Curr C Total of Invoices USD 1 0 USD 1 0 Reference 114 1300 Submit Customer 13 02 01 13 02 01 USD 28 02 01 1000294 Customer XAR1Cust Total Batch 1574 Total Payment Method MD Total Bank DR Total USD Entity 1000 Total 600 00 600 00 1 100 00 1 100 00 1 100 00 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 118 European Accounting User Guide USD Report Total 1 100 00 dmdmrp p 99 27 6 6 3 Draft Report Date 26 03 01 Page 3 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Time 16 48 41 Base At Cur Curr Total Base Total Curr Ex Curr Ex Var 1 100 00 1 100 00 0 00 End of Report Draft Summary Register Draft Summary Register 27 6 6 4 has also been enhanced with the addition of bank payment method and status criteria When the submission and discounting of proposed drafts is enabled you can enter a status of D to create an overview of those drafts that have a status of Discounted Draft Summary Register 27 6 6 4 A report will be crea
283. m one or more daybooks The following topics are covered Journal Report Writer Setting Up Data Creating Journals Printing Journals Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 310 European Accounting User Guide Journal Report Writer European Accounting s Journal Report Writer added to MFG PRO at Version 8 6 allows you to group together GL transactions from various daybooks and report selected elements of data from those groupings in either detailed or summarized form This new feature replaces all the journals provided by earlier versions of European Accounting namely e Financial Journal by Reference e Financial Journal by Account e Purchase Journal by Reference e Purchase Journal by Document e Purchase Journal by Account e Invoices Journal by Reference e Invoices Journal by Document e Invoices Journal by Account e Memo Journal by Reference e Memo Journal by Document e Memo Journal by Account e Sales Journal by Reference e Sales Journal by Document e Sales Journal by Account e IC Journal by Reference e IC Journal by Account e WO Journal by Reference e WO Journal by Account e JL Journal by Reference e JL Journal by Account e RV Journal by Reference e RV Journal by Account e Total Journal Summary e GL Book e GL Book by Account Note These journals were all accessed from menu 25 9 in versions of European Accounting for use with versions of MFG PRO pre dating Version 8 6 Jo
284. make payment The default for this bank is taken from the Bill To address Paym m The default Payment Method to be used in electronic banking to collect this Debit Credit Memo The default for this payment method is taken from the Bill To address When VAT Registers have been activated by setting the VAT Register flag in the European Accounting Control File a new pop up window displays when the previous window is closed Here you can specify a VAT register for the transaction and set the operation type This description of the AR transaction can be linked to the relevant sales order at sales order creation and can be printed on various reports VAT Registers in DR CR Memo Maintenance CTPA Heno H anensnoe Ure Hena Ed Glusus Options Help bop S S Sl fetch iyi Contin a a00 Tote e 00a Fainne TOMSA BiiTo EUAOCUST Earopean Accounting Cecina Cumemy EWA Tre H Hank AA Pmi Meik BC Daie Peeayod Elfectine Ferbktrki Hemo Contot 0 00 Ami aa Ta Dae Fe fone Saler Ami 00 Daybook DE A Ci Timi 30 Shipam 1 Commi 0 pirs Emig 1000 Diso Dae Piao sod Shpat Comme 0 urs Sold To EUMHCHST Due Date 8 04 02 WAT Register DE 2 laratinon Code inv Te EURICUST Expl Dalt zipin 4c LAMA i ara nabi 1091 Fenmk Dun Level Coniesbed Ho Printed Ho Accoumt hhh VAT Register The VAT Register Operation Code The type of operation When Suspended VAT has been activated by setting the Suspended VAT flag in the Europe
285. mall companies that provide services rather than goods The actual rate at which withholding tax is calculated differs depending on the type of service provided A separate GL account is used for booking retained withholding tax amounts The withholding tax liability is not created until a voucher that is subject to withholding tax is paid At that point withholding tax is retained from the total invoice amount and is credited to this separate account If a partial payment is made the system calculates the withholding tax liability based on the proportion of the voucher that is being paid The withholding tax account is then debited with the retained amount once the withholding tax is declared to the authorities This is normally recorded via a manually entered GL transaction Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 286 European Accounting User Guide Setting up Withholding Tax Withholding tax is not paid at a single standard rate Instead the amount of withholding tax due varies depending on the type of service provided For example in Italy certain professional fees may be subject to a withholding tax of 20 for Italian residents but of 30 for non Italian residents You use MFG PRO s standard Global Tax Management functionality to define both the withholding tax rates and the accounts that are to be used once the withholding tax liability has been created Before you can use withholding tax functionality you must first def
286. mation Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 10 Intrastat 357 Reporting from Intrastat You can make Intrastat declarations using Intrastat Declaration Print 2 22 19 You start by entering the declarant and the declaration period You can print Intrastat reports firstly for verification Last Edition No and finally as the actual report Last Edition Yes You can have additional audit information printed For some countries file output is also available this is known as electronic declaration Intrastat Declaration Print 2 22 19 Declarant The code of the declaration for which you want to make an Intrastat report Entity For display purposes only The entity or entities that will be declared related to the declarant Declaration Country For display purposes only The declaration country related to the declarant Period The period range that will be recorded in the format from month year to month year Start For display purposes only The period range recalculated to an actual range of effective dates On Paper Enter Yes or No to specify if the report should be printed on paper or not Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 358 European Accounting User Guide To File Enter Yes or No to determine if the report should be printed to file You can send a report to file and on paper at the same time You can only set this flag when the Intrastat program supports this Declaration Number The declar
287. mation Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 105 Entering the amount The amount of the draft cannot be changed It is only used to accept this draft for reconciliation This amount will be added in the total field Multi Draft Bank Reconciliation If the Multi Entry field in Draft Bank Reconciliation 27 6 6 17 is set to Yes the multi draft reconciliation selection screen appears Several from draft to draft ranges can be entered These ranges must not overlap In addition you can also select drafts using a range of Due Dates and Expected Payment Dates Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 106 European Accounting User Guide Multi Entry option in Draft Reconciliation When all the ranges have been entered you are given the option of displaying the drafts which are to be reconciled If you answer Yes to this question the actual drafts to be reconciled are then displayed so allowing you to verify that the drafts selected for reconciliation are actually the ones you expected Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 107 Display of drafts to be reconciled ofz Dtme Once you have verified that the information is correct all the selected drafts are then reconciled The actual GL entries that will be created differ depending on whether the drafts to be reconciled were submitted separately discounted separately or submitted and dis
288. mean cost determined from the RCT PO receipts For example in a given time bucket a receipt of 15 RCT PO items is made In the same time bucket unplanned receipts of 5 further units of the same item are also made These additional five items only affect the calculation of the receipt quantity and not the receipt cost The mean cost of the 5 unplanned receipt items is calculated using the costings of the 15 planned receipts Their mean cost is then automatically assigned to the 5 unplanned receipts Thus the unplanned transactions are valued at the mean price of the actual transactions Should the only receipts made in a particular period be ones that not associated with either purchase or work orders it is not possible to establish a mean price automatically In this instance Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 388 European Accounting User Guide you must use Cost and Qty s Maintenance 30 18 1 13 to enter a meaningful receipt price manually For example if only unplanned transactions existed within a given bucket only receipt quantity could be calculated automatically and you would need to manually enter the cost prior to running the evaluation Refer to Simulation Costs Maintenance Generating Data Manually While it is recommended that you generate mean data sets automatically using IES Mean Data Generation 30 18 1 4 as described above it is also possible to create this data manually To create the mean data set
289. mple if the customer takes advantage of the early settlement discount of 2 35 offered upon payment of this particular invoice this would mean a correction to the relevant VAT account would be needed A deduction of 0 35 that is the VAT component of the discount would need to be posted to the appropriate VAT account for the relevant tax code The sum of 2 00 would need to be booked to the discount account If as is the case for standard MFG PRO all discounted amounts are booked to the same discount account regardless of their associated tax code this makes it difficult to determine that the correct amount of VAT has been booked To do a proper calculation of the actual VAT booked the discount amount for the tax percentage needs to be deducted from the sales amount a time consuming calculation if all discount amounts had been booked to a single discount account Posting discount amounts to different discount accounts based on their tax rate simplifies this calculation Tax Rate Discount Account Main 2 13 13 6 allows you to specify an AR AP discount account to be associated with an existing tax rate Any discounted amounts made for payments associated with that tax rate will then be posted to the accounts you specify here If you choose not to define a discount account for a tax rate discount amounts will continue to be posted to the discount account specified in the System Control File 36 1 as is already the case in standard MFG PRO P
290. n ies2000 Calc Method lifo Simulation Year 2000 Period 1 To 4 01 01 00 31 03 00 01 10 00 31 12 00 Prod Line To Item Number To Item Type Show Periods with Zero Inventory Value yes Output eval Batch ID Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 404 European Accounting User Guide Setting Inventory Balances At the start of a new financial year you need to determine the starting inventory balance for any new simulation for the new year While each fiscal year has a separate simulation code you may find that once you have completed a simulation for a fiscal year some of that year s inventory is still available for consumption by LIFO or FIFO at the start of the new financial year In this situation you can copy the unallocated inventory from the prior simulation into the current simulation However before that can be done you must freeze the completed simulation using IES Simulation Freeze 30 18 1 9 IES Simulation Freeze 30 18 1 9 ES Siiulalion F iine os Meru Edd Gueue Optore Hep SS 2 0 Ba 2 2 Simulation FIFOU994 Derciption FIFO Valuation 1399 Calculation Method FIFO Simulating Year 1349 ean Data Generation Period aafoases To aasaniss Take Begining Balance Fiom la this Simulation Frozen pes TES N FisHelp Fiebo ESC Emd Fo Delete Coll Cut Copp Paste Ps Freezing a simulation marks the simulation results as final and prevents any further updates to the simulation data
291. n Data Using IES Delete Archive 30 18 1 24 24 you can delete and archive simulations that are no longer required IES Delete Archive 30 18 1 24 24 ES Debeietaachies ols UH Edt Queue Opoe Help CN B Simulation FUPOPOO FIFO aluatean Delete ANIES Simulation Dalia ma Delete Simulation Period Data mo Delete Simulation inventuey Dada rn Delete Simulation BOM Data no Delete Simulation Rouling Data rn Archive IES Simulation Data Auchiwe File ere Fi Help Fi Go ESC Eed Wexl Prev Onl Cul Copy Paste You must first supply a simulation set code When you have entered a valid code the description of that simulation set is shown You may then choose to delete all data for the selected simulation set or to optionally delete specific types of data You are then prompted if you want to archive the data as well If you enter Yes then an archive file is created with a filename of format TE000725 where 00 is the current year 07 the current month and 25 the current day After a validation question the process of archiving and deleting begins Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 414 European Accounting User Guide Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 12 Shipping Documents European Accounting extends MFG PRO s standard shipping document facilities to additional stock issue and transfer functions
292. n Matching Enter Yes or No Setting this flag to Yes enables GL transaction matching functionality allowing you to match debit transactions in the General Ledger to their corresponding credit transactions or vice versa Refer to Chapter 3 General Ledger Submit Discount Proposed Drafts Enter Yes or No Determines if functionality to allow the submission and discounting of proposed drafts is enabled When this flag is set to Yes you will be able to use Single Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 9 and Multiple Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 10 to submit and discount proposed drafts as well as customer approved drafts When this flag is set to No you will only be able to use these functions to submit and discount approved drafts Refer to Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable Separate Submission Discounting Enter Yes or No Determines whether it is possible to submit and then separately discount a draft using either Single Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 9 or Multiple Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 10 If this flag is set to No a draft cannot be separately submitted and discounted the submission and discounting have to be performed together Refer to Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable A second window with various control settings is shown when you have made your entries into the first window Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 10 European Accounting User Guide Control File Settings E uipea Actium Conleed File Use Enhanced
293. n Routing would be generated but the Mean Data Generation program would simply copy the standard labor cost from the Item s GL Cost record directly into the appropriate field in the IES Cost and Quantities table Issue Costs The IES Structure Cost Roll Up rolls up lower level cost but also applies the LIFO or FIFO evaluation rules to any issue quantities to determine which inventories are allocated to which time bucket It also calculates the total mean issue cost which is done by applying LIFO FIFO rules to the inventory providing actual issues have been made during the specified period For example using LIFO rules if inventory is available in the relevant time bucket in which the inventory is issued the issue cost will be the same as the receipt cost If however there is insufficient inventory within a given bucket to satisfy that bucket s consumption requirements the inventory could be issued from the current bucket as well as from the previous one If this were the case the receipt cost of each individual issuing bucket would be computed to allow a weighted average consumption cost to be calculated The only exception to the above rules is if production is booked via Receipts Backward Exploded 3 12 which creates transaction history records of type RCT WO but does not create one of type WO CLOSE Consider the following example In a particular time bucket a work order receipt has been made but there is no works order accou
294. n Voucher Maintenance 28 1 1 and voucher payment functions Compensation to Third Parties Report This report lists the amounts of withholding tax due for payment to the authorities in the selected month You select the range of suppliers to be covered by the report Use Compensation to Third Party Rpt 2 13 15 4 11 to create this report Compensation to Third Party Report 2 13 15 4 11 Supplier The range of suppliers to be covered by the report Year The year to be covered Month The actual month to be covered Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 468 European Accounting User Guide Only withholding tax to pay Enter Yes or No If you enter Yes only those withholding tax amounts that you are about to pay will be included in the report If you enter No all withholding tax liabilities from the specified period will be shown Reporting Currency The currency in which the report will be printed By default this is your database s base currency Once you have made your entries you can create your report An example of the output that could be generated using this report is shown below Compensation to Third Party Rpt Output euwhtrp2 p c7la 2 13 15 4 11 Compensation to Third Party Rpt Date 16 03 01 Page 1 EA to eB TEST ENVI RONMENT Time 15 45 24 PRINT OF THE REIMBURSEMENTS TO THIRD PARTIES MONTH November YEAR 2000 Address Name Ref Date Ref Year Services VAT Reason FFC WH A m
295. n of bill to of planned payment Customer Type Selection of customer type of open Dr Cr memo related to planned payment Reference Selection of reference of open Dr Cr memo related to planned payment AR Type Selection of AR type of open Dr Cr memo related to planned payment Credit Terms Selection of credit terms of open Dr Cr memo related to planned payment Entity Selection of entity of open Dr Cr memo related to planned payment Batch Selection of batch of open Dr Cr memo related to planned payment Currency The currency of the report that is generated by this function Bank Selection of bank of planned payment Payment Method Selection of payment method of planned payment New Bank New bank of planned payment Change in Payment Selection Yes or open AR memo Change in AR memos Yes Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 225 New Payment Method New payment method of planned payment Change in Payment Selection Yes or open AR memo Change in AR memos Yes New Due Date New due date of planned payment Change in Payment Selection Yes or open AR memo Change in AR memos Yes When left blank or set to a question mark the due date remains unaffected Report Currency The report currency When left blank base currency is taken Display Only Enter Yes or No to control if the update is made or if the report just lists the changes that will be made to the payment se
296. n quantity of an item is the sum of the values found in this field and the WO Iss Qty field Not Alloc Qty The Not Allocated Quantity shows the value of all receipts made during the period of the I E S simulation that have not been allocated to consumption quantities as part of the LIFO or FIFO calculation The value of this field is also used by the IES Inventory Evaluation Report 30 18 5 together with the mean reception price of the item to calculate the LIFO or FIFO valuation of the inventory At the end of the fiscal year these remaining unallocated receipts from the previous year s simulation can be copied into the simulation for the new financial year using IES Beginning Balance Copy 30 18 1 3 Thus the starting inventory balance for the new fiscal year is the value held in this field The final fields at the foot of this screen are shown in tabular form giving the mean receipt price for items divided into four types of transactions Items received via purchase orders are shown in the Mean Cost PO column those received via work orders are shown in the Mean Cost WO column The total receipts made via purchase orders and work orders are calculated by the Cost Roll Up functions and are shown in the Mean Cost Reception column A weighted average of the total number of items consumed is shown in the Mean Cost Consumption column These four transaction types are further sub divided into various cost categories to show the mean prices of the
297. names need to be entered here the AR payment file directory the AR drafts file directory and the AP payment file directory These directory names determine where European Accounting is going to put the payment files created by AR or AP payment selections The company address is used as the address of the supplying party on printed or electronic payment media Automatic Payment Control File Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 203 Automatic Payment Control File 2 Automatic Payment Control File 3 fulomalie Payer Contre File Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 204 European Accounting User Guide Some of the fields on these screens relate to Swift the Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunication and to certain external payment formats in the Netherlands ABN AMRO BTL 91 Belgium and Germany The data needed for external payments is often required by national banks or statistical offices The selection screen for ABN AMRO Swift is only shown when payment methods are defined in your system using the ABN AMRO Swift bank format driver Swift is a network with which banks can perform world wide Accounts Payable payments between banks For Swift additional data is required Fields from the above screens that relate to Swift are described below AR Payment File Directory The name of the directory where European Accounting should put
298. nctionality found in MFG PRO s standard Cost Management module LE S is primarily intended to allow the fiscal valuation of inventory and includes both LIFO and FIFO evaluation methods This chapter looks at the extensive set of procedures added for I E S which allow inventory evaluations to be performed true mean prices to be calculated and simulations to be made The following topics are covered Using LE S Setting up the Simulation Generating Mean Simulation Data Cost Rollups Data Resynchronization Reporting Setting Inventory Balances Maintaining and Using Completed Simulation Data Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 362 European Accounting User Guide Using I E S Using LE S you can e Perform off line evaluation of inventory using LIFO or FIFO evaluation methods e Calculate mean purchase prices e Calculate mean routings based on closed work orders e Calculate mean bill of materials based on closed work orders e Perform inventory evaluations e Make simulated routings using all routing data e Make simulated bills of materials e Exclude items and locations from the inventory evaluation LE S processes existing inventory related transactions and performs a new evaluation based on those transactions In addition to the standard simulation functionality offered by MFG PRO with LE S you can also make simulated product structures Bills Of Material or BOMs and you can simulate all routi
299. nd balance for balance sheet accounts is posted to the Year End Closing Balance Account and Cost Center and is re instated from the Year End Opening Balance account and the cost center specified here This cost center can only be specified if the Create Opening Trans At Year End flag is set to Yes Opening Balance Description The GL description as it will appear on the relevant reports and inquiries in the opening balance records created by Transaction Year End Close 25 13 12 Suppress Period Re open Enter Yes or No to determine if closed GL periods can be re opened using Calendar Maintenance 25 3 4 These periods can only be re opened if the relevant year has not yet been closed with Transaction Year End Close 25 13 12 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 56 European Accounting User Guide European Accounting also adds an audit trail detailing any changes made to any of these records This is particularly useful if any previously closed GL periods are re opened Use Master File Audit Detail 36 17 2 with euco_ctrl as the filename to view this audit trail Improvements in Reports A number of new General Ledger reports have been added to MFG PRO by European Accounting e Italian Statement of Account 25 15 11 Reconciles entries on GL accounts to the relevant sub ledgers e Account Sheet Report 25 15 10 Verifies the accuracy of GL accounts over a specified time period using the contra account bookings for ea
300. nformation Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods An important feature of European Accounting is that it allows you to create Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable automatic payments in several European formats European Accounting allows you to select open vouchers or invoices and gives you the opportunity to convert that selection into printed payments or payments on electronic media The actual transfer into printed forms or electronic media is done with so called bank format drivers Several bank format drivers are available To be able to perform automatic payments European Accounting has changed and added fields to Bank Maintenance 26 13 27 6 1 and 28 9 1 For Accounts Receivable payments direct debit and drafts the Automatic Payments Menu 27 6 4 is available For Accounts Payable payments the Automatic Payments Menu 28 9 4 is available The following topics are covered Payment Methods Payment Selection Logic Automatic Payments Examples Automatic Payments Control File Defining Payment Methods Additional Swift Data Accounts Receivable Accounts Payable Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 186 European Accounting User Guide Payment Methods European Accounting adds payments methods both on the Accounts Receivable side and on the Accounts Payable side On the Accounts Payable side the payments methods replace the standard MFG PRO check form A payment me
301. ng data LES is located on the Inventory Evaluation Simulation Menu 30 18 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation Menu 30 18 E idptan Acbiunbrg Demo g ddh Li 4 E Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 363 Special Considerations and Limitations While using I E S you must be aware of the following e In order to use I E S you must have MFG PRO s Cost Management Module e LES is limited to a single database It is not site specific It works by aggregating all the data from within a single database regardless of whether the information in the database is for multiple sites or entities Evaluations are only available in your database s base currency which may cause problems if different sites entities need to file returns in different currencies Some of these sites or entities may also require the use of either LIFO or FIFO evaluation methods depending on their location In this situation each site or entity would need to maintain its own separate database in order to be able to identify and process the site entity specific data e As LE S is designed for off line processing you must ensure all source data processing is completed before commencing I E S processing e Work in Progress items are not taken into consideration during the simulation Only purchased and finished items are valued during the I E S process e 6LE S is not designed
302. ngle Item 3 4 1 e Issues Unplanned 3 7 This functionality is extended by European Accounting to allow you to enter the default account and cost centers to be used when processing unplanned issues or unplanned receipts Refer to Unplanned Issues Receipts e Purchase Order Returns 5 13 7 e Sales Order Shipments 7 9 15 European Accounting extends shipper functionality to allow you to create shipping documents from the following additional functions when the Use Enhanced Global Shipping flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 is set to Yes e Work Order Component Issue 16 10 e Repetitive Labor Transaction 18 14 e Backflush Transaction 18 22 13 e Rework Transaction 18 22 17 e Repetitive Picklist Transfer 18 22 3 6 and 18 3 6 e Call Activity Recording 11 1 1 13 e RMA Maintenance 11 7 1 1 e RMA Shipments 11 7 1 16 e RTS Shipments 11 7 3 16 e Material Order Maintenance 10 7 1 e Material Order Shipments 10 7 6 Shippers are typically required when moving inventory between two different physical locations and can be used for both in bound and out bound goods movements MFG PRO supports shippers for Purchase Order and Scheduled Order Receipts and allows the recording of a supplier s shipper or packing slip for Purchase Order Receipts If an issue transaction results in the physical movement of goods at is provided the necessary shipping and inventory groups have already been set up using MFG
303. nic formats or pre printed forms Various bankformat drivers are supported by European Accounting Bankslip The term by which bank statements are referred to within European Accounting Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc Glossary Beginning Balance The opening balance of a particular General Ledger Account or bank account at the beginning of a specified time period Billet Ordre Relev BOR The French Billet Ordre Relev is a customer initiated drafts that is raised by a customer and sent directly to the supplier s bank for payment Bolla The Italian Bolle d Accompagnamento Merci A shipping document which used to be a legal requirement in Italy for all goods movements Now known as the Documento di Trasporto Bolle d Accompagnamento Merci See Bolla C CAB Code An Italian feature A code forming part of a bank account code that represents the subsidiary of a bank at which a particular account is held This code is used for the purposes of electronic banking QAD Inc 494 Correction Invoice A document containing corrected information for an invoice which has already been posted D Daybooks See Journal Declarant A company address for which transactions are reported for a country and a number of entities Intrastat declarations are made for declarants Direct Debit An electronic order to a bank telling them to transfer the amount specified from a custome
304. nned payments Max Amount to Select A maximum amount to select for payment by this payment selection in the currency of the bank account When you leave this amount empty no maximum amount is taken Max Amt Base For display purposes only Max Amt Curr translated to base currency Reconcile Credit Memos Enter Yes or No to specify if you want to reconcile open credit amounts with selected debit amounts If you choose not to reconcile then planned payments are created up to the balance of the supplier Amounts to pay may not exceed the balance of the supplier When the payment method is defined By document type 3 then this option is not updateable Amount Prev Selection The amount already selected in the payment selection in base currency Allow Payment gt Balance Enter Yes or No to specify if you want the selection program to allow the total amount selected for payment to be greater then the supplier s current balance This could be the case when the Reconcile Credit Memos flag is set to No Show Not Selected Enter Yes or No to specify if the selection program should also show vouchers that are not selected for payment together with the reason why these vouchers have not been selected Reconcile Credit Memos Enter Yes or No to specify if you want to reconcile open credit amounts with selected debit amounts If you choose not to reconcile then planned payments are created up to the balance of the supplier Amounts to pay may not exc
305. nsactions so allowing year end adjustments to be easily identified Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc 497 QAD Inc 498 European Accounting User Guide Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc
306. nsactions from other types of JL transactions Credit Account This defaults to the sales cash account specified in the System Account Control File 36 1 You may enter any valid account sub account and cost center of your choice GL Description The description to be used for each GL transaction line generated by the process Undo Previous Selection Enter Yes or No Allows the reversal of a withholding tax payment previously made The setting of the Update GL flag determines if you want a GL transaction to be created when the withholding tax liability is settled The creation of such an entry is optional as you may offset withholding tax liabilities against other tax items such as advance corporation tax or you may pay it together with other taxes If you do let the system generate a GL transaction it will be of type JL In Italy withheld tax falls due for settlement to the authorities on the 15 of the month following the creation of the withholding tax liability By entering the first and last days of the previous month in the Date Paid field all the relevant withholding tax vouchers in that period will be identified Alternatively use one of the other selection criteria to create a list of withholding vouchers due for payment Once you have made your entries a list of vouchers whose associated withholding tax is due for settlement is then displayed You can choose whether or not you wish to settle your withholding tax liability for each
307. nt against the invoice Any tax value associated with the invoice is transferred from the Suspended VAT Account to the Sales Tax Account for the appropriate tax code Typically invoices with Suspended VAT are excluded from Tax Reports but a separate Suspended VAT report is available As soon as such invoices are fully or partially paid then they will appear on Tax Reports with the tax date set to the effective date of the last payment against the invoice Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 274 European Accounting User Guide VAT on Petty Cash Transactions European Accounting provides an additional feature that allows you to create GL journal transactions for petty cash transactions that include VAT This function Standard Transaction with GTM 25 13 5 is a modified version of Standard Transaction Maintenance 25 13 1 which allows tax to be calculated for selected journal lines Standard Transaction with GTM creates GTM records which can then be reported using European Accounting VAT reports Standard Transaction with GTM header screen The header screen for this function is virtually identical to that of Standard Transaction Maintenance except you are also asked to enter some tax defaults The Type may be either Voucher default or Memo This setting determines whether the created tax records should be reported on either Accounts Payable or Accounts Receivable Tax Reports The From and To Zones are used to dete
308. nting close for the work order concerned In this case the following rules will apply e If there are other work orders for the same item in the same time bucket that have been accounting closed then works orders that have not been accounting closed will be valued at the mean receipt cost of the accounting closed work orders e If there are no other work orders for the same item in the same time bucket that have been accounting closed then standard bills and routings will be used to create IES Mean Product Structures and Routings These will be rolled up together with the mean costs for the component items to generate the mean manufactured cost for the end product Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 368 European Accounting User Guide Unplanned Transactions Receipts of unplanned transactions only affect the calculation of the receipt quantity not the receipt cost The only exception to this is the special data take on situation where historical transactions are entered as unplanned receipts Consider the following examples Example 1 If only unplanned transactions have been made within a given time bucket the receipted quantity would reflect the unplanned transactions but the mean cost would be zero because unplanned transactions do not count towards the calculation of the mean cost of an item In this situation you could use Item Cost and Qty s Maintenance 30 18 1 13 prior to starting the evaluation to manually
309. ntity 10 Amani 357 50 Dipen Amount 352 50 EUR Dagbook DB 5 Dlece H Cimi EUR Cosh Aone 2170 Amount SR Ph Dimm Changes Ack Amount E DE Hank Claaing fect 100 Amaun b52 8 GL Relmence Lim Accomm Subvicct Cc Enty Amount ARTIS eR 0iisch 1 fib iih wz 0 CR AR DT 0326000053 1 ona E 50 Qucclon i Fj Ane bariazio barnesi ae Once the transactions are shown you are asked to verify if all the transactions are correct If you enter Yes to this question the transactions will then be effectuated The actual GL entries made will be different depending on the type of submission discounting operation performed as will the resulting status of the draft The following table shows the GL transactions that would be created for an approved draft for the amount of 117 50 submitted and discounted in European Accounting s default manner that is in one combined submission and discounting operation when the Separate Submission and Discounting flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 is set to No Please note that in this example the draft discount charge is 17 50 DR CR Draft PIP Account 100 00 Disc Charges Account 17 50 Drafts Receivable 117 50 The draft now has a status of Submitted However if you were submitting a proposed draft under the same circumstances additional GL entries would have to be generated before the above GL entries could be made As the creation of a proposed draft does not have any GL effect a pr
310. ntity of the memo equals the entity of the bank account If this is not the case then the memo may not be selected The total amount selected to pay may not exceed the customer balance unless the option Allow payment gt balance is set to Yes The way the actual payments or drafts for the selected memos will be created depends on the Due setting This setting has three options 1 Not by due date only one total payment per bill to is created for all selected open memos in this payment selection Selected open memos are sorted by bill to and due date one payment is created by due date of the selected memos For each individual open memo a payment is made This also means that for selected credit memos a negative payment check is created Please be aware that this possibility might cause problems with electronic payment media which normally cannot handle negative amounts With the automatic payment selection the system marks Dr Cr memos for you based on the selection rules you supply Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 222 European Accounting User Guide Manual Selection Use AR Payment Selection Manual 27 6 4 2 if you wish to create payments manually Manual selection of open AR memos A ayer selez hon Aaa With this program you can create new planned payments or modify existing planned payments Three windows are available In the top window you can enter selections for Dr Cr memos and you c
311. ntory Transaction History File and the Shop Floor Operation History File and for each period defined it calculates the receipts for each item in terms of quantity Mean receipt costs can then be calculated for the following types of transaction e Purchase Order receipts e Supplier Schedule receipts e Work Order receipts e Receipts against Repetitive Schedules Other types of receipt have no effect on the mean receipt cost except in the special data take on situation where existing historical receipts made before the implementation of MFG PRO can be added as unplanned receipts and treated as though they were at the standard cost for those items For purchased items the mean data generation program calculates the mean purchase price and records all issues of items for each individual period It then generates a mean product structure for each item based on the quantities received against work orders that have been accounting closed in the relevant period It also generates mean routings for such work orders including cumulative orders for repetitive schedules Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 365 Receipts Consumption TULLE Period Lots
312. nts Receivable 115 You can enter the customer and the unapplied draft The unapplied reference is used to find the unique unapplied draft Next you can enter the date of reconciliation default today and the effective date of the transaction default today This information is used for the next frame in which you can select invoices memos to be reconciled against the unapplied draft Entering memos 27 6 6 14 Amount to Apply The total amount to apply Open Amount The amount of the draft that has not yet been reconciled You can only apply invoices in base currency or in one non base currency but only if the draft was also in this non base currency You must also apply unapplied drafts completely they cannot be applied with two different applications After this the invoices memos receive an applied amount equal to the amount entered here and the draft is booked in GL with the appropriate accounts and cost centers Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 116 European Accounting User Guide Reporting of Drafts European Accounting has enhanced various inquiries and reports relating to drafts e Draft Inquiry 27 6 6 2 e Draft Report 27 6 6 3 e Draft Summary Register 27 6 6 4 Draft Inquiry Draft Inquiry 27 6 6 2 has been modified to show the payment method used for a draft and any unapplied or non AR distribution lines In addition when the facility to submit proposed drafts to the bank has been en
313. nvoice History Report oi harvtinte Hido R pa User Mere Edt Queue E tce Selection Criteria Invoice amp Ta Sales Order Taf mme Clear Print Exit Correction Invoices Enter Yes or No Indicates whether correction invoices will be shown on the report Similarly a new column has been added to Invoice History Browse 7 13 7 to indicate whether the displayed invoice is a Correction Invoice or not Invoice History Browse i Inve Hiimy Bee 1 m Une Her Edi Blaegele Corky Daions laii Help oloje ajala Saju Kael six r L n 18942 Fo 130 100 1 1247 8 l I 70 100 i ia ia i 1h 10000 1 10 1090000 170 100 FisHalp FieGe Ffefiptons E C End ALT F T mpn Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 444 European Accounting User Guide Cor Enter Yes or No Indicates whether an invoice is a correction invoice Yes or a standard one No Archiving Correction Invoices In order to archive correction Invoice data and to delete Correction Invoices from the system a specific Archive Delete function has been created Archive Correction Invoices 7 13 22 The function is quite similar to MFG PRO s standard Invoice History Delete Archive 7 13 23 The main difference is that Archive Correction Invoices also deletes the data that keeps the link between the original invoice and their corrections Archive Correction Invoices Sif Ines mi xj Sa gt ce Corre
314. nvoices Printing a correction invoice Invosce Prp Correction Invoices Enter Yes or No Indicates whether you want to print correction invoices or standard invoices When this flag is set to Yes the figures on the correction invoice will be shown in three sections e Before Correction the original value e After Correction the corrected values e Correction the difference between the original and the corrected values These three sections are displayed for line items as well as for the trailer amounts The same flag has been added to Closed Invoice Re print 7 13 12 to allow correction invoices to be printed from that function too Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 13 Correction Invoices 441 Sales Order Control File Correction Invoices have a separate invoice numbering scheme Two fields have been added to the Sales Order Control File 7 1 24 to control this numbering Sales Order Control file Correction Invoice Prefix Prefix used specifically for correction invoices Next Correction Invoice Nbr First correction invoice number available for assignment Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 442 European Accounting User Guide Correction Invoices Link Report European Accounting adds a new report Correction Invoices Link Report 7 13 6 This report displays the relationship between original invoices and their associated correction invoices You can select a range
315. ny Control Fil Yom End Closing Balance Acct Gia Closing BS fuk Yea End Closing Balance Coat Centre Clowng Balance De eoipioe Foar End Closing Create Opening iranz at Yea Ene no Tear End Opening Balance oct EOP Opening BS Subs Yaar End Opening Balances Con Centre Opening Balance Description rear End Re Dpen Guppies Pernod Ae open ju aaa ee Se Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 3 General Ledger 55 Make entries into the relevant fields Year End Closing Balance Acct The GL account code of the account in which the accumulated balance of the whole year for balance sheet accounts is to be recorded When a fiscal year is closed using Transaction Year End Close 25 13 12 the year end balance for balance sheet accounts is calculated and posted to the account specified here Closing BS Sub The GL account code of the sub account in which the accumulated balance of the whole year for balance sheet accounts is to be recorded Year End Closing Balance Cost Center The GL cost center to which the accumulated balance of the whole year for balance sheet accounts is to be posted When a fiscal year is closed using Transaction Year End Close 25 13 12 the year end balance for balance sheet accounts is calculated and posted to the cost center specified here Closing Balance Description The GL description as it will appear on the relevant reports and inquiries in the year end closin
316. o see the rest of the number Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 160 European Accounting User Guide PO Receipts by Supplier Within a multi national environment you need to be able to distinguish between PO receipts received from regular suppliers and those received from any inter company suppliers Standard MFG PRO does not support such functionality as the PO receipt account cost center is linked to the product lines for inventory items and defined centrally in the System Account Control File 36 1 for expenses European Accounting adds a new frame to Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 which allows you to define both PO Receipts Accounts and Expensed Item Receipts Accounts by supplier and to see the relevant account cost centers Supplier Maintenance User Mera Eee gume Qpin Help Supplier address Seppie EURO SUPP Tenge no Hams European Accounting Supple Addit Addrews Ahh Ciy Siae Paw Foimak County FAANCE FA Cumiy Aention tig Tekephona Exi BPE Ext Fou Teles ek Added a5 foafo4 Purchase Order Eeceipt ccoonts PlfeopteAofram Oooo Eoo Erpensed lene Recce Aet 2702 OOo ooo Now whenever a PO receipt account sub account or cost center is determined from the product line the system checks to see if an account has been set for the relevant supplier and if one has that account is used Similarly whenever expensed items receipts
317. o be covered in the report If left blank all sub account codes will be included in the report Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 60 European Accounting User Guide Cost Ctr The range of cost centers to be covered in the report If left blank all cost centers will be included in the report This can only be set if the Use Cost Centers flag in the GL Control File 25 24 is set to Yes Effective The range of effective dates to be covered by the report Every transaction must have an effective date This date determines when a transaction actually takes effect in the General Ledger The dates specified here must cover dates contained in the GL Calendar By default if no dates are specified this report covers the period between the first date of the first period and the current date Currency Setting this to your database s base currency causes all transactions of any currency to be included in your GL Account Sheet report where they will be shown in the base currency regardless of their original currency Entering a currency other than the base one here creates a report which includes only those transactions which were originally carried out in the specified currency These transactions are reported in their original currency Round to Nearest Whole Unit Enter Yes or No to determine if decimal amounts should be printed in the report or not Yes causes any decimal amounts to be rounded up to the nearest whole number in
318. o pass your bank charges associated with the draft reversal onto your customer This will create a financial charge memo that can be handled in the usual way including GL transactions Note The bank charge is for reference only Once drafts have been reversed they are stored in your database as unpaid drafts European Accounting adds functionality to allow unpaid drafts to be included on dunning letters If you reverse drafts which have previously been closed you will not be able to re approve them Instead you must create new drafts Unapplied Drafts In European Accounting drafts can be made without having an invoice available In order to do this you can create an unapplied distribution line for a draft as in Accounts Payable When the appropriate invoice then becomes available the draft can be applied to this invoice using the separate function Unapplied Draft Application 27 6 6 14 This works in a similar way to the standard MFG PRO Unapplied Payment Reconciliation function found in Accounts Payable Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 113 Entering Unapplied Drafts You can create unapplied drafts using either Proposed Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 1 or Approved Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 8 Unapplied Draft Register To check the available unapplied draft and the applications made to these drafts Unapplied Draft Register 27 6 6 13 provides an overview of the drafts and the inv
319. ocation Maint 30 18 1 21 to mark locations that are not needed in the evaluation Locations not entered are assumed to be included For example locations typically excluded from an inventory evaluation are those holding either written off or consignment stock which is needed for planning purposes but cannot be valued as the company does not yet hold title to those goods You can exclude specific locations within individual sites from a specific I E S simulation set or you can exclude a location from all sites from a simulation set You can also exclude site and location combinations from all I E S simulation sets Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 384 European Accounting User Guide Quantities of items that are held in excluded locations are included in the calculation of an item s mean receipt cost but are excluded from the calculation of the total inventory quantity and values as shown on the valuation reports IES Excluded Location Maintenance 30 18 1 21 HES Excluded Locateon Maint Usi Meu Edt Ques pire Hap ILI Samaai FAO AO FIFO Yalan Simulation Year 2000 Site OMMU Locatie 4i Desoiptope Consignenent localizan EEEE FisHeip Fe Ge ESCeEnd FisDekte Orbit Cut Copp Paste Generating Mean Simulation Data You are now ready to generate the simulation data There are three ways in which you can do this one generates the data automatically while the other two are manual methods e
320. od of the payment selection Date For display purposes only The date of the payment selection Time For display purposes only The time of the payment selection on the date Filename The filename for the media should the media be a file Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 249 Deleting Archiving of Payment Selections In this version of European Accounting a new Payment Selection Delete Archive function has been added for AP selections This works like the standard MFG PRO delete archive functions Payment Selection Delete Archive Papmernd Salecton Delele Apchive Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 250 European Accounting User Guide Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes European Accounting has added a number of enhancements and some new reports for Value Added Tax VAT and other taxes These enhancements are discussed in this chapter The following topics are covered VAT Registers Suspended VAT VAT on Petty Cash Transactions AP and AR VAT List Credit Terms Discount Account per Tax Class Withholding Tax Setting Taxable Details for Address Data Project Realization Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 252 European Accounting User Guide VAT Registers VAT registers provide a means of grouping together accounting transact
321. od of transport or ship via In Intrastat Transport Maintenance 2 22 1 19 5 the MFG PRO Ship via field can be enhanced with the Intrastat transport code a description and a declaration of whether or not a port is mandatory Intrastat Transport Maintenance oi liaan Tithe Malema Shipvia The standard MFG PRO ship via code This code is validated against generalized codes so_shipvia Transport Mode The Intrastat code for this method of transport Description The description of the ship via Port Mandatory Enter Yes or No to specify if a port must be specified or not If set to Yes an Intrastat popup windows will appear and you will be prompted to enter a port A browse function Intrastat Transport Browse is also available for transport methods Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 340 European Accounting User Guide Intrastat Transport Browse Intake Tinnspert kinsi 1 oS o o ajajaj jaju s a RESTERA 1 a Boat Tia beerterdan Shipvia The standard MFG PRO ship via code with which to start the inquiry The browse shows the MFG PRO Ship Via the Intrastat Ship Via the description and if a port is mandatory Statistical Value Calculation Intrastat reports the statistical value of goods at the border This value should include transportation costs up to the border insurance etc In Stat Value Calc Maintenance 2 22 1 19 1 charges can be entered for combinations of method of delivery F
322. of any particular date only over a range of dates European Accounting adds the Unvouchered Receipts Report 5 13 10 to allow you to do this in much the same way as you can already report aged creditors and inventory on a past effective date using standard MFG PRO functionality This gives you the means to reconcile not only the PO Receipts Account s but also the Expensed Items Receipts Account too Unvouchered Receipts Report 5 13 10 Unvouckened beceipic Haput Aa of Date E d Show Puchars Ficpts Few F lerrentory Ibema pei Subreontaciod Item yr Memo Itema pri Use Total Std Coat na Currency Summatye na Ouipul Fi Hulp F2 G0 ESC Fed CobX Cot CebC Copy Chl Pacte The fields here are the same as those found in the standard MFG PRO Purchase Order Receipts Report 5 13 5 which offers similar functionality to that found here with the exception of the following fields As of Date The specific date for which you want the report produced Account The range of accounts to be covered by the report Sub Account The range of sub accounts to be covered by the report Cost Ctr The range of cost centers to be covered by the report Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 158 European Accounting User Guide Exclude Unconfirmed Vouchers Enter Yes or No to indicate if you wish the report to exclude unconfirmed vouchers from the calculation of unvouchered receipt amounts
323. of QAD Inc QAD Inc 150 European Accounting User Guide Payment Inquiry 28 9 11 has also been changed by European Accounting Payment Inquiry Payment aque Bank AA DUZE fount 117 56 Bate 1570 01 Lie Stata therhive 15 08 st1 fron Tre WH et Meth BC i dios Currency ENE The payment method has been added as a selection criterion Payment Register 28 9 12 has also been modified by the addition of a new option Unapplied Only Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 5 Accounts Payable 151 Payment Register Unapplied Only Enter Yes or No to indicate if this report should just list unapplied payments Unapplied AP Payments In European Accounting you can make payments without having a voucher available In order to do this you can make just as you can in Accounts Receivable an unapplied distribution line of a check When the voucher becomes available you can then apply the payment to this voucher using a separate function Reconciliation Unapplied Payments 28 9 20 This function works in a similar way to AR s Unapplied Payment Application function Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 152 European Accounting User Guide Entering Unapplied Payments You can create unapplied payments in Payment Manual Checks 28 9 10 When you leave the voucher number blank in the distribution line standard MFG PRO automatically marks the line as Non AP and disp
324. oices memos against which they have been applied You can select a customer for who you want to see the unapplied drafts and their application Unapplied draft register entering selection criteria 27 6 6 13 Depending of the selection criteria a report will be produced Unapplied Drafts Register Report 27 6 6 13 Date Cash Acct Bill To Name T Exch Rate Amount Eff Date Enty Dsc Acct 0100 Hans Maier D 200 00 14 12 00 1000 1300 0 USD 1 0 14 12 00 3910 Reference Type Enty Account Cash Amt Discount Amt Unassigned Amt Non AR Amt unapp rf Unapp 1000 1200 1000533 Memo 1000 1200 The last part of the report shows the totals per currency Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 114 European Accounting User Guide Totals per currency eudmrp02 p c7la 27 6 6 13 Unapplied Draft Register Date 26 03 01 Page 6 European Accounting Demo Time 13 07 25 Base At Base Total Curr Ex 1 50000 5 31000 492125984 1 616 00000 1 60000 1 00000 End of Report Curr Every different draft s currency found in this report Curr Total Sum of all draft amounts in this currency Base Total Every different draft s currency found in this report Application of Unapplied Drafts Unapplied Draft Application 27 6 6 14 allows the application of unapplied drafts to invoices memos Entering unapplied drafts 27 6 6 14 vere Lipa Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accou
325. ok vouchers to a waiting expenses account so that vouchers can be entered and VAT deducted before the final distribution is known e Addition of a credit terms discount account per tax class functionality e Stock evaluation with FIFO or LIFO logic based on a real mean stock evaluation logic e Various Italian specific features Refer to Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues e A report showing all AR AP transactions that exceed the amount of 500 000 pesetas or any other amount selected by the user Spanish specific feature e Ability to void AR checks offering similar functionality to that already found in standard MFG PRO for AP checks Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 4 European Accounting User Guide Intrastat The completion of the single European market on 31 December 1992 has resulted in important changes regarding VAT All custom s formalities and document checking at borders within the European Union were abolished from 1 January 1993 However trade statistics are of vital importance for governments and business corporations Therefore Intrastat was introduced as the new system for collecting foreign trade statistics on the movement of tangible goods between countries of the EU The standard MFG PRO Intrastat functions do not include the country specific reports and the capability to calculate the required statistical values For European Accounting the following Intrastat country versions are avai
326. olding tax Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 303 Deleting and Archiving Withholding Tax Data Withholding Tax Delete Archive 2 13 15 4 23 allows you to delete withholding tax records from your database and to archive data Archived records can be reloaded using MFG PRO s standard Archive File Reload 36 16 5 Withholding Tax Delete Archive Withholding tax records can only be deleted or archived once the appropriate withholding tax amounts have been settled with the tax authorities using Withholding Tax Payment 2 13 15 4 7 and you have sent the supplier a withholding tax certificate which shows those transactions Taxable Details for Address Data In standard MFG PRO the default value of the Taxable field for all address data is No which means that tax details do not need to be entered when any shipping addresses are added to your database However the majority of users manually set this flag to Yes when entering address data to ensure that the relevant tax details must also be added European Accounting has enhanced the Global Tax Management Control File 2 13 24 to allow you to control whether or not tax details should be entered by default when new address data is added to your database A new field Default Taxable allows you to specify the default setting of the Taxable field in all functions where address data can be added Proprietary information Property of
327. on set are displayed automatically when you enter a valid code and you can make entries into the other fields which are identical for both functions Period The period of the I E S Simulation set from which you wish to copy the simulated routings or product structures Item Number Range of item numbers for which the simulated routings or product structures have to be copied to standard Start Effective The start effective date for the copied routing or product structure End Effective The end effective date for the copied routing or product structure Overwrite Existing Enter Yes or No to specify if you want to close an existing routing or product structure If you answer Yes then any active routings or product structures on the start effective date are closed on the day previous to this effective date If you have decided not to close existing routings or product structures any active routings or product structures found are skipped Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 412 European Accounting User Guide Deleting Period Data In a simulation you can decide to delete a number of periods and the data associated with these periods using IES Delete Sets of Period Data 30 18 1 24 7 You can then manually maintain those periods as required IES Delete Sets of Period Data 13 18 1 24 7 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 413 Deleting Simulatio
328. one purchase order they must all lie within the same VAT register Alternatively if no purchase order is available then the VAT register operation code and site default from the relevant supplier s records You can use the browse facility to select an alternative VAT register operation code or site from the one displayed should you so wish Voucher Maintenance 28 1 1 Vouchet Mainlenance me E UserMena Ed Queue Options Hep BiG 1 ie te Baich 1001 Conic a aaa Totak t eaa Voucher Comtot a on Eileotive sayfoa o ERS no 1003 Total 9 00 Tas s 23 03 01 Supple EUROSUPP European seceding Reet Te EUROSUPP Ewopean Atrpanimiy Ship Te 10000 Quality Predhects Ime z WAT Register EA Dleraton Code e She Hald Aant 8 08 E Himki Ami ii 3h Dagbook 8 2 Auto Select no FlsHelp Fe Ge ESC End Chla Cil C Copy Chl Pacie After the registration of the voucher header the system assigns the selected VAT register to the voucher During the registration of a voucher s distribution lines the system checks the consistency of the VAT registers It will display an error message if you attempt to record a voucher line with a tax code linked to a different VAT register This tax code is determined based upon the Tax Types defined within the tax environment Tax Usage and Tax Class for each voucher distribution line Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 26
329. operty of QAD Inc QAD Inc 125 Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable Automatic Application option Payment Submission to the Bank A special report is available for listing AR Payments normally checks you have received and have to send to the bank that should be submitted to the bank When a payment is listed on this report it is automatically marked as submitted and therefore will not appear again on subsequent runs of this report Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 126 European Accounting User Guide AR Payment Submission Register 27 6 5 4 folomeaiesesba Bank Reconciliation of AR Payments When you want to reconcile AR Payments without using Cash Book Maintenance you can use AR Payment Bank Reconciliation 27 6 5 7 When you activate this program you are requested to enter a batch number Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 127 AR Payments Bank Reconciliation 27 6 5 7 You can choose between multi entry and single entry In single entry you can enter check numbers Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 128 European Accounting User Guide Single line entry In multi entry you can enter ranges of checks The actual processing strongly resembles the reconciliation of drafts and the cash book functionality for reconciling payments Refer to Chapter 6 Cash Management for more details Proprietary information Pro
330. oposed draft must effectively be approved at the same time it is submitted in order to ensure the correct GL entries are created To achieve this the values of any Invoices Receivable or Memos Payable must first be moved to the appropriate Drafts account prior to the generation of the above GL entries Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 93 DR CR Drafts Receivable draft amount 117 50 Proposed drafts only Accounts Receivable draft amount 117 50 Proposed drafts only Draft PIP cash amount 117 50 Drafts Receivable 117 50 However if the Separate Submission and Discounting flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 were set to Yes different GL entries to those shown in the above tables would be generated Refer to Separate Submission and Discounting Multiple Draft Bank Submission Multiple Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 10 allows you to submit a range of drafts By default the selected approved or proposed drafts are submitted and discounted in a single operation However this function has also been additionally enhanced in the same way as Single Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 9 in that drafts can be separately submitted and discounted when the Separate Submission Discounting flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 has been set to Yes Refer to Separate Submission and Discounting for details For multiple draft bank submissions you must first enter the bat
331. ormation Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 480 European Accounting User Guide Netherlands The following enhancements have been added specifically for the Netherlands e Intrastat Reports both on file IRIS and on paper e Extrastat declarations both on file IRIS and on paper e Bank format drivers both direct debit as AP payments United Kingdom The following enhancements are available specifically for the United Kingdom e Intrastat Report e Bank format drivers also with support for pre printed AP checks Germany The following enhancements are available specifically for Germany e Intrastat Report e Bank format drivers both Internal and External payments Poland Standard MFG PRO does not provide any functionality to keep track of the link between an original invoice and any invoices created for the correction of the original one This is a legal requirement in Poland and so to support this requirement the following functionality has been added to European Accounting e Ability to create a correction sales order for an original invoice by entering the correct amounts rather than by entering the difference between the original invoice and the correct amount e Ability to keep track of the relationship between original invoices and correction invoices e Printing of a correction invoice on which the original amounts the corrected amounts and the differences are displayed e Ability to include or exclude correction invo
332. ort AR VAT List Report Output eutxarrp p c7la 27 22 1 AR VAT List Date 09 03 01 Page 2 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Time 11 17 12 Reporting Currency Exchange Rate Tax Tax Tax Code Tax Type Class Usage Effectiv Tax Rate Account Sub Acct CC Taxable Amount Tax Amount Tax Inclusive XVT7AH XVT7A H 01 01 01 20 00 2400 181 52 36 30 217 82 XVT7AL XVT7A L 01 01 99 10 00 2400 90 76 9 08 99 84 XVT7B XVT7B H 21 02 01 17 50 2400 100 00 17 50 117 50 USD Total 62 88 435 16 Account Sub Acct CC Base Total 2400 62 88 Number of invoices treated 2 End of Report Each tax code shown here is a unique code that can only have one tax rate assigned against it Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 282 European Accounting User Guide Credit Terms Discount Account per Tax Rate European Accounting has enhanced MFG PRO with the addition of separate discount accounts for different tax rates Standard MFG PRO has only one discount account which is defined in the System Control File 36 1 In countries such as Germany where discounting is traditionally done at payment time rather than upon invoicing holding all discounts amounts in the same GL account regardless of their tax rate makes it difficult to check the correct amount of VAT has been booked A new function Tax Rate Discount Account Main 2 13 13 6 has been added by European Accounting to allow separate AR and AP discount accounts to be creat
333. ovided that the Print Audit Trail flag in the relevant function has been set to Yes 001 Simulation does not exist The simulation selected for processing is not defined in IES Simulation Set Maintenance 30 18 1 1 002 Simulation is being processed by other user Simulation data required by your simulation is already in use by another user using one of the following IES functions e TES Mean Data Generation 30 18 1 4 e TES Routing Cost Roll Up 30 18 3 5 e IES Structure Cost Roll Up 30 18 3 6 e TES Simulation BOM Maintenance 30 18 1 6 e JES Simulation Routing Maintenance 30 18 1 10 e IES Cost and Qty s Maintenance 30 18 1 13 e TES Excluded Part Maintenance 30 18 1 18 e TES Excluded Location Maintenance 30 18 1 21 e IES Data Resynchronization 30 18 1 5 e TES Simulation Set Maintenance 30 18 1 1 e TES Auto Period Generation 30 18 1 2 e TES Delete Archive 30 18 24 24 Alternatively you might have terminated the simulation abnormally for example by using Ctrl C and the simulation has remained marked as still being processed Should this situation occur you must unlock the simulation using a special utility program isunlock p Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Appendix B Mean Data Generation Messages 487 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 oll 012 PO line unavailable uncertain cost When searching for the invoice price of a purchased item I E S needs to check
334. perty of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 129 Multi line entry SE IE i iA Payment Bank Reconeiialion Unapplied Payments Register European Accounting adds a report for unapplied payments Unapplied Payment Register 27 6 5 12 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 130 European Accounting User Guide Unapplied Payments Register The processing of this report is straightforward An example of the report output by this function is given below Output Example of Unapplied Payments Register euaruprp p c7la 27 6 5 12 Unapplied Payment Register Date 26 03 01 Page 1 European Accounting Demo Time 17 38 49 Curr Date Cash Acct Bill To Name Exch Rate Amount Eff Date Enty Dsc Acct 1000773 xar2 unapplied payments test 300 00 06 01 01 1000 1040 USD 1 0 06 01 01 3910 Reference Type Enty Account Cash Amt Discount Amt AR Amt Unassigned Amt Non AR Amt xar2ul Unappl 1000 1200 1000769 Memo 1000 1200 Payment Totals Cash Acct Bill To Name Amount Eff Date Enty Dsc Acct xar2 unapplied payments test 200 00 06 01 01 1000 USD 1 06 01 01 Reference Type Enty Account Cash Amt AR Amt Unassigned Amt At the end of the report a trailer is shown with totals per currency and a calculation of the variance Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 131 AR Check Void Maintenance Standard MFG PRO already allows you to void rather than simply dele
335. port 28 1 5 lists all vouchers that are marked as Waiting Expenses Waiting Expenses Voucher Report Wl Lap Youckhe Haput This report is nearly identical to that output by Voucher Register 28 3 The Approved By selection is added and the Open Only option is removed but otherwise the functionality is the same Example of Waiting Expenses Voucher Report euvorp0l p c7la 28 1 5 Waiting Exp Voucher Report Date 15 03 01 Page 1 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Time 12 40 11 Batch 1118 Voucher xap2vow2 Date 23 01 01 Remit To Currency PDJ Currency Y Amount PO Number Effective Date 23 01 01 Ship To 10000 Exch Rate PDJ 1 0 USD 3 0 Supplier xap2sup2 Due Date 24 03 01 Invoice fhls Bank aa Non Disc Amt XAP2 Supplier 2 Disc Date 23 01 01 Account 2100 Amount Applied Type Payment Method MC Confirmed Yes Confirmed By Hold Amount Entity 1000 ERS Voucher Batch Approved By Ln Account Project Amount Description 150 00 WAITING EXPENSES 2 1400 28 50 AP TAX RECOVERABLE Tax Type Tax Tax Tax Tax Non Taxable Description Description Class Usage Amount Value Added Tax i 9 50 19 00 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 146 European Accounting User Guide Final Distribution of Waiting Expenses Vouchers A voucher marked as Waiting Expenses can be updated in Voucher Maintenance 28 1 1 However to make the final distribution you have to use the European Accounting function Waiting Expens
336. ption eroun Telephone Esk ins mir inreice Faull ele your invoice Cestomer Bata Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc Cy iei S QAD Inc 264 European Accounting User Guide Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 has been enhanced in a similar way to Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 but in addition to being able to specify a VAT register and operation you are also prompted to specify a site against a supplier Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 You can leave this field blank in which case the system will search for a VAT register defined for a blank site when processing the relevant transactions If you do enter a site the system will search for the equivalent VAT register which must be defined either against that particular site or against a blank site Defining Operation Codes Operation codes describe transactions carried out in Accounts Payable and Account Receivable in plain easy to understand language They are shown when VAT registers are printed Specific operation types can be set using Operation Type Maintenance 2 13 11 Refer to Chapter 2 Setup and Basic Data Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 265 Sales and Purchase Transactions Once VAT registers have been set up against the relevant customers and suppliers you can then link transactions with particular VAT registers Purchases MFG PRO s standard documents associated w
337. r REPOLlts seis Sa ieecceshyscaesesd Seated is ivvi sol sedeh Joecdeedis tebe a ia aaa ai 429 Stock Journal Seas sa acs e E E E E EEE e EE erst EE E E ath ai sede iie elie 431 CUSCOMUZALION AAEE E A EE SOANS EET 433 Chapter 13 Correction INVOICES cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 435 Enabling Correction INVOICES preine coatet rtean eaa teria r ae an Rear e eee nT 436 Creating Correction Sales Orders csmi aie ea ei e E T ee 437 Shipping Correction Sales Orders ceeceesesseeeseeeeeeseeceseeeseecseecsaecaecaecssecsseeeaeceaeeeaeee 439 Printing Correction INVOICES ioiai a a dea eiai ii i e 440 sales Order Control Files oea E E EEE EE eens cc TETE ER 441 Correction Invoices Link REPoTt irere a aes E ea aa aiae Ee ekeit 442 Invoice History Reporta i sevieescsesseve ios dosed e e a la aioe dace BEN R i i a e 443 Archiving Correction INVOICES oitis e e daret Erann E AREE ETRE EA REEE EER 444 C stomization eisten n an eee Ree ERS AUB E E E ee Be 444 Chapter 14 Country Specific ISSUCS ccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 445 Thal y isccsctecsieS imonei anaa a ste A esate a ia a eaa eee 446 Documento di Trasporto a erpe e e E E E A E EEE E ES EE eE RE 447 Bank Manageme nt aon cnie r a e A E a a a ceeded 447 VAT and Other Takes maiii rea E E A A O E E 452 Payment Methods nnna a eles ee RAS EE is A ee 453 Inventory Evaluation so esien oeiee en eeno nea e E cen dghsvtcb iste vecus
338. r s bank account directly to your account Customers have to authorize you doing so Documento di Trasporto An Italian shipping document Previously known as the Bolle d Accompagnamento Merci or Bolla it used to be a legal requirement in Italy Renamed the Documento di Trasporto when it ceased to be a legal requirement it remains common business practice in Italy to supply such documents to accompany the movement of goods E EEC European Economic Community Entity An independent unit for financial reporting purposes An entity generates a separate balance sheet and income statement plans Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc European Accounting User Guide budgets and is assessed for taxes All GL transactions are posted by entity The primary entity is the default entity for GL transactions There is no limit to the number of entities in a database F FIFO First In First Out An inventory valuation system used for accounting purposes that assumes the oldest inventory first in is used first first out G GTM Global Tax Management IBLC Institut Belgo Luxembourgeois du Change IES Inventory Evaluation and Simulation Can generate mean inventory and production data for user definable periods This data can then be used to evaluate inventory using evaluation methods such as FIFO or LIFO Allows you to simulate product structures purchase and routing data Multiple simulation
339. r several bank statements before you post the transactions in which case the balance is not equal to the balance in the General Ledger e The calculation of the GL balance for a date near the end of a month can take considerably processing for larger databases meaning that the response time can become unacceptable European Accounting allows you to calculate the beginning balance of a bank statement yourself by looking at the ending balance of the previous bank statement This can be done much faster than the standard MFG PRO calculation and has the additional advantage that it allows you to enter several bank statements at the same time A setting in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 determines if the European Accounting or the standard MFG PRO logic should be used when calculating the beginning balance of a bank statement Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 6 Cash Management 165 European Accounting Control File Display Cash Book Balance Enter Yes or No to determine if the standard MFG PRO calculation of the account balance is to deactivated If you enter No this is deactivated and European Accounting searches for the previous bank statement If this is found the end balance of this statement is proposed Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 166 European Accounting User Guide Entering the Bank Statement Header Bank statement header Statement The bank statem
340. r the bank year and bank statement number You are then asked if you wish to re open the cash book statement Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 184 European Accounting User Guide Bank Slip Numbers in AR and AP Reports Using Cash Book Maintenance 31 13 AR payments can be entered and AR and AP payments and drafts can be reconciled European Accounting enhances a number of AR and AP reports and inquiries to give improved visibility into the source of the transactions shown on those reports This is done by showing the bank slip numbers of those transactions as they were entered into Cash Book Maintenance The following functions have all been enhanced in this way e DR CR Memo Inquiry 27 2 e Customer Account Inquiry 27 13 e Voucher Inquiry 28 2 e Supplier Activity Inquiry 28 13 For example if a DR CR memo were to be paid using a payment entered into the cash book using Cash Book Maintenance the appropriate bank slip number associated with that payment would be shown in DR CR Memo Inquiry Addition of Bank Slip Number to DR CR Memo Inquiry Adi To EUROCUST gt IAL Centr deote Sales Ordec M Payment Hatmi E eon Cr Teme i anni bifair i Emtity Rmoni Bein E a aiddi Wranni Wo Tn Lewel Currency Bee Esmark Betch DFILES DMOCUST Eurepaes Accounting C ertonrer SoldeTa EWROCWST iata Shoo Press space ba to continue 0 Customization Proprietary i
341. r to be able to verify that no fraud has taken place in the inventory accounting Currently standard MFG PRO does not support such functionality but European Accounting adds a specific inventory movement report the Italian Stock Journal 3 6 18 to allow you to do this This report shows all inventory transactions together with both a beginning and an ending stock balance for a specified period so enabling you to prove there has been no fraud Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 432 European Accounting User Guide Italian Stock Journal 3 6 18 lighes Shack Joumal User biera Gl gusu Options Help Selection Criteria item Humber 10 1 5000 Ta iii Elective Date ferfa2 soo i F Sie ooo To 00 Location 200 Ta 2 Hen Page Per Nem Lecaior Kn Presse Fete Sead ete Peete ca rene Make entries in the relevant fields and specify a valid output destination that must conform to MFG PRO standards The report can be sorted on item number site location or effective date Item Number The range of item codes to be included within the report These item codes uniquely identify items or products Leave blank to include all codes up to the last sequential number in the file Effective Date The range of effective dates for inventory transaction history records to be covered by the report Note that the effective date of a transaction is not necessarily the same as the actual physical date T
342. rated fiat ol cummnces accepted bp payment melbad Currency or multiple separated by The currency of the bank format driver Only available for banks in base currency Leave blank for multiple currencies Multiple currencies can be selected separated by commas newly introduced in 8 6E Use supplier payment specification Enter Yes or No Specifies if the setting of the supplier payment specification is be used to determine if voided checks are created when Max Number of remittance detail lines is reached Max Number of remittance detail lines The maximum number of remittance detail lines allowed for this payment method This setting is used to create voided checks when needed For instance in the United Kingdom checks APACS are printed on preprinted forms with check numbers already on the form Users of MFG PRO want to have the internal MFG PRO checks assigned to the same number as on the preprinted form Therefore they assign the starting check number of the payment method identical to the preprinted number The check consists of an upper part with remittance details of the vouchers paid by this check and a lower part which is the check itself When many vouchers are paid by the check the number of remittance detail lines does not fit in the space reserved for remittance details In that case the check attached is voided XXX printed and the remittance continues on the next check In European Accounting the MFG PRO checks are created fir
343. rdless of the setting of the Submit Discount Proposed Drafts in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 However if submitting proposed drafts using either of these functions you can only do so successfully if the Submit Discount Proposed Drafts flag in the European Accounting Control file is set to Yes In addition the Refuse Submission Proposed Drafts flag in Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 for that particular customer must have been set to No If either is not the case you will receive an error message should you attempt to submit or discount a proposed draft By default when using either Single Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 9 or Multiple Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 10 drafts approved or proposed are submitted and discounted in the same operation However if the Separate Submission Discounting flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 is set to Yes all types of drafts can be submitted and later discounted in separate operations This is a common occurrence in France Refer to Separate Submission and Discounting for further details Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 88 European Accounting User Guide The actual GL entries that are generated when a draft is submitted and the draft s resulting status will differ depending on whether the draft is approved or proposed and on the submission discounting combination selected In addition three methods are available to reconcile drafts Refer to Draft
344. reate the same GL entries as are shown above when discounting drafts using that function Draft Bank Reconciliation Three methods are available to reconcile drafts their operation is the same regardless of the setting of the Submit Discount Proposed Drafts flag in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 Two of these methods Single and Multi Draft Bank Reconciliation are both started from Draft Bank Reconciliation 27 6 6 17 and are described below The other method is available in Cash Book Maintenance 31 13 and allows you to enter a charge account and charge amount for the relevant batch when reconciling a draft Refer to Chapter 6 Cash Management for details of this final method If using either Single or Multi Draft Bank Reconciliation you must first enter a batch number or leave that field blank Entering the batch 27 6 6 17 ihal Hank Peconcikshon Urm Mema Ed Qusus plins Hele Pee S E Balch Fank Cum Batch Control Muli Eni Ho Chig Ami Total Close Drai Ho Efeotive lg Aen FisHelp F260 ESl End WeatlPres Crit Eu opp Paste Next the bank batch control single multi entry effective date close drafts charge account charge cost center and charge amount have to be entered Total is a display only field and displays the sum of all reconciled drafts in this batch The following formula applies for batch control total and charge amount Batch control Total Charge Amount Proprietary information
345. report by setting the Summary Detail flag in Journal Report Maintenance to Summary you get a list with account beginning balances and the total amount of transactions per type Example of Total Journal Summary Summarized Format Euglrp21 p c7la 25 10 3 ACCOUNT JOURNAL SUMMARY Date 13 03 01 Page 1 qad inc Time 13 05 33 Journal Debit Amount Credit Amount Bal ance PURCHASE PRICE VARI ANCE 5 181 8lcr i i 93 640 74 PURCHASE GAIN LOSS 0 00 A 10 000 00 AP USAGE VARI ANCE 0 00 i i 1 000 00 AP RATE VARI ANCE 0 00 i 5 485 00 TRANSFER PRICE VARI ANCE 0 00 18 11 595 84 euglrp21 p c7la 25 10 3 ACCOUNT JOURNAL SUMMARY Date 13 03 01 Page 2 qad inc Time 13 05 33 Begin Amount Journal Debit Amount Credit Amount Bal ance 5 181 8lcr Purchase 88 751 58 End of Report Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 9 Journals 323 Report Definition The following table lists the fields that must be set in Journal Report Maintenance 25 10 1 to create the journals supported in previous version of European Accounting All of these reports are pre defined in this version of European Accounting their report codes are shown in the table below You can alter these reports if you wish Financial Journal By Account F01 previously 25 9 1 13 Document Type Document Number Address Effective Date DB 1 DB 4 DB 5 DB 9 DB 14 Purchase Journal By Reference P01 previously 25 9 2
346. ress line of the person s address at birth Bth addr 2 The second address line of the person s address at birth Bth addr 3 The third address line of the person s address at birth Bth City The person s birth town or city Bth prov The province in which the person was born Res City The person s current town or city of residence Res Prov The person s current province of residence Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 290 European Accounting User Guide Res Ctry The person s current country of residence St The person s current state of residence Resdt Enter Yes or No Specifies whether the person is resident at that address Frn fis cde The foreign fiscal code if appropriate Withhold Tax Enter Yes or No to specify if the supplier is subject to withholding tax rules Fisc Code The individual s fiscal code Reason Code The reason code linked to the withholding tax rate indicating the type of service provided by this supplier This field is validated against the reason codes defined in Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 and is used as the default for any vouchers recorded for this supplier using Voucher Maintenance 28 1 1 Voucher Maintenance Withholding tax data is created using Voucher Maintenance 28 1 1 Withholding tax data is only recorded for vouchers without purchase orders and is not collected for either waiting expenses vouchers or recurring vouchers When you enter a voucher from a
347. rmine the Tax Environment to be used in the calculation of taxes Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 275 Standard Transaction with GTM Tax Defaults machon siih La i Next the standard GTM window found in many other functions such as Voucher Maintenance appears For entry of petty cash transactions it is often more useful to have defined tax rates that allow Tax Included This means that you simply enter the gross expense and the system will determine the VAT and adjust the posting to the expense account accordingly This same window appears against each of the lines marked as taxable using the default information entered at the header Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 276 European Accounting User Guide Entering expenses information In this example a gross expense of 100 was entered to account 5100 The entry was marked as taxable The system then asks you if you wish to view edit the tax detail record created If you were to answer Yes to this question then the tax details could be modified in case of rounding differences etc Otherwise the GTM records would be created and the tax lines could not be modified If modification is needed to the created tax lines then the corresponding expense line must be deleted and re entered and the tax lines would need to be calculated again Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc
348. roprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 284 European Accounting User Guide Tax Rate Discount Account Main 2 13 13 6 Urba ER Gum Dins E Cs a Fe Ge Gay Tax Tree VAT Tax Clasxz H Tom Utepe Elfechve Date OL m1 em T Coie 9 Decoipter High Raie YAT AP Decot Account 5210 Fi Help F2 G0 ESC End Fo Delete CoH Cut __ You must enter a valid Tax Type Tax Class Tax Usage and Effective Date Based on your entries the unique tax rate associated with that combination of tax type and tax class will display in the Tax Code field This will be an existing tax rate you cannot use this function to create new tax rates If no tax rate exists for the specified combination of Tax Type and Tax Class an error to this effect will display and you must make your entries again this time using valid data You will now be able to enter the AP and AR discount account sub account and cost center to be used for posting any discounts associated with this unique tax code A blank entry in any of these fields causes their values to default to the values entered for the discount account sub account or cost center in the System Control File If an existing tax rate is subsequently copied to a new tax rate the discount account information will be automatically copied too You can use Tax Rate Discount Account Main 2 13 13 6 to modify this information should it be necessary Additional functionality has also been added to th
349. rty of QAD Inc QAD Inc 162 European Accounting User Guide Example of Voucher Numbering Report 28 20 17 euapsqrp p c7la 28 20 17 Voucher Numbering Report Date 13 03 01 Page 1 EA to eB TEST ENVI RONMENT Time 15 15 01 Preceeding This Reference Reference T Supplier Cur Open Eff Date Date none 1004 VO 00000001 usd yes 12 10 00 12 10 1005 1009 VO 00000001 usd yes 13 10 00 13 10 00 1013 1050 VO imhusl USD no 19 10 00 19 10 Gaps in the numbering sequence exist between the vouchers shown in the Preceding Reference and This Reference fields Preceding Reference The reference number of the voucher which immediately precedes the current voucher This Reference The reference number of the current voucher This voucher is preceded by a gap in the numbering sequence The report can also handle voucher numbers that start with a character Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 6 Cash Management This chapter describes the new functionality European Accounting adds to standard MFG PRO s Cash Management features European Accounting enhances Cash Book Maintenance 31 13 modifies the layout of Cash Statement of Account Print 31 14 and adds a new function Cash Book ReOpen 31 16 The following topics are covered in this chapter Cash Book Maintenance Cash Statement of Account Cash Book ReOpen Bank Slip Numbers in AR and AP Reports Customization Proprietary information
350. rward until it can be offset against another time bucket Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 369 Main Flow You can use I E S in several ways The main objective of I E S is to allow you to make an evaluation of your stock based on real historical data However you can also use it to calculate mean prices based on live data or to simulate the effects of changed routing and product structure data In most cases I E S is used for fiscal evaluation of stock on an annual basis Simulations are created for individual years but results can be copied into the next year after a simulation is complete All the steps involved in an inventory evaluation calculation flow are listed below Fuller details are given later in this chapter These steps must be carried out in the order shown here and you must perform all the steps unless indicated otherwise e Define simulation All inventory evaluations are made for simulations Multiple simulations can be maintained at the same time A simulation does not affect actual data The simulation refers to a calculation method for example LIFO e Define periods Within a simulation individual periods have to be defined An individual day is the smallest period but typically periods of a month a quarter or a year are more common e Run JES Mean Data Generation 30 18 1 4 This function transfers real historical data into simulation ta
351. ry 25 13 19 do not contain this information The Det Desc flag has been added to both these inquiries and when set to Yes an improved GL description will be created in place of the standard GL description This description will be printed in both these inquiries For these two inquiries the following table shows the transaction types for which these improved descriptions will be created for these two inquiries and gives an explanation of the description that will be created for each different document type Transaction Type Document Type Explanation P CK Check Address Document type Document reference CV Check Void CheckVoid Document reference VO Voucher Address Document type Document reference A Unapplied Payment Address Document type Document reference Application AR Payment Application Address Document type Document reference Draft Address Document type Document reference Finance Charge Address Document type Document reference Invoice Address Document type Document reference Memo Address Document type Document reference Bank Charges Bank Charges Document reference Payment Address Document type Subdocument reference All Types Either Transaction type Transaction reference Transaction number or GL description I Posted Invoice Address Document type Document reference IV_ Posted Invoice Tax Address Document type Document reference For example an AP voucher could have an improved GL description of 1041 VO 10033 while
352. s Inland payments BankGiroCentrale Clieop 03 ClieOp03 support of Euro N eugqnrcl3 p etherlands Direct Debit format BankGiroCentrale Clieop 03 ClieOp03 i support of Euro Foreign payments ABBL BGL MultiLine ABBL gh P P P euqnpral p Netherlands Foreign payments Rabo bank SWIFT MT100 euqnpin2 p Netherlands Foreign payments ING bank ING2 euqukup1 p United Printed check format APACS Program to be APACS Kingdom renamed euqupap1 p in XAS2 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 210 European Accounting User Guide Filename Module Country Description Name Bank format Driver United BACS bank format driver Kingdom Foreign payments Handelsbanken euqupbal p euqzputl p Inland payments Bankgirot euqzpbg1 p Foreign payments Bankgirot a Generic bank format driver that creates a simple paper report For instance used to automatically generate payments and then use the paper report to make manual payments These bank format drivers transform the payments into paper output or disk files euqzpbf1 p euqxxxx1 p euqzpnbl p Foreign payments Nordbanken The payment method determines the numbering of the related payments Numbering ranges can be assigned for each payment method These ranges may not overlap with other ranges in the same module AP or AR Separate Payment in Process accounts can be defined Special validations can be added regarding the bank accounts use
353. s If set to No then no Order Intrastat Data records will be created The Intrastat data in distribution orders follows the same logic as used for sales orders At creation of the distribution order Intrastat data is created and at Goods issue the export data is posted while at distribution receipt the import data is posted Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 352 European Accounting User Guide Intrastat in Vouchers without PO When creating a voucher without a Purchase Order attached to it you can create Intrastat data European Accounting has added the Imp Exp flag on the first screen When you set this flag to Yes the voucher can be used to create Intrastat data When a voucher without a PO contains Intrastat data no PO can be attached to that voucher anymore Voucher Maintenance 28 1 1 In the distribution screen the actual Intrastat data can be created For each distribution line that is not a tax line a separate Intrastat record is created These Intrastat records must first be posted to Intrastat history before they can be reported Refer to Manual Intrastat Post Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 10 Intrastat 353 Manual Intrastat Post To manually post Order Intrastat records of type IC and VO European Accounting adds an extra function Manual Post Intrastat Orders 2 22 9 In this menu two similar functions are offered one to post Vouchers Intrastat data and
354. s A Let us suppose that in 1999 550 pieces of item B were manufactured If we assume that the components required to manufacture these 550 items were also issued in 1999 then the Mean Receipt Price ignoring routing costs would be Mean Receipt Price Item B 550 2 11 81 550 23 620 For Item A the Mean Consumption Price of 11 81 is taken as shown in the last LIFO example for item A Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 376 European Accounting User Guide The following two examples show a FIFO and LIFO evaluation for manufactured item B For each year it has been assumed that the number of component items A required to make item B remained constant at 2 It is also assumed that the consumption of item A was only used for the manufacture of item B Thus the consumption quantities of item A in the earlier examples relate directly to the receipt quantities of item B in the following examples FIFO Example In 1995 none of item B was produced so the inventory value is zero Manufactured Item B Receipts Consumption Net Effect Not Allocated Receipts In 1996 150 of item B is received and 100 are consumed As there is no previous inventory available this is consumed out of the stock received in 1996 bringing the amount of stock still available for allocation in that year to 50 As item B is made from 2 of item A assuming that the components are issued in the same period as the receipts of item B then th
355. s been corrupted due to overlapping No data for Work Center and machine is defined Empty WC data for period and routing is used LE S routings contain work center rates that need to be copied from MFG PRO s standard work center records If this data is not available you will receive this message and zero rates are assumed when calculating the I E S routings Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Appendix B Mean Data Generation Messages 489 023 024 025 026 028 030 There is no cost amp qty data for item in period Cost and quantity data for this item in the specified time period was not previously generated If you receive this message during Routing Cost Roll Up it indicates that the routing cost rollup will not be performed for the specified item in that particular period because the selected range of items or time buckets is outside the range selected in Mean Data Generation If however you receive this message during Structure Cost Roll Up it indicates that the whole calculation will be skipped because the selected range of items has been enriched with additional component items and Mean Data Generation must be run for each one Some buckets preceding selected range are not calculated The current structure rollup and FIFO LIFO processing cannot be processed because time period s preceding the selected range were not previously calculated For example you must calculate the first qu
356. s can be maintained at the same time Simulations do not affect actual data Intrastat System used for collecting foreign trade statistics on the movement of tangible goods between countries in the European Economic Community EEC QAD Inc Glossary ISO Currency Codes A predefined set of three character currency codes specified by the International Organization for Standardization which must be used in order to process electronic payments using the SWIFT protocol Italian Statement of Account A report used to reconcile entries on GL accounts to the relevant sub ledgers J Journal Journals are used to group General Ledger transactions together either to satisfy legal reporting requirements or to organize GL reporting in a manner consistent with common business practices Transactions can be grouped within journals by transaction type and by transaction document type Journal Report Writer Journal Report Writer allows you to group together GL transactions from various journals and report selected elements of data from those groupings in either detailed or summarized form L Lettre de Change Relev LCR The French Lettre de Change Relev is a supplier initiated draft raised by a supplier based on a customer s outstanding invoices and sent directly to that customer s bank for payment LIFO Last In First Out An inventory valuation system used for accounting purposes that assumes the lat
357. s in Italy European Accounting adds the following functionality to MFG PRO e Documento di Trasporto A shipping document commonly used to accompany goods movements in Italy Previously known as the Bolle d Accompagnamento Merci Bolla this used to be a legal requirement in Italy Renamed the Documento di Trasporto when it ceased to be a legal requirement it is still common business practice in Italy European Accounting extends MFG PRO s standard shipper functionality to satisfy the Italian shipping document requirements e Bank Management In Italy bank accounts are 26 positions long of which the first ten positions are used for the bank and subsidiary of that bank In financial transfers you have to know the physical address of the bank of your suppliers or customers e VAT Registers VAT registers are requested by the Italian fiscal administration These registers must display all relevant information to confirm the VAT declaration of the company and prove that there has been no fraud Vouchers and Invoices must be numbered sequentially This functionality has now been extended for general use within European Accounting as a whole but was originally introduced to support Italy s specific requirements e Payment Methods For Italy specific payment methods like the RIBA are supported e LIFO In Italy you are obliged by the government to use a specific stock evaluation method which is based on a quarterly LIFO This feature is now part o
358. s manually you can either type in the data yourself or you can copy existing data into the simulation from MFG PRO s standard datasets Simulation BOM Maintenance Simulation product structures can be entered manually using IES Simulation BOM Maintenance 30 18 1 6 or copied from standard product structures using IES BOM Copy Std gt IES 30 18 1 24 1 Use IES Simulation BOM Maintenance 30 18 1 6 to manually enter a simulation product structure You can also use this function to view and or edit existing mean product structures IES Simulation BOM Maintenance 30 18 1 6 IES Simalyhon HUM Hmmbanamis Uze Menu Edi Duue Qpliens Help ee A A fimalation FIFO S000 FIFO Wakastion Simulateon Yea 2100 Pesiod ooa 01401400 3140140 Parent ltem 1015000 NOMADITH COOLING Component item FEE CONTROL UNIT AUTOM Fev AH Reference i Corp 6 oa LT Ofra Oty Per 1 0 EA Om Seagaance Humber Sbucture Type Forecast 100 br Stat Efinctive w1fbisoe Option Group End Effective 31 01 on Procesa Finmaiks ea Renee eee ey Fistelp F2 G0 ESCeEnd Meet Poe Cele eCut Copy Paste 2 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 389 You can enter the simulation set and period in the top window and then choose the parent item from the middle window This function is with the exception of the addition of the simulation set and period identical to
359. se the draft This flow is however rather basic and has been significantly enhanced by European Accounting There are two possible draft flows in European Accounting depending on whether or not the submission of proposed drafts has been enabled In the standard default draft flow in European Accounting and also in standard MFG PRO only approved drafts can be submitted to the bank However in European Accounting s enhanced flow proposed drafts can also be submitted A setting in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 determines if European Accounting s standard or enhanced draft flow logic should be used while working with drafts The following figure shows the standard draft flow in European Accounting Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 70 European Accounting User Guide Standard Flow of Drafts in European Accounting 27 6 6 1 Proposed Draft Maintenance Enter a proposed draft 27 6 6 6 Draft Print Print the draft 27 6 6 7 Draft Approval Approve the draft y 27 6 6 12 Approved Draft Reversal Reverse and void an approved draft 27 6 6 8 Approved Draft Maintenance Enter or modify approved drafts 27 6 6 9 Single Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 10 Multiple Draft Bank Submission Submit and or discount draft s to the bank 27 6 5 1 Payment Maintenance 31 13 Cash Book Maintenance Reconcil
360. setup at this particular work center It applies to this operation for this item for this I E S simulation set only Setup Rate The average labor rate paid per hour to set up this operation for this particular item for this I E S simulation routing It applies to this operation for this item for this I E S simulation set only If no setup labor is reported for an operation the system assumes that standard setup was completed but not reported In this situation standard setup labor rates will be used during operation close or work order accounting close operations Labor Rate The average labor rate paid per labor hour for this operation for this item in this particular I E S simulation routing It applies to this operation for this item for this I E S simulation set only If no labor is reported for an operation the system assumes that standard labor was completed but not reported In this situation standard labor rates will be used during operation close or work order accounting close operations Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 392 European Accounting User Guide Lbr Bdn Rate The labor burden rate per hour applicable to both setup and run time for this operation within the LE S simulation routing It applies to this operation for this item for this LE S simulation set only Lbr Bdn The labor burden percentage applicable to the total labor cost for this operation in the LE S simulation routing It applies to this
361. sign an existing numbering sequence or create a new one of your own Use VAT Register Browse 2 13 7 2 to display details on the available VAT registers including details on their associated sites sequence IDs and other relevant information Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 257 Setting Sequence Numbers MFG PRO s standard number range management functions control the numbering sequences used by VAT registers The sequences you specify are used when assigning numbers for all invoices credit notes vouchers and correction invoices associated with an particular VAT register The system will automatically assign the next number in the sequence to the relevant document when that document is created Gaps are permitted in the numbering sequence if you set the Allow Discarding flag in VAT Register Maintenance s second screen to Yes By default this flag is set to No which means that the numbering sequence will contain no gaps VAT Register Maintenance Second Screen When defining new VAT registers you can create your own numbering sequences to be used with them An additional frame displays in VAT Register Maintenance 2 13 7 1 where you can specify the numbering sequence for that particular VAT register Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 258 European Accounting User Guide Segment List Frame VAT Requle Manlenance Sequence numbers
362. st Roll Up 30 18 3 6 to determine the receipt quantities and costs of manufactured items in that period This information can then be used to establish the mean cost of manufactured items in that period An inventory simulation such as LIFO or FIFO can then be performed In this process all consumption is allocated to receipts in the individual period lots Receipts Consumption ppt Period Lots As a result of this allocation of consumption to receipts the remaining stock at the end of the year can be determined More importantly as the mean costs of each period lot have been calculated the total inventory value can also be calculated Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 366 European Accounting User Guide Receipts Consumption SmirlsleIr ele In the example shown no beginning balance of inventory was assumed Each fiscal year has a unique simulation code but some of the previous year s inventory may still be available for consumption by LIFO or FIFO at the start of a new financial year You can freeze a simulation and then when you define the next year s simulation you can link this frozen simulation from the previous year to the new simulation Thus the starting inventory balance for the new fiscal year is the remaining unallocated receipts from the previous simulation Use IES Beginning Balance Copy 30 18 1 3 to copy the remaining period lots from a previous sim
363. st and afterwards a bank format driver is activated to print the physical checks or create the payment media file European Accounting therefore needs to know how many lines fit on the remittance detail When this number is exceeded a voided MFG PRO check is created This way the internal MFG PRO numbering remains in sync with the preprinted check number Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 213 When you enter 0 for the number of lines no check is done for the number of remittance detail lines and no voided checks are created Accepted Bank Account Validation The bank account validations for this payment method You can specify here that automatic payments made with this payment method only allow bank accounts with specific validations like the 11 or 12 test Several validations can be added separated by commas for example 11 12 When this field is left blank no validation checking is done Bank Account Needed Enter Yes or No to specify if a bank account of the customer or supplier is mandatory or not for this bank format driver Swift Protocol Enter Yes or No to determine if the Swift protocol should be used for external payments The bank format drivers for external payments often use the Swift protocol Swift is an international network in which almost every bank has a unique Swift address If the bank format driver uses the Swift protocol you should answer Yes In that cas
364. stomer 2 1 1 European Accounting Control File 27 6 5 1 25 23 Proposed Draft Maintenance Customer 2 1 1 European Accounting Control File 27 6 6 1 25 23 Approved Draft Maintenance Customer 2 1 1 European Accounting Control File 27 6 6 8 25 23 Voucher Maintenance 28 1 1 Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 Supplier 2 3 1 Payment Manual Checks Accounts Payable Control File European Accounting Control File 28 9 10 28 24 25 23 Unapplied Payment Application Accounts Payable Control File NA 28 9 20 28 24 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 218 European Accounting User Guide Marking Debit Credit Memos Debit Credit memos can be marked for payment using a payment method When an invoice is posted in 7 13 4 the default bank and method of payment for the customer are copied to the Dr Cr memo You can modify the bank and method of payment using DR CR Memo Maintenance 27 1 Debit Credit memo maintenance additional update of bank and payment method The bank and method of payment shown here are used as the defaults when the payment selection is created You can however decide to use a different bank and payment selection for the actual payment Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 219 Creating Payment Selections Payment selections can be created automatically or manually These two methods are considered in the following sections
365. supplier who is subject to withholding tax you are prompted to indicate if each distribution line on that voucher represents a fee item or a reimbursed expense Withholding tax can be charged for fee items but not for expenses Fee Item Vouther Kanlenance Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 291 For each distribution line in the voucher that is marked as a fee you are then prompted to enter a reason code to show the nature of the service provided for that particular entry You must enter either a valid reason code as defined in Tax Rate Maintenance 2 13 13 1 or leave the field blank By default it is set to the reason code defined for that particular supplier in Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 Entering a reason code Leaving the field blank indicates that a specific line is not subject to withholding tax If it is left blank for the first distribution line in a voucher you are given the option of turning off withholding tax for the whole voucher For lines marked as an expense you are not prompted to enter a reason code as withholding tax is never recorded for reimbursed expenses However it may sometimes be necessary to show reimbursed expense amounts on certain reports Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 292 European Accounting User Guide Expense Item ouch Hamherance In the example shown above the first distribution line for 100 00
366. t code The example shown below is for creating a Financial Journal by Account Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 314 European Accounting User Guide Financial Journal by Account ar i F z x LeHen Ed Queue rton Hep Ta amp Hp Oe GoD Repost Code 21 Copp Code Description FINANCIAL JOURNAL BY Repot Type ACCOUNT C REFERENCE C DOGIMERT Repoit Tile FINANCIAL JOURKAL BY ACCOUNT P E Period 01 Tm 12 Elfective Date oa 0as 2000 Tae Size rooo Accom Code Ta Sub Aoooun Tx Cosi Ch Tax Entity 1000 To 1000 Fi Help FisGo ESC End Mext Prey CLA Cut Copp Pathe Specify the journal report s characteristics by entering appropriate values or modfiying the existing ones in the relevant fields Report Code The unique report code identifying this journal report Copy Code The report code of an existing report whose details you want to use as the base for a new report Use the Up Down arrow keys to select the one you want from those available All the existing definitions for that report are then copied allowing you to tailor the entries as necessary before saving your new report with a new report code Description A description of your report This cannot be left blank and cannot duplicate an existing description Report Type This can be Account Reference or Document depending on the type of your resulting report Report Title The name of the report Fin
367. t Amount NonTaxable Date Payment Rei mburse Wh Tax Amt Tot Paid 020000 Base WHT 10013 20 10 00 2000 50 00 8 75 0 00 2 50 56 25 rl 32323232 5 100 50 00 0 00 15 11 2000 020000 Base WHT 10033 20 10 00 2000 100 00 0 00 0 00 5 00 95 00 rl 32323232 5 100 100 00 0 00 15 11 2000 Total rl 020000 Base WHT 10013 20 10 00 2000 50 00 8 75 0 00 7 50 51 25 13 32323232 15 100 50 00 0 00 15 11 2000 020000 Base WHT 10014 20 10 00 2000 50 00 0 00 0 00 7 50 42 50 32323232 15 100 50 00 0 00 15 11 2000 020000 Base WHT 10034 20 10 00 2000 100 00 0 00 0 00 15 00 85 00 13 32323232 15 100 100 00 0 00 15 11 2000 Total r3 30 00 Total Withheld 37 50 End of Report The following information is contained in this report Address The address code of the supplier Reason The reason code allocated to the type of service provided by the supplier Name The supplier s name Ref The voucher s reference WH The withholding tax percentage Date The voucher s date AMT The computed percentage base amount over the total value of the invoice Year The year in which the voucher has been booked Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 469 Amount The total amount to be subjected to withholding tax for this particular reason code Services The total amount of services given by this supplier and invoiced with this voucher Non Taxable The total amount on the voucher that is not subject
368. t Validation with Payment Method Often payment methods demand that bank accounts comply with specific bank account validations like the 12 check European Accounting allows you to specify the necessary bank account validations several are allowed separated by commas Planned payments are not permitted either to a supplier or from a customer that do not have bank accounts that comply with the validations of the payment method Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 196 European Accounting User Guide Bank account validation of payment method Haak M iilii Currency Validation The payment method allows you to specify the currencies of the vouchers or AR memos that can be selected Multiple currencies can be selected separated by commas This allows you to select for example both German Marks and Euros If the currency of the payment method is left blank then all currencies are allowed This however is only possible if the currency of the bank is base currency If the currency of the voucher or AR memo does not comply with the currency validation of the payment method no planned payment is created Settlement Validation Validation checks are added to ensure that you do not demand payment from a customer that exceeds the due balance or pay a supplier a sum that exceeds the balance you owe When all open vouchers are paid or all open AR memos are collected then the existence of credit notes could result in th
369. t have a type of SIM This is the Cost Simulation Cost Set into which you wish to copy the cost details You must enter a range of periods from the Inventory Evaluation Simulation for which the copy is to take place and you may specify a range of item numbers product lines and item types to further refine the copy process Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 410 European Accounting User Guide Copying Simulated Routings and Product Structures When a simulation is complete you can also copy the simulated routings and product structures to standard routings and product structures if you so wish Use IES BOM Copy IES gt Std 30 18 1 24 2 for copying simulated product structures IES BOM Copy IES gt Std 30 18 1 24 2 Use IES Routing Copy IES gt Standard 30 18 1 24 5 for copying simulated routings Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 411 IES Routing Copy IES gt Standard 30 18 1 24 5 TIES Fioulimg Cope IES gt 5 Usi Meu Edt Juas Opie Hap ILI Simulain FiFozmo AFO Walini Simulation Yaar Z0 Penod a ODA AO FAA Item Humber fio TSU T fin TSUN Start Elfective ff EmdEtfective of 7 Overie Exixting pez Dutput Batch ID ae ee Fistelp Fe ho ESCeEnd Heati CrbXiCAveCut Copy Paste ra For both functions you must first enter the simulation set code The description and year of the simulati
370. t terms of open Dr Cr memos Entity Selection of entities of open Dr Cr memos Batch Selection of batches of open Dr Cr memos Bank Selection of banks of open Dr Cr memos Pmt Meth Selection of payment methods of open Dr Cr memos Currency The currency of the payment selection determined by the bank format driver If the currency selection in the payment method is blank multi currency then here a selection can be entered for the currency otherwise the currency is not updateable Multiple currencies can be selected in a comma separated list Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 221 When the automatic selection is activated planned payments are created for the selected Dr Cr memos A report is supplied of the planned payments When open Dr Cr memos that comply with the selection rules are not selected the reason for this is printed on the report When the selection is executed all memos that conform to the selection criteria are processed For each memo the system checks If the memo is already part of a different payment selection that is not yet processed A memo can only be part of one not processed payment selection at the time If the memo is negative i e it is a credit memo If this is the case and the option Reconcile Credit Memos is set to No then this memo is skipped If the payment method bank account validation complies with the bank accounts used If the e
371. tat data has not been implemented in all functions European Accounting has added this functionality to e Intersite Transfers e Vouchers without purchase orders e Distribution orders For distribution orders you can have a similar flow to that already found in sales orders purchase orders On creation of the order the Intrastat intermediary data is created and at issue receipt of the distribution order the data is posted to the history file from where it is reported This flow of data is shown below Flow of Intrastat Data Intrastat Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 348 European Accounting User Guide In the cases of vouchers without POs and intersite transfers the posting is not obvious European Accounting introduces functionality to allow you to manually post Intrastat data for these two transaction types Intrastat in Intersite Transfers Using the Inventory Transfer Menu 3 4 you can create records for moving goods from one site to another If these sites are in different countries belonging to the European Union these transactions must be reported for Intrastat European Accounting has added the ability to create Intrastat data to the three functions in Inventory Transfer Menu This is illustrated below for Transfer Single Item 3 4 1 but the other two functions work in a similar manner Addition of Imp Exp flag Transfer Single Item 3 4 1 You can enter the transfer data and when
372. tching can be performed You can do this either manually using Manual Matching 25 13 23 1 or automatically using Automatic Matching 25 13 23 3 Accounts that will have the same sequences or which you wish to exclude from the process can be specified using Matching Defaults 25 13 23 23 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 40 European Accounting User Guide Matching Defaults For example you could specify that all accounts starting with the digits 120 are to have the same sequence with the exception of account 1208 Manual Matching Use Manual Matching 25 13 23 1 to manually match each transaction in the given account First enter the selection criteria to identify the range of accounts to be matched and the dates of the transactions you want to cover Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 3 General Ledger 41 Manual Matching Beal Matching Entity The entity By default this is the active entity Account The account for which the transactions are to be matched Address The address of the supplier for an AP account or the address of the customer for an AR account Sub account The sub account This can only be entered if sub account functionality has been activated Cost Center The cost center associated with the relevant account This can only be entered if cost center functionality has been activated Project The project associated with the relevant account Entered
373. te AP checks using AP Check Void 28 9 15 European Accounting has added similar functionality to Accounts Receivable allowing the reversal of AR checks Using the new function AR Check Void 27 6 5 16 you can reverse AR checks without actually deleting all record of them from your system This has the advantage that an audit trail will be preserved which would not be the case if you were to simply delete these checks As with AP Check Void Maintenance 28 9 15 when you use AR Check Void Maintenance 27 6 5 16 you must first specify the number of the check you wish to void AR Check Void Maintenance 27 6 5 16 If you answer Yes to the question Is all the information correct This voids the selected check and reverses all GL transactions relating to the original payment The corresponding amount on the associated invoice will automatically be restored to Open AR Check Status Report Standard MFG PRO already allows you to check the status of all AP checks European Accounting has added similar functionality to Accounts Receivable Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 132 AR Check Status Report 27 6 5 18 Slice Hip ri mn European Accounting User Guide You can choose if the report output by this function should show checks with a current status of Cancel to indicate they have been presented for payment Void to indicate they are invalid or Open to indicate they are still valid but have not yet b
374. ted for non base currency transactions Yes the default shows the original currency No doesn t Include Statistical Accounts Enter Yes or No to determine if GL transactions for statistical accounts should be included in the report or not Yes includes these No the default excludes them Include Memo Accounts Enter Yes or No to determine if GL transactions for memo accounts should be included in the report or not Yes includes these No the default excludes them Balances from Previous Years Enter Yes or No to determine how any memo or statistical accounts included in the report are treated If set to No by default these accounts are treated as though they were an income or expense account That is the opening balance is calculated by adding up all transactions that have taken place on that account from the beginning of the financial year If set to Yes any memo or statistical accounts included in the report are treated as though they were a balance account That is their opening balances are calculated using all available records up to the effective date selected as the start date for your report This flag is only meaningful if either or both the Include Statistical Accounts or Include Memo Accounts flags has been set to on Once you have made your entries you can print your report An example of the output that could be generated using this report is shown below Italian Statement of Account Output euglacrp p c7la 25 1
375. ted automatically Assigned To The employee code The waiting expenses voucher is assigned to the employee specified here It is mandatory to assign an employee to a waiting expenses voucher Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 5 Accounts Payable 143 Waiting Expenses Vouchers by Employee Inquiry A separate inquiry function Waiting Exp Voucher by Emp Inq 28 1 3 is available in European Accounting to inquire for Waiting Expenses Vouchers by Employee Waiting Expenses Voucher by Employee Inquiry Wie hap Wouche be Emp bmg FisHalp Fso FSC Eed Heat Pre Ceti eCut Cope Pacin eS Employee The employee to whom you want to assign the Waiting Expenses vouchers based on the voucher s Approved by field Supplier The supplier for whom you want to see the Waiting Expenses Vouchers Reporting Currency The currency in which the amount should be displayed in the report Cur The currency of the inquiry Base equals the base currency of your system The inquiry shows the Waiting Expenses vouchers with its due date supplier reference currency code and amount The amount is shown in both the voucher s currency and the inquiry s currency If you don t want to use waiting expenses vouchers functionality you can use the Voucher Hold by Employee Inquiry 28 1 6 which shows those vouchers on hold rather than waiting expenses vouchers Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 144 European
376. ted based on the selection criteria produced When the submission discounting of unapproved drafts is enabled the resulting output this can include details on the customer bank record associated with that draft the bank account number and the type of the draft Supplier or Customer initiated Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable Draft Summary Register Output 119 dmdmrp0l p 99 27 6 6 4 Draft Summary Register Page 1 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Status Bill To Name Reference Sent By Cust Bk Exchange Rate Bk PM Eff Date Due Date Paid 100 Proposed XARI1Cust XAR1 Test customer DR MD 28 02 01 Supplier 103 Proposed XAR1Cust XAR1 Test customer DR MD 28 02 01 Supplier 111 Submit XAR1Cust XAR1 Test customer DR MD 13 02 01 28 02 01 Customer 112 Proposed XAR1Cust XAR1 Test customer DR MD 13 02 01 28 02 01 13 02 01 Customer 113 Void XAR1Cust XAR1 Test customer DR MD 13 02 01 28 02 01 Customer 114 Submit XAR1Cust XAR1 Test customer DR MD 13 02 01 28 02 01 Customer Total dmdmrp01 p 99 27 6 6 4 Draft Summary Register Page 2 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Base Cur Curr Total Base Total Curr Ex Curr USD 1 100 00 1 100 00 USD 1 0 USD 1 0 1 100 1 100 00 1 100 End of Report Date 26 03 01 Time 16 49 05 Amount Open Amount 100 00 100 00 300 00 300 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 200 00 200 00 300 00 300 00 1 100 00 1 100 00 Date 26 03 01 Time 16 49 05 Var 0 0 0 0 Accounts Re
377. ted during Mean Data Generation is zero For order and lot ID two or more various parent items were manufactured Two or more items were received on a work order This should never happen as it is impossible to manufacture two items with one work order and Lot ID number The most likely cause of this error is data corruption Note I E S does not support co by products No WO for item was closed within the bucket No work order for the specified item was accounting closed within the specified time bucket No mean product structure or mean routing can thus be generated These will be automatically copied from standard MFG PRO data instead Total qty of item received for WOs closed within the bucket is 0 The total quantity of the item identified by this message received for work orders closed within the specified time period equals zero No mean product structure or mean routing can thus be generated These will be automatically copied from standard MFG PRO data instead BOM copy for simulation year period and item The identified item s mean product structure for the specified simulation and period was copied from standard MFG PRO data Routing copy for simulation year period and item The identified item s mean routing for the specified simulation and period was copied from standard MFG PRO data Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 488 013 014 016 018 019 021 022
378. tenance program Approved Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 8 e Submission of multiple drafts to the bank e Anew Draft Bank Submission Register 27 6 6 11 e Reconciliation of drafts once they have been received by the bank e Closing and subsequent re opening of closed drafts e A special function Italian RIBA Reversal 27 6 6 20 to support Italian drafts RIBA e Separate submission and discounting of drafts e Submission and discounting of proposed drafts e Reconciliation of drafts from a bank statement using Cash Book Maintenance 31 13 Refer to Chapter 6 Cash Management A new menu is available in European Accounting that accommodates all the draft functionality Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 68 European Accounting User Guide New AR Drafts Menu A Aedini Dei ae Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 69 Flow of Drafts In standard MFG PRO the draft flow is as shown in the figure below Flow of Drafts in standard MFG PRO 27 6 13 Draft Maintenance Enter a proposed draft 27 6 18 Draft Print y 27 6 20 Draft Approval Approve the draft v 27 6 22 Draft Discounting Discount the draft and close the draft 27 6 24 Approved Draft Reversal Reverse the approved draft creates a void draft 27 6 4 Payment Maintenance 31 13 Cash Book Maintenance Record the payment of the draft and clo
379. that transaction These descriptions appear on certain reports Sequence Numbers When defining VAT registers you can create your own numbering sequences to be used in the numbering of invoices vouchers correction invoices and credit notes These sequence numbers can be up to eight characters in length and consist of a fixed element specified by you and an integer element incremented by one automatically each time a number from that range is allocated Shippers Documents used to issue goods which identify the items contained within a particular shipment Shippers are typically required when moving inventory between two different physical locations They can be used for both in bound and out bound goods movements They can also be used when moving inventory between two locations on the same site SIA Code An Italian feature A code forming part of a bank account code which identifies a customer s account number This code is used for the purposes of electronic banking Stock Journals A report showing all inventory transactions over a specified period together with a beginning and ending stock balance This allows the movement of inventory over a range of dates to be validated to prove no fraud has taken place Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc European Accounting User Guide Suspended VAT A method by which VAT liabilities are suspended until the date on which invoices are paid In such circ
380. that you physically receive 185 USD on your bank account so Total of line should be 185 USD The charge amount you enter is included in the Total but with a negative sign Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 6 Cash Management 173 Multi Line Entry When you enter Yes for Multi Entry then the next window is shown Multi line entry selection of checks arh Ion Hanenance Check Sadection You are now allowed to enter the From and To field for the Bill To address and Accounts Receivable check number Checks will be selected that are marked for the bank of the bank statement within the range of bill to s and check numbers with the same currency as the currency of the bank and that have a blank payment date When you are finished you must press F4 or the End key to continue You are now asked if you want to display the checks as they are being reconciled Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 174 European Accounting User Guide Display checks being reconciled If you enter Yes you are presented with a screen with the selected checks You can mark checks with the space bar Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 6 Cash Management 175 Selecting individual checks All the checks that could possibly apply same bank etc are automatically marked You cannot select checks that are already reconciled have a different bank code or have a different c
381. the AR Payment files created by AR Payment Autom Checks Drafts 27 6 4 6 This directory name should end with a slash or backslash AR Draft File Directory The directory name where European Accounting should put the AR Draft Payment files created by AR Payment Autom Checks Drafts 27 6 4 6 This directory name should end with a slash or backslash AP Payment File Directory The directory name where European Accounting should put the AP Payment files created by Payment Automatic Checks 28 9 4 6 This directory name should end with a slash or backslash Company Address The address code for your company address for the file header of Swift or for use on payment media and electronic media SWIFT Payment Code The standardized Swift payment code Charge Code This code defines who will be charged by the Swift costs the supplier or the customer Transaction Code This is an additional currency transaction code like the code that is needed for the Belgium Institut Belgo Luxembourgeois du commerce Often an additional code is needed for currency flows across borders Use Voucher External Inv Nr Enter Yes or No This flag is for AP payments and determines if the invoice numbers of your suppliers appear for reference in the Belgium Swift payment file and in automatic payment selection reports If No the reference remains empty or the internal voucher number is shown The data shown below is displayed when a Swift bank format driver is ac
382. the printed report No the default prints decimal amounts as they are Once you have made your entries you can print your report An example of the output that could be generated using this report is shown below Account Sheet Report Output euglkblt p c7la 25 15 10 GL Account Sheet Report Date 13 03 01 Page 1 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Time 14 53 25 Account 1200 Description ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE Opening Balance 1 474 088 69 Eff Date GL Reference Account Batch T Address Document Description Name Tax Amount Cur 12 03 01 ARO10312001320 3000 1816 M cCG LOQJ 1000454 yes 1 000 00 USD SALES L0OQ test customer 12 03 01 ARO10312001320 2400 1816 M CG LOQJ 1000454 no 150 00 USD SALES TAX PAYABLE 1 L00Q test customer 12 03 01 ARO10312001322 3000 1818 M CG LOQJ 1000456 yes 3 000 00 USD SALES L00Q test customer 12 03 01 ARO10312001322 2400 1818 M CG LOQJ 1000456 no 450 00 USD SALES TAX PAYABLE 1 L0OQ test customer 12 03 01 ARO10312001324 3000 1820 M CG LOQJ 1000457 yes 2 000 00 USD SALES L0OQ test customer 12 03 01 ARO10312001324 2400 1820 M CG LOQJ 1000457 no 380 00 USD SALES TAX PAYABLE 1 L00Q test customer Total For Period 3 2001 6 980 00 USD Cumulative Total 6 980 00 USD Closing Balance 1 481 068 69 USD End of Report Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable Many of the enhancements added to MFG PRO by European Accounting affect Accounts Receivable Th
383. the sites are in different EU countries and you set the flag to Yes Intrastat data can be created You will see the following screen one for the issues and one for the receipts Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 10 Intrastat 349 IC issues creation of Intrastat data for issue The resulting Intrastat record can then be reviewed The transaction number or the order number as used in the intersite transfer will be used to group the Intrastat data Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 350 European Accounting User Guide Transfer Single Item 3 4 1 The created Intrastat data must be posted before it can be reported Refer to Manual Intrastat Post Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 10 Intrastat 351 Intrastat in Distribution Orders When recording movement of goods using the DRP functionality European Accounting adds functionality to allow you to create Intrastat data automatically This is done when you create a distribution order using either Distribution Order Maintenance 12 17 14 or Distribution Order Workbench 12 17 13 Creating Intrastat data automatically The Imp Exp flag added to both of these screens makes it possible to say whether a certain distribution order must create Intrastat data If you want Order Intrastat Data records to be created automatically during intersite transfer you must set this Imp Exp flag to Ye
384. the standard MFG PRO function Product Structure Maintenance 13 5 Alternatively you can copy the standard parts and product structures to the simulation using IES BOM Copy Std gt IES 30 18 1 24 1 You start by entering the simulation code and a range of periods For each individual period different mean bill of materials can be active IES Copy Standard BOM gt IES BOM 30 18 1 24 1 IES BOM Capp Sad gt IES Simulation FIFOZ0U0 FIFO ahaation Simaahon Yem AD Period fz Tx lz Diinan 25 0 Diiia 23A item Mumber 10 1 S000 To 10 1500 Delete existing BOM a fre Det put Batch iD Pd FisHelp FieGo ESC End MeetPrev DhU CA Copp aibe The simulation set data is shown for verification Next you can enter a range of item numbers for which you want to create I E S simulation product structures Item Number Range of item numbers for which you want to copy the standard product structure to the simulation Delete Existing BOMs When you have entered the above information set this flag to Yes to indicate you are ready to start processing First the already available simulated product structures within the range of item numbers just entered are deleted Next all standard items within the range are processed As with the I E S Simulation Routings structures are created with the item number as the structure code even if different structure codes have been used for the items in MFG PRO Propri
385. the total amount and currency like in standard MFG PRO Next a new window is shown Reconcile question with R line There are three possible entries that can be made here e N None Creates a new accounts receivable payment as in standard MFG PRO e P Payment Reconciles an already existing Accounts Receivable payment This results in a GL entry in which the payment in process account is counter booked e D Draft Reconciles an already existing approved draft This results in a GL entry Refer to the following sections for details Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 6 Cash Management 169 Reconcile None In this case we are making a new AR payment The flow is like the standard MFG PRO flow except that European Accounting adds the option of making automatic applications by line In the reference field you can press CTRL G for automatic application Automatic Application option When you press CTRL G you get a new window in which you can enter From and To reference numbers and selections on date and due date If you enter Select All all invoices and memos that apply to the selection criteria are selected at the same time Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 170 European Accounting User Guide Entering a range of references for automatic application In a separate window you can see the Accounts Receivable invoices memos or financial charges that apply to the sel
386. thod determines the way a customer is going to pay an invoice or we are going to pay a supplier Both a Bank and a payment method are needed to perform automatic payments With the bank all allowed payment methods are stated with additional data like the bank format driver that is used the numbering range of the checks or AR payments that are created etc The default method of payment for a customer or supplier is entered using Customer Maintenance 2 1 1 and Supplier Maintenance 2 3 1 Default method of payment at the customer Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 187 Default method of paying to a supplier HOLLY JOKES This method of payment serves as the default method of payment when accounts receivable memos or vouchers are created We can change bank and payment methods when we modify an AR memo or AP voucher Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 188 European Accounting User Guide Bank and payment method at the DR CR Memo Bank and payment method at the Voucher Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 189 To make payments we can create payment selections A payment selection is connected to a bank and payment method and contains a number of planned payments We can create payment selections automatically or manually Within a payment selection we are also allowed to select open vou
387. ting from an Older MFG PRO System GL Transaction Matching was not available in MFG PRO versions pre dating MFG PRO V9 0 If you had an older MFG PRO system and want to use this matching functionality all your existing transactions will initially be shown as un matched although in reality many of them will have been closed To allow you to match historical transactions easily European Accounting allows you to create an initialization transaction using a special function Matching Initialization 25 13 23 22 Matching Initialization 1 Matcher baiah atian User Menu Ed Queue Drtions Hep t Gy Se Oe Stat Date joufoison Entity 1000 Acem l Ta D spbnok Output Bahh ID FieHelp F2 Ge ESC End CilM Cut Cll C Copp ChLV Pacte Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 52 European Accounting User Guide This initialization gathers all posted transactions for an account that is to be subject to GL transaction matching matches any which can be matched and then creates a closing and an opening transaction This is comparable with the year end closing and opening transactions created on an annual basis by European Accounting Unlike the year end transactions these initialization transactions will however only be created once The closing balance transaction is automatically assigned a matching number The same matching number is also assigned to all historical transactions therefore matching all the old
388. ting operation code Suspended VAT Enter Yes if suspended VAT functionality is to apply to this invoice No if it is not Settings in the European Accounting Control File 25 23 control which if any of these three fields display The VAT Register and the Operation Code fields will display only if VAT Register functionality has been enabled in the European Accounting Control File The Suspended VAT field will display only if suspended VAT functionality has been enabled also in the European Control File 25 13 If neither suspended VAT nor VAT registers have been enabled then this additional European Accounting frame will not appear at all during Invoice Generation Values held in these three fields default from the VAT register operation code and suspended VAT setting for the relevant bill to address The bank and payment method to be associated with the relevant payment will be assigned automatically during invoice processing Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 307 DR CR Memos When generating a DR CR memo pre payment invoice the following version of the European Accounting frame displays European Accounting Frame for DR CR Memos The fields are the same as those described above for Pending Invoices with the exception that two additional fields Bank and Payment Method are shown These two fields will always display Here you enter the bank and payment method to b
389. tion code associated with this customer This is used with VAT Register reports to provide a clear description of transactions reported on VAT Reports When suspended VAT has been enabled by setting the Suspended VAT flag in the European Accounting Control File a further pop up displays Here you can specify if Suspended VAT rules are to be used for this customer Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 16 European Accounting User Guide Suspended VAT in Customer Maintenance Suspended VAT Enter Yes or No to indicate if VAT charged to this customer is to be suspended by default Where VAT is suspended then the tax date is not set until the invoice is paid Refer to Chapter 8 for full details on VAT Registers and Suspended VAT Next a European Accounting specific frame displays where you are prompted to enter a default bank and payment method for this customer Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 2 Setup and Basic Data 17 Customer Data Frame Automatic Payment Bank The bank code for your bank 27 6 1 into which your customer is supposed to make payments to settle your invoices This field is linked to the payment method Payment Method The default payment method for this customer This payment method has to be defined for the appropriate bank On the next screen European Accounting adds a bank account validation code In addition the length of the branch and the bank account has
390. tivated You activate a bank driver by defining the driver for a payment method for a specific bank Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 7 Banks and Payment Methods 205 Swift Window when executing a payment selection Target Message This text message will default to the Target message which is prompted for when making a Swift payment file Financial Institution Message This text message will default to the Financial Institution Message which is prompted when making a Swift payment file Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 206 European Accounting User Guide Defining Payment Methods In standard MFG PRO Bank Maintenance 26 13 you can define banks Related to these banks you can also define some GL accounts the bank currency the entity and the next check number MFG PRO s standard second window for this is shown below Standard MFG PRO window for Bank Maintenance European Accounting has added fields and additional windows to this function In the second window fields are added Also new windows for the payment methods of this bank are shown Important For European Accounting the bank code must have two positions You can also enter the SIA code in the first window if you require this feature This code is used in Italy and is assigned to a customer by a bank for the purposes of electronic banking If you do not require this feature leave the relevant field blank Propri
391. to for example three production periods then the mean consumption price of the 100 pieces can be calculated from the production purchase prices in the production periods and the quantities in those production periods e Total Inventory Value per period This is the total value of the stock left for allocation per individual period The total of these values is the total inventory value of the stock at the end of the last period Calculation of Purchased Item The examples in the following two sections take a purchased item and evaluate it using first the FIFO methodology and then the LIFO methodology FIFO Example This example evaluates a purchased item using the FIFO methodology Purchased Item A Receipts Consumption Net Effect Mean Receipt Production Price Mean Price for consumption Not Allocated Receipts Total Inventory Value In 1995 1 000 pieces of the item were produced none were consumed so everything went into stock The mean receipt price was 10 giving a total inventory value of 10 000 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 372 European Accounting User Guide kes o o S S c O O O Kesa 0 o S Not Allocated Receipts 70 Mean Receipt Price In the next year 300 are consumed This is consumed out of the still available stock of the lot from 1995 bringing the amount of stock still available for allocation in that year to 700 Purchasedtema 1995 w p o O kes o o o S CO o o
392. to include or exclude memo accounts for the report It is only effective for the account report type Skip line after Account Codes Enter Yes or No For use with account driven reports such as GL Book GL Book by Account and Total Journal Summary When account code and account description are the first two fields shown for each entry in the report this specifies if each individual entry should be two lines long instead of the usual one If set to Yes a line is skipped after each account code and account description in the final report It is only effective if both the Description and Account Code fields are selected for inclusion in the report Sort and Sub Total Criteria Sorting and sub totaling are permitted on the following fields e Account Code e Bank Code e Bank Slip e Cost Center e Daybook Code e Daybook Number e Document No e 6Effective Date e Entity e GL Reference e Journal e Line Number e Period e Project e Sub Account Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 9 Journals 321 You can specify up to ten sort fields selected from the above list Sorting is carried out using the following hierarchy when the journal report is generated e Fntity e Daybook Code e Account Code GL Reference Document Number For Report Type Accounts this can be any one of the above listed fields however the recommended field is Account Code GL Reference Document reference e Any other sort field
393. to provide detailed descriptions of all accounting transactions but they must also keep a booking register recording all these transactions over a certain period GL transactions must be assigned a number which must be numbered sequentially with no gaps in the sequence These are known as protocol numbers Not all accounting transactions should appear however Stock related bookings or end of month fictive bookings should not be numbered To mark bookings that should not be numbered the account types S and M are used The protocol number is maintained by the system If you want to use protocol numbers then you need to set the GL Protocol Numbering Required flag in the European Accounting Control File to Yes None of the functions described in the remainder of this section can be used if this flag is set to No If you attempt to do so the message GL Protocol Numbering is not active will display European Accounting Control File 25 23 i Eire Attang Conlial Fils Use GL Numbering Create 25 13 8 1 to add the actual protocol numbers to the GL entries A special option Final Print No Test allows you to list the report to review it before making final assignments of protocol numbers to GL entries This report should only be run for closed periods Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 462 European Accounting User Guide GL Numbering Create 25 13 8 1 l GL Nu bsiing Carab E Effective The range of effective d
394. to sort the inquiry on ascending or descending date order e The status of a draft in a separate column labeled D e The number of days by which an invoice was overdue instead of the number of days the invoice was open e The Computed Balance total Approved Drafts total and Proposed Drafts total e The overall total the total of approved drafts plus customer invoices e An additional column labeled S showing Contested or Unapplied Drafts Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 66 European Accounting User Guide Additional options in Customer Account Inquiry Luuchomer ficcounl brear fdl Tee EURDCUST Ewnpamn Accounting Cur Open Balance ikt ho TUE MOT eC LT Ce aani ibbbks W guwiii 130i 4ibdbd E 3iami S000 AEEHEE E L001 20001 LEPPFFL E 100401 Include Drafts Enter Yes or No to specify if you want a separate Approved Drafts total to be shown in your report Enter Yes to include the drafts total in the Computed Balance total and Open Balance field Enter No to show the Approved Drafts total separately Ascending Enter Yes or No to determine if you want to sort the inquiry on Ascending date order Yes or Descending date order No Open Only Enter Yes or No to specify whether or not you want to see all items No or only the open items Yes The inquiry can show up to four totals Two of these totals the Computed Balance total and the Proposed Drafts total are always shown The Approved Drafts tota
395. to taxation VAT The VAT amount due Date Payment The payment date Reimburse The total amount of the voucher that relates to expenses WH Tax Amt The withholding tax amount due Tot Paid The total amount paid for the voucher Total r3 The sub total for reason code Total Withheld The total amount paid to a supplier for that supplier s particular reason code Withholding Tax Certificate You must send a withholding tax certificate to each of your suppliers on an annual basis This shows the amount of withholding tax you have paid to the tax authorities on each supplier s behalf in that year Using Withholding Tax Certificate Rpt 2 13 15 4 10 you can list the details of withholding tax certificates sent to a specified range of suppliers in any given year Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 470 European Accounting User Guide Withholding Tax Certificate Rpt 2 13 15 4 10 Supplier The range of suppliers to be covered by the report Year The year to be covered New Page for each Supplier Enter Yes or No to determine if the details for each supplier should start on a new page Re print Certificate Enter Yes or No By default a certificate s entries will not be shown on a subsequent report once they have appeared on one You can change this by setting this field to Yes Reporting Currency The currency in which the report will be printed By default this is your database s base currency Once you ha
396. transactions in one process However you might still receive new in coming transactions that need to be matched to old transactions These transactions known as consuming transactions can be manually matched against the opening transaction from the initialization until the whole of the opening balance has been consumed This is the only situation where it is possible to match two transactions which do not match identically It is not possible to match consuming transactions automatically The initialization transaction is allocated a JL reference a matching number and a daybook of type MT while the consuming transactions are allocated a matching number but no JL reference In the example below European Accounting has matched all transactions which can be matched all those with a balance of 35 and has then created the closing and opening transactions All the old transactions and the new closing transaction have been allocated the same matching number Matching Initialization 2 eultini p c7la 25 13 23 22 Matching Initialisation Date 13 03 01 Page 1 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Time 13 46 17 Action GL Reference Line Enty Account Amount Matching Matched AP001215000025 2 1000 2200 100 00 00000001 Matched 1C001215000002 2 1000 2200 1 312 33cr 00000001 Matched 1C001215000003 2 1000 2200 14112433 00000001 Matched 1C001215000004 2 1000 2200 656 17 00000001 Matched 1C001215000005 2 1000 2200 556 17cr 00000001 Matched 1C001215000018 2 1000 22
397. ty to which the draft applies You are only allowed to have one unapplied or non AR distribution line for each proposed draft Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 75 Creation of Approved Drafts Within European Accounting you can create approved drafts directly This is not possible in standard MFG PRO where you must first create a proposed draft that can be approved later Approved Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 8 allows you to create approved drafts within European Accounting First as when creating proposed drafts in standard MFG PRO you are requested to enter a batch number and control amount As this is the same as in many places within standard MFG PRO it is not discussed in detail here Approved Draft Maintenance batch window Next you will see a window with the draft data Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 76 European Accounting User Guide Approved drafts header window Reference The reference of the draft If you leave this blank a temporary draft number is assigned This temporary number will be replaced by the actual number as soon as the bank and payment methods are entered on the draft since the payment method determines the number in European Accounting Pmt Meth The payment method used for the draft When either the reference is entered or a temporary number has been assigned if the Reference field is left blank then the Bill To ad
398. u can select Go to match the selected transactions If you try and match transactions when the balance is not zero you will receive an error message Should you receive this error press F1 to return to the first record to be chosen as in the following example Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 44 European Accounting User Guide Balance not set to zero i Manual Matching Once you have successfully matched your transactions a matching number is automatically assigned to the transactions just matched Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 3 General Ledger 45 Matching Number Automatic Matching Use Automatic Matching 25 13 23 3 to match transactions for the given accounts automatically As with Manual Matching you must first enter the selection criteria to identify the range of accounts to be matched and the dates of the transactions you want to cover Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 46 European Accounting User Guide Automatic Matching Fiat oma Malet n HA GAAR Account Ta Addes Tef Sub Account Te Cost Cir Tx Project i Enema 7 7 To zefozror Effective foi Toc renzo Detail Sumnar ET utpult Babch IH Fl Help Fe Go ESC End Med Peee Cid A Cul Copr Paste Entity The entity By default this is the active entity Account The accounts for which the transactions are to be matched Address The
399. ual payment Refer to Calculating Withholding Tax Automatically above Note Itis not possible to deal with INPS or Ritenuta Previdentiale using automatic payments Voucher Inquiry Voucher Inquiry 28 2 shows the payments made against selected vouchers Continuing with our example voucher this would show multiple lines for a single payment of 225 00 US dollars Recording the withholding tax in this way makes it easier for you to see how a voucher can be fully paid with an amount that appears to be less than the total amount of that voucher Voucher Inquiry 28 2 ae bema Gol Gumus Gion Help 1 I Fe Ge al oe Reporting Curmency ELA pui terminal IPLI vende O1f01f0 Credit Terre bif ifti Tene Oyen Dink ro Cunene Enibity PO Himik Confirmed Fy Hold Test Dirkiyi AAshooo rl b bb WWE i PHM AAZODGEI 2 b obb IE Hil Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 298 European Accounting User Guide Settling Withheld Tax Once a withholding tax liability has been created by the payment of the appropriate vouchers the actual tax that you have withheld must be settled with the tax authorities Withholding Tax Payment 2 13 15 4 7 allows you to identify withholding tax transactions and mark those that are due for payment Withholding Tax Payment 2 13 15 4 7 Withholding Te Fapmant Reference The range of references Supplier The range of suppliers whose withholding tax
400. uation and Simulation 387 Routing Data If you chose to generate routing data automatically from the transaction history by setting the Generate Routing field to Yes any existing routing data for this simulation set is deleted Next all inventory transactions of type WO CLOSE that were active in the period of the simulation set are processed For these orders the sum of all related receipts for those work orders is calculated to determine the actual run time setup time and subcontracting costs of those transactions The results are stored as routing simulation data with the item reference pt_part This is true even if you have entered a different routing code in Item Maintenance 1 4 1 Product Structure Data If you chose to generate product structure data automatically from the transaction history by setting the Generate Structure field to Yes any existing available bills of materials for this simulation set are first deleted Next all work orders that were accounting closed and are thus considered finished during the period covered are processed All Receive Work Order RCT WO transactions against these work orders are processed to determine the number of created parent items The mean receipt cost is calculated by adding together the cost of the receipts for a given item within a given time bucket The Issue Work Order ISS WO transactions of the components are processed to determine the consumed quantities of components The mean issue
401. ubsequently used during structure cost rollup together with the mean price data and the value found in the WO Comp Qty field in order to calculate the mean price of components to be used in the roll up of manufactured item costs Once this has been done the value in this field is moved to the Other Cons Qty field and is then available for use by the main LIFO or FIFO calculation At all times the total issue or consumption quantity of an item is the sum of the values found in this field and the Other Cons Qty field WO Comp Qty The Work Order Component Quantity shows the quantity of a component that has been issued to all work order or repetitive schedules that have been accounting closed during the period covered by this I E S simulation Other Cons Qty The Other Consumption Quantity shows the quantity of all items issued to all transactions that are not the result of either work orders or repetitive schedules during the period covered by this I E S simulation These include issues processed using Sales Order Shipments 7 9 15 Unplanned Issues 3 7 Purchase Order Returns 5 13 7 and Negative Work Order 16 11 or Purchase Order Receipts 5 13 1 Following cost rollup this field also contains all the quantities issued against work orders and repetitive schedules in the relevant period Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 395 At all times the total issue or consumptio
402. ulates the mean purchase order cost the quantity stored in Inventory Transaction History is expressed in the base unit of measure of an item as defined in the item master However the unit of measure used in voucher pricing is that found on the appropriate purchase order which is not necessarily the same unit of measure If this is the case I E S needs to be able to convert the unit of measure If you receive this message it indicates that not enough information is available to allow this conversion to be carried out accurately so a conversion equal to one has been used for further calculations Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 490 European Accounting User Guide Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Addendum Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 492 European Accounting User Guide Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc A ABI Code An Italian feature A code forming part of a bank account code which represents the bank at which an account is held This code is used for the purposes of electronic banking Account Sheet Report A GL report which verifies the accuracy of GL accounts over a specified time period using the contra account bookings for each GL transaction against the specified account B Bankformat Driver A program which performs the translation from the common AR and AP payment logic into country specific electro
403. ulation set code must be entered Once a valid code is entered a description of that simulation and the year to which it relates are shown You are then able to enter a starting period and an ending period for which the mean data has to be generated Next you must select the end items for which the mean data must be generated You cannot select item numbers because mean data is typically required for all items in the database This ensures that data exists for all manufactured items and the components of those items such that the I E S Structure Cost Roll Up can correctly calculate end item costs However selection is available by Item Type Item Status and Item Group to allow mean data generation for discrete sub sets of items for testing purposes The next step allows you to select the data you want to be automatically generated from the transaction history You can generate any or all or the following data e Routing e Product Structure e Receipts Cost Generate Routing Enter Yes or No to determine if mean routing data is to be generated automatically from the various history tables If you enter No you must create this data manually Refer to Generating Data Manually for details Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 386 European Accounting User Guide Generate Structure Enter Yes or No to determine if mean product structure data should be generated automatically from the various history tables If you enter No you m
404. ulation to the active simulation Period Lots of Previous Simulation To ensure the I E S calculation is not too complex certain assumptions have to be made Refer to Special Considerations and Limitations and to the following sections Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation 367 Receipt Costs In order to be able to determine the receipt cost of a works order a mean product structure and mean routing are calculated for the particular item by the Mean Data Generation program Only those work orders or repetitive schedules that have been accounting closed are considered in the calculation of mean product structures and routings The rollup procedures then calculate the total mean receipt cost for a particular item If no product structure or routing is available the cost information will be taken directly from the item s standard cost maintenance record An example of this may be when the labor element of product cost is small and the company does not use routings to track labor but simply records a labor cost directly against each manufactured item in Item Cost Data Maintenance In this case no Mea
405. umstances the due date for the VAT is not set until the associated invoice has been paid This occurs in Italy typically with Government Institutions where the customer may often take more than 12 months to pay an invoice SWIFT Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunications This is a network allowing world wide payments to be made between banks T Third Party Banking An Italian feature It Italy the physical address CAB code and ABI code of your supplier s or customer s bank must be known in order for electronic transfers to be performed Transport Documents See Shippers V VAT Registers VAT Registers provide a means of grouping together various accounting transactions for VAT reporting purposes They enable you to assign numbering ranges for invoices vouchers correction invoices and credit notes Certain countries like Italy have very strict rules governing the numbering of vouchers invoices etc and do not allow any gaps to appear in the sequences Using VAT registers you can force the use of unbroken sequences in these numbering ranges QAD Inc Glossary W Waiting Expenses Vouchers Vouchers which can be entered and their VAT collected before their final distribution is known Waiting expenses are initially booked to the Waiting Expenses Account which is counter booked once the vouchers final distribution is known Y YA The transaction type assigned to year end tra
406. unting a proposed draft generates more GL entries than submitting and discounting an approved draft DR CR Drafts Receivable draft amount 117 50 Proposed draft only Accounts Receivable draft amount 117 50 Proposed only Draft PIP cash amount 117 50 Drafts Receivable 117 50 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 101 The draft s status is now Submitted Multiple Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 10 has been enhanced in a similar way and will create the same GL entries as are shown above when submitting drafts using that function Discount Alone When the separate submission and discounting of drafts has been enabled setting the Submit flag in Single Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 9 to No but the Discount flag to Yes applies the appropriate discount to a previously submitted draft or to a draft which has not been submitted prior to discounting Discount Alone In this case you can only enter the appropriate Discount Charges Account and amount For a draft of 117 50 with a discount charge of 17 50 this would generate the following GL entries DR CR Discount charges Account discount amount 17 50 Discounted drafts 100 00 Draft PIP cash amount 117 50 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 102 European Accounting User Guide The draft s status is now Discounted Multiple Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 10 has been enhanced in a similar way and will c
407. upper ELRDSUPP Sot Kame Eurmpean Accom Sup Balance 100_ Ft Open Only M S050 Mibhhiaa i aaant 10r Y inviti E 30001 HRFEFPFL E 130301 ZartFEFL Y inr ELEELE 50302 ihi F 12 Se Tes aagao1 7 50 0 00 AAtiibki Y Biti k J ti it d BRS iit E dadi WAS oid E 100 Fapaid Irafis 20 50 Ascending Enter Yes or No to determine if you want to sort the inquiry on Ascending or Descending date order If set to Yes the inquiry is sorted by Ascending date order if set to No it is sorted on Descending date order Incl Unpaid Draft Enter Yes or No to determine if unpaid supplier draft payments are included on the inquiry If set to No the inquiry will not select any unpaid draft payments whose draft due date is later than the current date A total amount for unpaid drafts will not be calculated However if this flag is set to Yes the total of all outstanding draft amounts for drafts whose due date is later than the current date will be calculated and displayed Unpaid Drafts The total amount owing on unpaid drafts whose due date is later than the current date This total is only calculated and displayed when the Incl Unpaid Drafts flag is set to Yes As the window cannot display all the relevant information this window is scrollable which means you can scroll to the right to see the complete list of check numbers associated with a voucher As the check numbers can be up to 10 positions long this scrolling facility allows you t
408. upplier f 1 100 00 10 03 01 28 02 01 1000436 M ue 28 02 01 ARO10228001296 1796 1200 10qj Test Supplier f 1 150 00 10 03 01 28 02 01 1000437 M 1 28 02 01 ARO10228001297 1797 1200 10qj Test Supplier f 2 250 00 28 02 01 00001082 P al 28 02 01 ARO10228001298 1798 1200 10qj Test Supplier f nlg 1100 00 550 00 10 03 01 28 02 01 1000438 M 1 28 02 01 ARO10228001299 1799 1200 10qj Test Supplier f nlg 1100 00 550 00 28 02 01 00001083 P 1 28 02 01 AR010228001300 1800 1200 10qj Test Supplier f nlg 1100 00 550 00 10 03 01 28 02 01 10qj 00001083 cv 1 28 02 01 ARO10228001301 1801 1200 10qj Test Supplier f nlg 0 00 0 00 00001084 P 1 28 02 01 ARO10228001302 1802 1200 10qj Test Supplier f nlg 0 00 0 00 00001084 P 1 01 03 01 ARO10301001303 1804 1200 10qj Test Supplier f 1 100 00 11 03 01 01 03 01 1000439 M ul 01 03 01 ARO10301001304 1804 1200 10qj Test Supplier f 1 150 00 11 03 01 01 03 01 1000440 M 1 01 03 01 ARO10301001305 1805 1200 10qj Test Supplier f 2 250 00 01 03 01 00003005 B Hl 06 03 01 ARO10306001330 1826 1200 10qj Test Supplier f 1 000 00 1000462 M 2 06 03 01 ARO10306001330 1826 1200 10qj Test Supplier f 1 000 00 1000462 M 2 06 03 01 ARO10306001331 1827 1200 LOQJ Test Supplier f 3 300 00 16 03 01 06 03 01 1000463 M 3 06 03 01 ARO10306001334 1829 1200 LOQJ Test Supplier f 3 300 00 06 03 01 00003008 P 3 07 03 01 ARO10307001341 1834 1200 10qj Test Supplier f 1 170 00 17 03 01 07 03 01 1000470 M 4 07 03 01 ARO10307001342 1835 1200 10qj Test Supplier f 1 1
409. urce address is either the same as the site code for the issuing site or the address code of the issuing location and a destination address which is either the same as the supplier address or the address code for the location at the supplier site Inventory Movement Code PCT PO Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 420 European Accounting User Guide Material Order Maintenance 10 7 1 Transaction Any component issue recorded in Material Order Maintenance when the Ship Immed flag in the Engineer Orders Control File is set to Yes Shipping Group Source address must either be the same as the site code for the issuing site or the address of the issuing location Destination address must be the same as the engineer site or the address of the engineer location Inventory Movement Code ISS TR Material Order Shipments 10 7 6 Any component issue performed using Material Order Shipments Shipping Group Source address must either be the same as the site code for the issuing site or the address of the issuing location Destination address must be the same as the engineer site or the address of the engineer location Inventory Movement Code ISS TR If the relevant shipping groups with the necessary inventory movement codes exist then the shipping information frame will automatically display when performing an issue using one of the above functions Refer to Creating Shippers Address Codes
410. urnal Report Writer still offers the full functionality of the above journals but in addition gives improved flexibility and efficiency Using Journal Report Maintenance 25 10 1 you can define any journals you wish including but not limited to those journals supported in previous versions of European Accounting This function allows you to select fields from a pre defined list for Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 9 Journals 311 inclusion within your journal report It also allows you to specify sorting criteria and to assign initial values to various ranges of data Refer to Creating Journals Also refer to Report Definition for full details of the fields you need to set to define the journals provided in earlier versions of European Accounting Once you have defined your journal use Journal Report Print 25 10 3 to actually generate and print it Refer to Printing Journals Each individual entry in all reports will be one line long The exception to this is any account driven report such as the Total Journal Summary or the GL Book reports in which the first two entries are the account code and account description For such reports each entry can be two lines long depending on options selected when they are defined with account code and account description printed on one line and the rest of the details on the next line The journals you define can be one of the following types e Reference e A
411. urrency When you finish making your entries you can press F4 or Escape to leave the screen If the totals do not match the message shown in the following screen is displayed Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 176 European Accounting User Guide Message to Accept Edit or Cancel Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 6 Cash Management 177 Single Line Entry When you enter No for Multi Entry in the header frame then the following window is shown Single line entry You are now allowed to enter several check numbers with the amount of the check You can leave this window when you complete your entries by pressing F4 or End Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 178 European Accounting User Guide Reconciling Drafts Reconciling drafts resembles reconciling payments Here also you can have multi line entry or single line entry Since we have discussed the flow already in detail for reconciling payments we will only show the major flow Refer to Reconciling Payments Draft Reconciliation header window When you choose for multi line entry you can enter a range of drafts to be reconciled Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 6 Cash Management 179 Multi Entry draft reconciliation You are given the option of verifying the selected drafts Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 180 European Account
412. using Italian Stock Journals is shown below Italian Stock Journal Output sostrp c7la 3 6 18 Italian Stock Journal Date 20 03 01 Page 1 gad inc Time 16 00 49 Item 10 15000 NOMAD TM COOLING SYSTEM AUTOMOTIVE UNIT UM EA Site 10000 Loc 200 Quantity in Quantity out Final Balance Eff Date Trans Date Type Trans Address Shipper Invoice IN OUT 23 0 10 0 0 0 23 0 22 12 00 22 12 00 RCT PO 2399 frfsupp 1412 10 0 0 0 13 0 22 12 00 22 12 00 RCT PO 2398 frfsupp 1411 1 0 0 0 3 0 18 12 00 18 12 00 RCT PO 2377 befsupp imhbe2 1 0 0 0 2 0 18 12 00 18 12 00 RCT PO 2376 befsupp imhbel 0 0 2 0 1 0 11 12 00 11 12 00 ISS SO 2354 imhusl 0 0 2 0 3 0 10 12 00 10 12 00 ISS SO 2340 imhusl 0 0 2 0 5 0 09 12 00 09 12 00 ISS SO 2308 imhusl 0 0 2 0 7 0 09 12 00 09 12 00 ISS SO 2310 imhusl 10 0 0 0 9 0 02 12 00 02 12 00 RCT PO 2251 befsupp 0 0 9 678 0 1 0 01 12 00 01 12 00 ISS TR 2135 1 0 0 0 9 677 0 01 12 00 01 12 00 RCT TR 2122 0 0 1 0 9 676 0 01 12 00 01 12 00 ISS SO 2143 imhusl A0000103 pbi99016 OPENING INVENTORY 9 677 0 End_of Report Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 434 European Accounting User Guide Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 13 Correction Invoices Standard MFG PRO does not provide any functionality to keep track of the link between an original invoice and any invoices created for the correction of the original one European Accounting has been enhanced to
413. ust create this data manually Refer to Generating Data Manually for details Calculate Purchase Cost Enter Yes or No to determine if receipts cost data should be generated automatically from transaction history If you enter No you must create this data manually Refer to Generating Data Manually for details Use Invoice Price Enter Yes or No If you enter Yes LE S will look for invoiced receipts to determine the invoice price if available When you enter No the price in transaction history is always taken Use Receipts Backwards as WO Enter Yes or No to determine if the receipt and issue of items by a backflush transaction performed using Receipts Backward Exploded 3 12 should be considered as a work order transaction When set to Yes standard product structures and standard routing costs are automatically assigned to any such items for which no work order exists Print Audit Trail Enter Yes or No to determine if an audit trail report should be created after the data has been generated This audit trail report indicates the processing that has taken place and lists any exception messages These describe data inconsistencies that could lead to unexpected results in the simulation An example of such a report is shown below Audit Trail Report isgen2 p c7la 30 18 1 4 IES Mean Data Generation Date 14 03 01 Page 1 EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT Time 10 36 09 0009 No WO was closed for item 10 15000 within the bucket 1 0011 BOM copy
414. vable 99 DR CR Drafts Receivable 117 50 Proposed drafts only Accounts Receivable draft amount 117 50 Proposed drafts only Discounted Drafts cash amount 100 00 Discounted Charges Account discount amount 17 50 Drafts Receivable 117 50 The draft s status is now Discounted Refer to Single Draft Bank Submission for details on the GL entries that would be generated for a draft of the same amount when the separate submission discounting of drafts is not permitted Multiple Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 10 has been enhanced in a similar way and will create the same GL entries as are shown above when submitting and discounting drafts together using that function Submit Alone When the separate submission and discounting of drafts has been enabled setting the Submit flag in Single Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 9 to Yes but the Discount flag to No causes the selected draft to be submitted but not discounted Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 100 European Accounting User Guide Submit Alone In this case you enter the appropriate e Cash Account and amount e Bank Clearing Account and amount For a draft of 117 50 this would generate the following GL entries You should note that as the creation of a proposed draft does not have any GL effect a proposed draft must effectively be approved at the same time it is submitted in order to ensure the correct GL entries are created Thus submitting and disco
415. ve a proposed draft prior to its submission to the bank If this is the case you can approve such drafts using Draft Approval 27 6 6 7 The Cust Bank Acct and Sent By fields added to Proposed Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 1 and Approved Draft Maintenance 27 6 6 8 shown above have been added to this function too The values of these fields should have been set when the draft was created but can be changed here if necessary Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable 87 Draft Approval 27 6 6 7 Inalt Approval Mil Umbea Fel usus Option Help Cs Co ee Ketch 1045 Contin a a00 Tota e 000 Reference 400A Bil To EURATCUST Eanopean Accounting Cerion Date ecfoafes Elective Date rerenga a Turence EUR Entity 1000 Aina Ant Gh Ageount 1300 Total of lwoines a57 50 Discount Acot 3510 Dum Date 31 05 01 Ramak Expel Pap Daie fog Daybook Des Customer Bank Account fi o mma Sent by oppii This information must be provided for those bank drivers that create a bank submission file during multiple bank submission currently only one such driver exists Draft Bank Submission Two functions are available to submit drafts to a bank Single Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 9 and Multiple Draft Bank Submission 27 6 6 10 Both functions have been enhanced to permit the submission of proposed drafts directly to the bank so can be used rega
416. ve made your entries you can print your report An example of the output that could be generated using this report is shown below Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 14 Country Specific Issues 471 Withholding Tax Certificate Report Output Primary Entity Tax D Tel Fax United States of America We declare to have paid to Werner Schulz United States of America Born in Milano on 12 08 70 FiscC 1234432112344321 Taxl D in the year 2000 the following amount for the year 2000 Reason Fees VAT Ant Rei mbur se Tot Amt Taxab RPEF Wh Tax Wh Tax Amt Tot Paid re 100 00 0 00 0 00 100 00 100 00 5 00 5 00 95 00 TOT Oct 100 00 0 00 0 00 100 00 100 00 5 00 5 00 95 00 Reason Fees VAT Amt Rei mburse Tot Amt Taxab IRPEF Wh Tax Wh Tax Amt Tot Paid TOTAL 100 00 0 00 0 00 100 00 100 00 5 00 5 00 95 00 The amount withheld is stated in accordance with the rules of the law Primary Entity End of Report The following information is contained in this report Causale The reason code Onorari The total amount of services invoiced by your supplier against this reason code Iva The VAT amount due Rimborsi The total amount of miscellaneous expenses invoiced by your supplier Imp Tot The total amount for the reason code Impon IRPEF The total amount that is subject to taxation for this particular reason code RDA The withholding tax percentage Imp RDA The withholding t
417. ve set Update Currency to Yes an additional window is shown Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 10 Intrastat 359 Changing Exchange Rates ial Dela diet Pil This window shows a review of the current exchange rates all rates not just those of the currencies in the report You can select currencies by using the arrow keys or typing the currency When you have selected a currency you can change the exchange rates The exchange rates will be printed in the trailer of the report You leave this window by pressing F4 or End Next the output destination and Batch ID are queried for conformity with MFG PRO standards Finally the report and or file is created Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 360 European Accounting User Guide Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 11 Inventory Evaluation and Simulation Standard MFG PRO supports only a limited number of inventory evaluations Last In First Out LIFO and First In First Out FIFO methods of inventory evaluation are not supported In addition the average cost as calculated by standard MFG PRO is not a true mean for example when stock becomes zero or falls below zero MFG PRO restarts its calculations This is because MFG PRO makes calculations based on available stock European Accounting adds Inventory Evaluation and Simulation functionality referred to here as I E S to enhance the fu
418. vered by the report Every transaction must have an effective date This date determines when a transaction actually takes effect in the General Ledger The dates specified here must cover dates contained in the GL Calendar By default if no dates are specified here the Italian Statement of Account report covers the period between the first date of the first period and the current date Summary no detail Enter Yes or No to specify if the report is to show full details of all transactions included within it or if just a one line summary of each account is to be given By default details of all transactions are shown Set this field to Yes to create a summarized version of the report Summarize sub accounts Enter Yes or No to specify if the report is to summarize the values for all sub accounts rather than listing separate details for each individual sub account in the range selected Sumarize cost centers Enter Yes or No to specify if the report is to summarize the values for all cost centers rather than listing separate details for each individual cost center in the range selected Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 58 European Accounting User Guide Show Transaction Description Enter Yes or No to specify if the GL description will be included in the report or not Yes the default includes these descriptions No excludes them Show Currency Enter Yes or No to determine if the original currency amount will be prin
419. versing transactions and matches them to the original transactions Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 48 European Accounting User Guide Reversing Matched Transactions Should you match a transaction by mistake you can reverse it manually using Manual Matching Reversal 25 13 23 7 or automatically using Automatic Matching Reversal 25 13 23 5 To use either of these functions the total of the selected transactions that you want to reverse must be zero Using Manual Matching Reversal you reverse matched transactions one account at a time If you know the original matching number assigned to the particular matching process you want to reverse simply enter that to reverse the relevant transaction Manual Matching Reversal However you might want to reverse a number of matched transactions in which case you can use Automatic Matching Reversal Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 3 General Ledger 49 Automatic Matching Reversal Consolidating Matched Transactions In standard MFG PRO historical transactions are grouped together in one consolidation transaction using Transaction Consolidation Where GL transaction matching has been enabled only those transactions that have been matched can be consolidated The consolidating transaction itself is assigned a matching number If there is a considerable time gap between the original transaction and its matching one two matched trans
420. w looking at the credit amounts you can see that you want to use them as soon as possible If you can reconcile them if you had chosen to do so it should not matter what the credit memo s due date is In this example it is possible to argue that you should use USD 250 right away to pay the open vouchers Next to this credit amount you could pay up to the balance of the supplier which is USD 100 corrected to take account of the amounts on hold As a total you could now allocate USD 350 as a maximum in debit vouchers So you are now permitted to spend USD 350 on paying the selected vouchers VO96001 and V096002 You do so by reconciling the credit voucher VO96003 and paying an additional USD 50 The new payment would be Payment USD 50 Allocation VO096001 USD 100 V096002 USD 200 V096003 USD 250 Now looking at how European Accounting processes this you can see that European Accounting first calculates the corrected supplier balance This corrected supplier balance is the actual balance minus the amounts set on hold in all of the supplier s open vouchers and minus all other planned payments that are not yet processed for this supplier otherwise you risk paying too much Both for the determination of the hold amounts and the not yet processed payments European Accounting looks at all vouchers of the supplier not only those lying within the selection range of the payment selection In this example it is assumed that you have no other
421. with amount 200 3 Date 03 12 01 with amount 400 4 Date 04 12 01 with amount 200 5 Date 15 12 01with amount 1000 6 Date 31 12 01 with amount 800 Customer Balance 100 is negative Range 01 12 01 01 12 01 01 12 01 02 12 01 01 12 01 03 12 01 01 12 01 04 12 01 01 12 01 15 12 01 01 12 01 31 12 01 01 12 01 01 12 01 01 12 01 02 12 01 01 12 01 03 12 01 01 12 01 04 12 01 01 12 01 15 12 01 01 12 01 31 12 01 01 12 01 01 12 01 01 12 01 02 12 01 01 12 01 03 12 01 01 12 01 04 12 01 01 12 01 15 12 01 01 12 01 31 12 01 01 12 01 01 12 01 01 12 01 02 12 01 01 12 01 03 12 01 01 12 01 04 12 01 01 12 01 15 12 01 01 12 01 31 12 01 No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc No 100 200 200 800 400 900 201 Reconcile Allow Payment gt Resulting Selected Entries for Balance Payment 100 200 100 200 100 200 300 100 200 200 400 100 200 200 400 100 QAD Inc 202 European Accounting User Guide Automatic Payments Control File To be able to execute payment selections you should set the Automatic Payments Control File 28 9 4 24 Three directory
422. ximum amount is taken Allow Payment gt Balance Enter Yes or No to determine if the selection program allow the total amount selected for payment to be greater then the current balance of the customer This could be the case when the flag Reconcile Credit Memos is set to No Reconcile Credit Memos Enter Yes or No to specify if you want to reconcile open credit amounts with selected debit amounts If you choose to not reconcile and the flag Allow Payment gt Balance is set to yes then planned payments are created upto the balance of the customer Amounts collected may not exceed the balance of the customer When the payment method is defined By Document type 3 of the Due setting then this option is not updateable Show Not Selected Memos Enter Yes or No to specify if the audit trail should also show memos that have not been selected for example if they are beyond the balance of customer By default this flag is set to No but if you set it to Yes the reason shy memos were not originally selected is also shown Amount Selection The amount already selected in the payment selection in base currency Due Date Selection of due dates of open Dr Cr memos Disc Date Selection of discount dates of open Dr Cr memos Bill To Selection of bill to addresses of open Dr Cr memos Cust Type Selection of customer types Reference Selection of references of open Dr Cr memos AR Type Selection of AR types of open Dr Cr memos Cr Terms Selection of credi
423. xisting active account and the combination of account sub account and cost center must also be valid When these accounts have been defined they are used in Voucher Maintenance as follows When the exchange rate changes between purchase order receipt and voucher maintenance the resulting difference will be posted to one of the following e The purchase gain or purchase loss account defined in Purchase Gain Loss Maintenance 26 10 for the combination of the voucher currency and the item s product line if this record is available or if this is not available e The purchase gain or purchase loss account defined in Purchase Gain Loss Maintenance 26 10 for the voucher currency needed when the item being vouchered is a memo item if this record exists or if this is not available e The unrealized gain or unrealized loss account defined for the voucher currency in Currency Maintenance 26 1 An inquiry is also available Purchase Gain Loss Inquiry 26 11 This allows you to display details on the purchase gain loss accounts sub accounts as specified in Purchase Gain Loss Maintenance Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 2 Setup and Basic Data 27 Purchase Gain Loss Inquiry 26 11 Purchase benio lea Preiept Line Dood Purchase Gace Bonnunt bide Purchase Lowe Acoount bit You can select all entries or can choose to display entries in a specific currency or from a specific product line
424. xt Seq Number Next Seq Number 2 13 7 3 VAT Register Report EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT 02 10000 yes yes 00000000 00000000 iv02 Next Seq Number IV500000 cr02 Next Seq Number C0000002 vo02 Next Seq Number VO00002 co02 Next Seq Number 2 13 7 3 VAT Register Report EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT la 10000 yes no purchase vat header 00000003 sales vat header 00000004 laiv Next Seq Number 1ai00043 lacr Next Seq Number lac00002 lavo Next Seq Number lav00012 laco Next Seq Number laa00002 2 13 7 3 VAT Register Report EA to eB TEST ENVIRONMENT la 11000 no no la site 11000 purchase VAT header 00000001 la site 11000 sales VAT header 00000003 lliv Next Seq Number 11100002 llcr Next Seq Number 11c00002 llvo Next Seq Number 11v00002 Tdo Next Seq Number 11c00002 Date 19 03 01 Time 11 54 19 Date 19 03 01 Time 11 54 19 Date 19 03 01 Time 11 54 19 Date 19 03 01 Time 11 54 19 Date 19 03 01 Time 11 54 19 Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 8 Value Added Tax and Other Taxes 271 euvtrgrp p c7la Page 6 VAT Register Site Active EC VAT Register Header For Purchase VAT Register Next Page Number Header For Sales VAT Register Next Page Number Invoice Sequence ID Credit Note Sequence ID Voucher Sequence ID Correction Invoice Sequence ID euvtrgrp p c7la Page 7 VAT Register Site Active EC VAT Register Header For Purchase V
425. y and the required values are the same as for those used with shippers on Sales Orders and Customer Schedules The shipper number is generated from the shipper sequence as defined in the Shipping Group and the Inventory Movement code defaults from there but may be changed if necessary to another valid code All of the other fields are required where such information is needed on the physical shipper document The system then allows the shipper to be printed Inventory Movement codes are required where the flag Require Inventory Movement Codes is set to Yes in the Container Shipper Control File 7 9 24 European Accounting prompts for Inventory Movement Codes in Issues Unplanned and Receipts Unplanned in order to determine the default debit or credit account for such transactions This prompt appears after the entry of quantity site and location information Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 424 European Accounting User Guide Unplanned Issue Inventory Movement Code The code you enter can be any valid inventory movement code up to eight alphanumeric characters in length It is used to determine the appropriate credit unplanned receipts or debit unplanned issues GL account and cost center for the transaction By default the account and cost centers defined in Inventory Movement Code Maint 1 1 9 for this inventory movement code are used However if none have been defined there these values default to the
426. y The country of dispatch Destination Country The country of destination Intra Cost Pct A percentage to add or subtract to or from the invoice value per KG An amount in base currency to add or subtract to or from the invoice value for each KG sent or received Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 342 European Accounting User Guide per Each An amount in base currency to add or subtract to or from the invoice value for each item sent or received Min Intra Cost A minimum value for transport and insurance costs A browse function is available for Statistical Value Calculation Statistical Value Calculation Browse i Sial Value Cake Brewen 1 BO 9 ce alaja Sala oalele Ship Via The MFG PRO ship via from which the inquiry should start Delivery Condition The method of delivery FOB Point from which the inquiry should start Transaction Type The transaction type from which the inquiry should start Other Country The country of destination from which the inquiry should start Declarant Country The country of dispatch from which the inquiry should start Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 10 Intrastat 343 Entering Transactions Transactions can be entered in the standard manner and can be marked for Import Export Import Export flag in Sales Order Maintenance The update of the Intrastat export data has been moved after the sales order trailer This way
427. y an Intrastat report each month The information to be shown on the Intrastat Report varies from country to country but the basic information is split into header and item data and includes e Header e Trader Detail VAT number Name Address e Period Month Year e Flow indications importation exportation e Total numbers of pages e Jtem Data e Origin country e Destination country e Port of Arrival or Departure e Port of Transshipment e Commodity Code e Net Mass in Kilos e Supplementary Units if required depending on the commodity code The format of the Intrastat Report and the medium plain paper pre printed forms computer disk tape etc must comply with local requirements As each country has its own separate specification reports have to be created for each individual country European Accounting uses the standard MFG PRO Intrastat logic but adds functionality to it and also modifies the screen flow The following changes are applied by European Accounting e Calculation of statistical values The Intrastat reports should report the values of the goods at the border meaning that costs such as insurance and transport should be added European Accounting introduces a kind of formula that determines the addition of costs both percentages and amounts related to the quantity or weight e Use of declarants A declarant is a combination of entities that make a shared declaration e Intrastat report drivers
428. y of them Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 1 Introduction Welcome to European Accounting an integrated module of MFG PRO adding new and enhanced functionality to MFG PRO Financials to support various legal and accounting practices used in several European countries This chapter covers the following topics What Is European Accounting European Accounting Restrictions Customization Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc European Accounting User Guide What Is European Accounting European Accounting provides support for various legal requirements and common accounting practices found in the following European countries Belgium France Germany Italy Luxembourg The Netherlands Poland Spain United Kingdom European Accounting consists of three main parts Financial Enhancements This main module consists of a large number of enhancements to standard MFG PRO Financials These apply especially for accounting practices used throughout Europe Intrastat versions In 1993 with the changes in custom regulations in the EU European Union the Intrastat regulations regarding reporting trade data became effective Specific regulations apply for each country within the EU European Accounting enhances the standard QAD Intrastat logic to allow you to deliver the required reports in the format specified by specific countries Bank format drivers Special bank format drivers are
429. yable and Accounts Receivable At the transaction level you link an operation type to the AR memo or AP voucher Examples of operation types are e Our Invoice e Your Invoice e Our Credit Note e Your Credit Note e Our Debit Note These descriptions are shown for instance when the VAT Register is printed Use Operation Type Maintenance 2 13 11 to set operation types Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 12 European Accounting User Guide Operation Type Maintenance Type of Operation A code to identify the type of operation Description A description of the operation type Group This code is used to group together several different operation types In the VAT register there will be a sub total per VAT register and Group of Operation types Refer to Chapter 4 Accounts Receivable for further details on operation types Operation type codes and VAT registers are defined on the header of sales quotes sales orders and pending invoices and other functions that can lead ultimately to the creation of an invoice Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 2 Setup and Basic Data 13 Added window with Type of Operation and VAT Register The same pop up frame will be displayed in the header of sales quotes pending invoices and other affected functions Country Table European Accounting modifies the country table by adding the following three fields e Intrastat Code e VAT Prefix e
430. ybook Codes rita Aipht M del err a TUE E Helerenre Oo Lan o mz Lee a mz az A further frame now displays where you can select the data elements from a pre defined list of fields that you want extracting from the relevant daybooks for inclusion in your report You can also specify the order in which these fields should be printed in the final report Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 9 Journals Report Contents naal Api M dol i me e orent 317 The report s contents can include up to a maximum of thirty fields which must be drawn from the following list Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc Account code Account description Address Batch Bank code Bank Slip Beginning balance Check number Cost center Cum balance QAD Inc 318 Note You cannot include duplicate fields in the same report Daybook code Daybook description Daybook sequence Number Description Document number Document type Effective Date Entity Entry date GL reference Invoice number Journal Line number Period Project Purchase order Reversing transaction Sales order Sub Account Transaction type European Accounting User Guide Finally you can select sort criteria in Journal Report Maintenance s last frame that determine the positioning of certain fields within the printed report The ordering of all the other fields except from those which appear in the
431. year MFG PRO s standard Transaction Year End Close 25 13 12 closes a General Ledger fiscal year to all further GL transactions The year end can only be closed after all period end processing has completed and the necessary financial statements have been printed and audited You must run Transaction Year End Close before printing any financial statements for the new fiscal year to ensure the printed balance sheets or trial balances for the new year are correct Once closed a GL calendar year cannot be re opened so it is advisable to back up your database prior to running Transaction Year End Close European Accounting enhances the standard functionality offered by Transaction Year End Close to allow the formal closing of GL transactions for income and expense accounts the closing of balance sheet accounts and the creation of opening entries for balance sheet accounts Three new GL transactions are created by this function to achieve this Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc Chapter 3 General Ledger 37 e AGL transaction with an effective date of the last day of the fiscal year which formally closes all income and expense accounts Any differences are posted to the retained earning account specified in the GL Control File 25 24 e AGL transaction with an effective date of the last day of the fiscal year which formally closes all balance sheet accounts Any differences found are posted to the Year End Closing Balan
432. ym m When To Py Only is set to Yes selection of payment method in payment selection otherwise selection of payment method in vouchers Proprietary information Property of QAD Inc QAD Inc 240 European Accounting User Guide To Pay Only Enter Yes or No to specify if you want to look only at vouchers that have been selected for payment When you enter No then all open vouchers that satisfy the other selection criteria are viewed Check Date to use for determining the discount The middle window is for display purposes only The lower window has the following fields Voucher The reference of the open voucher Supplier The supplier of the open voucher Cur The currency of the voucher Amount The amount of the voucher To Pay The amount to pay for this voucher Discount The amount to discount for this voucher Bk When this voucher is included in a payment selection the bank of the payment selection otherwise the bank of the voucher Pm When this voucher is included in a payment selection the payment method of the payment selection otherwise the payment method of the voucher Modifying Payment Selections Payment selections can be modified using e Payment Selection Automatic 28 9 4 1 Adds automatic selected payments or creates a new payment selection instead of an existing one Delete old selection e Payment Selection Manual 28 9 4 2 Manually changes planned payments or adds new planned payments to an existin

MFG/PRO eB User Guide: European Accounting

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents